LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 

Chap. Copyright No. 

Shelf..rR3 

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



A'N EXPOSITIO]Sr 



OF 



THE FORM OF GOVERNMENT 



AND THE 



EXILES OF DISOIPLIl^E 



THE PRESBYTERIAN CHURCH IN THE 
UNITED STATES. 



BY 

Eey. F. p. RAMSAY, 

President of Fredericksburg College, Virginia. 



EICHMOND, VA.: 

The PKESBYTEEiAisr Committee of Publication. 

u 



TWO COPIES RECEIVED, 

Library of Congress, 

DEC] 6 i^nn 

Register of Copyrrg^a^ 




^^3 



COPTEIGHT, 18S8, 



JAMES K. HAZEN, Secretary of Publication. 



SECOND COPY, 







TO MY MOTHER, 

WHO CONSECRATED ME FROM BIRTH TO THE MINISTRY OF 

CHRIST AND His trUtH iN oUr beLon/ed cHOrcH, 

MY FIRST book, 

Written iN loYaL LoVe of tHis cHUrch> 

IS dedicated 

OUT OF THE GRATEFUL AFFECTION OF A SoN- 

THE AUTHOR. 



PREFACE 



Dr. Beatty has given our church an exposition 
of her doctrinal standards, and it has met with a 
deserved appreciation ; but there has not been 
hitherto attempted an exposition of our standards 
of order. Believing that there is even more need 
in this direction, since the standards of order are 
of more recent formulation, and have been less 
studied, the writer has set himself to this task, 
persuading himself that the more urgent need will 
help to excuse an inferior performance. 

This is not intended to be a Digest of decisions 
and precedents, such as Dr. Alexander has made 
and is making for our young church, leaving no- 
thing of this sort for others to do among us, nor a 
compendium of the usages and customs that have 
gradually grown up among Presbyterians, such as 
Dr. Aspinwall Hodge has compiled, and is keeping 
up to date, but this aims to be an exposition of the 
text of the Book of Church Order. No attempt is 
here made to prove the scripturalness or wisdom 
of the Book, but to expound it. The exposition is 
sympathetic, both because the writer would be in- 
capable of making any other, and because he thinks 

5 



6 Preface. 

that only the sympathetic expositor can give a just 
exposition. He has, accordingly, omitted to set 
forth any individual notions he may have of possi- 
ble improvements. This was not the place to criti- 
cize, but to expound. 

But the writer has concluded his exposition with 
a deep conviction that the more our standards are 
studied the less disposition there will be to criti- 
cize them. For it may be conceded that our sys- 
tem of government is one that works with much 
friction and confusion, and, it must be admitted, 
with considerable inefficiency, if those who work 
it do not understand it and intelligently approve it ; 
for there are other systems that work more easily 
and satisfactorily in the hands of adherents not 
generally intelligent and capable. All we can claim 
is that the members and officers of any church need 
to know its system of government well enough, and 
to love it well enough, to work it efficiently, and 
that for those thus qualified ours is the best sys- 
tem, even among the different systems that are 
scriptural in their main principles. To promote 
the study of our standards of order, and thereby a 
devotion to them and a working knowledge of them, 
is the end of this effort. 

He reserves for a separate volume the Directory 
for Worship, because the study of the Form of 
Government and the Eules of Discipline will neces- 
sarily be more nearly limited to the officers and to 



Preface. 7 

a few of superior intelligence or special interest, 
while it is to be hoped that a more general famil- 
iarity with the Directory can be promoted. 

The writer will avail himself of this opportunity 
to say three things for which there was no suitable 
place in the body of the work : 

1. There is a system of government and discip- 
line. The Form of Government especially is but 
little inferior to the Shorter Catechism itself in 
logical construction and completeness. The Rules 
of Discipline does not, as a composition, reach so 
high a level. But the two together set forth a 
system of government and discipline. Now to un- 
dertake to direct the activities of this organization, 
our church organized for government and discip- 
line upon this system of principles, without an in- 
telligent comprehension of these principles in their 
relation to each other as a complete system, is sure 
to result in clash and confusion ; and it will be still 
worse to undertake to amend parts without first 
comprehending the relation of the parts as a whole. 
The mastery of our system of government and dis- 
cipline is, therefore, urged as important, and as 
worth the time and effort needed both for the sake 
of the intellectual discipline and for the practical 
efficiency of our church. 

2. Discipline, thorough and scriptural, is possi- 
ble under our system. It is not necessary to argue 
that discipline is a duty enjoined in the Scriptures; 



8 Preface. 

but there is among us, one is tempted to say, a 
pervading infidelity of the worth of such teachings. 
Outside of the discipline of ministers charged with 
heresies, and of very notorious offenders in moral- 
ity, there is seldom anything in the nature of judi- 
cial prosecution among us ; and there is reason to 
believe that there is even less of that forewarning 
which looks forward to such prosecution. This 
laxity is due in part, it may be, to reaction from an 
extreme in the other direction, to the great diffi- 
culty of efficient discipline in the midst of a too 
sharp denominational rivalry and competition, and 
to the so generally diffused tendency to depreciate 
authority of every sort ; but it is due in part, also, 
to the uncertainty of how to proceed, and the fear 
that judicial procedure in our system is too com- 
plicated for practical use. This impression is not 
correct. It is true that, when efforts are made to 
convict for principles or practices on which the 
mind of the church is more or less divided, or to 
convict men who have the general confidence in 
their soundness of doctrine and purity of life for 
particular aberrations, contention and agitation 
are to be expected, and the attainment of definite 
good results is doubtful ; but the machinery of dis- 
cipline provided would prove itself eminently effi- 
cient and safe, at once fair and persuasive, in actual 
use in most cases that need such treatment. It is 
not easy to exercise discipline, not only on account 



Peeface. 9 

of the imperfection of those who are to exercise it, 
but also on account of the strength of corruption 
that has come for the lack of discipline ; and dis- 
cipline is especially difficult where the revenues of 
the church come from voluntary contributions. To 
censure offenders generally endangers revenue. It 
requires a lofty indifference to financial considera- 
tions in comparison with spiritual results, or the 
inexperience of youth, to embolden to attempt 
thorough discipline. Many attempts have failed 
largely because the men who failed when they had 
less wisdom of experience and less maturity of 
spiritual growth have not attempted it when they 
became better qualified. Their former failures, 
and the new Book, make them afraid. But we 
must come to it or we perish. The churches of 
America must learn to exercise discipline, or the 
experiment of religious liberty, without financial 
aid from the civil power, will prove a failure. Such 
a result will not come, for the churches will learn 
this lesson of discipline. It may be through bitter 
experience of the fruits of laxity and of the conse- 
quent worldly corruption of the church, but to dis- 
cipline the church must come. And it is here in- 
sisted that we have the usable machinery of dis- 
cipline, and all we need now is the spiritual power 
to make it efficient. 

3. The church is a spiritual organization. This 
exposition has to do with rules and regulations, 



10 Preface. 

with the mechanism of ecclesiastical action, to so 
large an extent that the writer is unwilling to send 
it forth without this distinct assertion that the 
church is spiritual. It must do all its doings in 
the Spirit. It is not constitutional regularity, it is 
not mechanical perfection, that makes the church 
efficient for its end ; it is the Spirit of Christ using 
the church as his agent. This Spirit creates fit in- 
struments for his own use, and therefore we may 
expect the church to become more nearly perfect 
in organization and methods as it becomes more 
perfectly the obedient organ of the Holy Spirit; 
but, alas, form and machinery may exist without life 
and power ; and the deepest desire of the writer 
would not be realized by his work if it should not 
help toward the fuller efficiency of our church in 
gathering and perfecting the spiritual body of 
Christ. 

If to this end the King and Head of the^ whole 
church will bless this imperfect work, the author 
will be grateful for the honor and privilege of thus 
serving his brethren. 

F. P. KAMSAY. 

[Note. — The text is printed in brevier type and the com- 
ment in small pica. The use of the two sorts of type makes 
possible the intermingling of text and comment, and yet the 
consulting of the text by itself.] 



EXPOSITIOlSr 

OF THE 

Book of Chitroh Order. 



The supreme standard, the one rule of faith and 
practice, of the Presbyterian Church in the United 
States, is the Bible. Its subordinate standards are 
the doctrinal symbols (which are the Confession of 
Faith and the Catechisms) and the Book of Church 
Order. This book has three parts: the Form of 
Government, which treats of the ecclesiastical or- 
ganization, its parts and their functions ; the Eules 
of Discipline, which gives special regulations for 
directing the exercise of the ecclesiastical power of 
censure; and the Directory for Worship, which 
gives special directions for the conduct of public 
worship. 

The Form of Government has seven chapters : 
the first on preliminary definitions; the next five 
on the five heads of the doctrine of church govern- 
ment ; and the seventh on amending the standards. 

Similarly, the first chapter, 

CHAPTER I. 

Of the Doctrine of Chuech Government, 

has seven sections: one preliminary, one on each 
of the five heads of doctrine, and one on the rela- 
tion of this doctrine to the existence and perfection 
of the Church. 

11 



12 Chap. I., Par. 1. 1, 2 

1. — I. The scriptural form of church government, which 
is that of Presbytery, is comprehended under these five heads 
of doctrine, viz. : 1. Of the Church; 2. Of its Members; 3. Of 
its Officers: 4. Of its Courts; and 5. Of its Orders. 

However little the Scripture may lay down pre- 
scriptions in detail in the matter of church govern- 
ment, it teaches a form of church go'vernment; so 
that both those are in error who deny church gov- 
ernment altogether, and those who, admitting that 
the Scripture teaches government, deny that it 
teaches any particular form of government. And 
the form of government is neither a form in which 
all are equally rulers nor a form in which one rules 
over many, but a form in which some rule over all. 
Neither any Congregational form in which the 
authority is in the body of the people, nor any 
Episcopal form in which the authority is in an indi- 
vidual, is scriptural, but only that form in which the 
authority is in a selected few acting together as a 
court. This is Presbytery^ which means a court 
of elders. And the doctrine concerning this scrip- 
tural form of church government naturally falls 
under five heads. After telling what the Church 
is, it will be next in place to tell who constitute it, 
that is, of what members it consists. As it is gov- 
erned by officers and not by the members, the next 
thing must be to tell what officers it has ; but as 
these officers do not govern severally but jointly, 
the courts come next in place; and finally, when 
we have the courts for admitting to office, we may 
learn concerning orders, or how officers are or- 
dained. It is this exhaustive and logical treatment 
that the Form of Government proposes. 

2. — II. The Church which the Lord Jesus Christ has 



2 Chap. I., Par. 2. 13 

erected in this world for the gathering and perfecting of the 
saints, is his visible kingdom of grace, and is one and the 
same in all ages. 

This is a definition of the Church which the Lord 
Jesus Christ has erected in this world, and not of 
the Church as it is to be in the final consummation, 
nor of the Church as it now is in heaven as well as 
earth. The Church thus limited, the Lord Jesus 
Christ lias erected ; and he has erected it for this 
purpose, for the gathering and perfecting of the 
saints. For it is not the office of the Church to do 
all good in human society, nor even to work upon 
all men except so far as it does this in working up- 
on a class, the saints. For them it has two things 
to do: first, to gather them, that is, out of the 
world into the Church; and second, to perfect 
them. The Churcli works upon men not already 
saints in their own consent in order to make them 
such, not in order to other ends, and upon saints, 
in order to make them perfect. By saints is meant 
persons that belong to Christ in sacred covenant. 
This Church, this gathered body of saints on earth, 
is his visible kingdom of grace. His kingdom 
comprehends all things and persons, but his king- 
dom of grace is more especially the saints; and 
his kingdom of grace includes saints that have 
fallen asleep, but the Church, as an organization 
with a government administered through men in 
the flesh, is his visible kingdom of grace. But the 
point of the definition lies in this, that the Church 
is a KINGDOM, having Christ as King. This king- 
dom is not two, one before the coming of Christ in 
the flesh and the other after his coming ; nor is it 
in accord with this definition to distinguish sharply 



14 Chap. I., Par. 3. 3 

between Church and Kingdom. All ages must in- 
clude the millennial age, if there is to be a millen- 
nium. Nor can there be more than one Church in 
the world at the same time ; and the use of the term 
to designate a part of the Church ought to be 
guarded from the implication that the part is the 
whole. 

Already by implication the membership of the 
Church is limited to saints; but here is a formal 
definition : 

3. — III. The members of this visible Church catholic are 
all those persons iii every nation, together with their children, 
who make profession of the holy religion of Christ, and of 
submission to his laws. 

Catholic, which means universal, is added in order 
to lay emphasis upon the doctrine that the Church 
is not limited to some section of it, whatever name 
some section may assume for itself. Its members 
are persons who make profession of the religion of 
Christ. That this does not mean a profession of 
opinion merely, but of consent of will also, is made 
certain by the explicit mention of what is implied, 
" and of submission to his laws." And the word 
"holy " implies the same idea as the word "saints," 
for by such a profession one becomes a saint, or 
discloses that he is a saint, that is, one belonging 
to Christ in sacred covenant. Not only are all 
persons making this profession members of the 
Church visible, but their children also. This in- 
cludes the children of parents that reject infant 
baptism; for it is not baptism that makes them 
members. Baptism recognizes the membership 
that exists before the baptism is administered ; for 
whoever binds himself to Christ in sacred cove- 



4 Chap. I., Par. 4. 15 

nant, thereby binds his children in the same cove- 
nant; so that his child is holy as well as himself. 
If it be objected that an infant cannot be holy, the 
answer to the objection is to be fonnd in under- 
standing the meaning of holy as here used, belong- 
ing to Christ in sacred covenant ; for these infants 
of the saints must either be classed with the saints 
or with the profane, and the definition classes 
them with the saints. 

It is to be observed that the visible Church in- 
cludes all who profess the religion of Christ ; that is, 
profess subjection to his laws, whether they are re- 
generated or not, and does not include any regener- 
ated persons that do not make such profession, since 
without such profession, they are not visible as 
members of the Church. But is the visible Church 
of this paragraph identical with the visible king- 
dom of grace of the preceding paragraph? Yes. 
Christ uses false professors, and uses them as parts 
of his visible Church or Kingdom; for they are, 
temporarily, in and of this organization, even as a 
dead tooth is a part of the body. 

Against the doctrine that the Church is to be 
governed by all its members, the doctrine of Pres- 
bytery sets the assertion that all the powers of the 
Church are to be administered by officers, and 
against all claimants of right to exercise ecclesias- 
tical power, besides the classes of ofiicers here 
enumerated, it is denied that their claim is scrip- 
tural. 

4. — IV. The officers of the Church, by whom all its powers 

the other powers as well as powers of government 
strictly, 



16 Chap. L, Par. 6, 6. 5, 6 



are administered, are, according to the Scriptures, Ministers of 
the Word, Kuling Elders and Deacons. 

The power is vested in the body, but it is to be ad- 
ministered, not by the whole body, nor by com- 
mittees appointed from the body, but by perma- 
nent Officees. These officers are not all one class, 
appointed to different functions from time to time, 
nor two classes only, as Elders and Deacons, the 
Elders being assigned from time to time to differ- 
ent works, but three classes : Ministers of the Word, 
Huling Elders, and Deacons. 

As already implied, the power of government in 
the stricter sense, 

5. — V. Ecclesiastical jurisdiction is not a several 

power, to be exercised by an individual, 

but a joint power, to be exercised by Presbyters in courts. 

Presbyter means an officer having joint jurisdic- 
tion with other officers. 

These courts may have jurisdiction over one or many churches ; 
but they sustain such mutual relations as to realize the idea of 
the unity of the Church. 

It is necessary to note the distinction between 
"church" and "Church." The latter has been al- 
read}^ defined in paragraph 2, and the former will 
be defined in paragraph 20. The Church is one. 
No group of churches is together independent of 
the whole Church ; and especially can no particu- 
lar church be, of right, independent of the Church 
catholic, any more than an individual member. 
This is an emphatic denial of Independency. 

What follows 

6. — yi. The ordination of officers is ordinarily by a court. 



•? Chap. I, Par. 7; Chap. 11. 17 

is an emphatic denial of Episcopacy. For "ordi- 
narily " does not admit that sometimes an individ- 
ual may, in his own authority rather than in the 
authority of a court, ordain officers, but that some- 
times officers may be immediately appointed by 
Jesus Christ without the intervention of a court, as 
in the case of the Twelve Apostles. 

But some of the Church as defined in para- 
graph 2, do not accept this doctrine of Presby- 
tery; how, then, can they be members of the 
Church? 

7. —VII. This scriptural doctrine of Presbytery is necessary 
to the perfection of the order of the visible Church, but is not 
essential to its existence. 

The visible Church may exist, and may be an 
ordered body, without this doctrine, its officers 
having valid ordination ; but without this doctrine 
the Church must lack something necessary to make 
its order perfect. Without it, there will be more or 
less of violation of the scriptural order, some men 
discharging official functions to which they have 
not been properly appointed, and some needful 
official functions not being adequately provided 
for. 



CHAPTER 11. 



Having laid down these preliminary definitions, 
which must rule the interpretation throughout, the 
Form of Government proceeds to enlarge upon 
each of the five heads of doctrine. And first is 



CHAPTER II.— Of the Chuec.t. 
2 



18 Chap. II., Sec. I., Par. 1. 8 

As the Church is a kingdom erected by its King, 
it is in place first to treat of the King. Then the 
kingdom itself may be more fully described. And, 
as this book is giving the doctrine of the govern- 
ment of the Church, it is next in place to treat of 
church power. But, since the Church is divided 
into many particular churches, there must be a 
section on the particular church. And here is nat- 
urally added a section on the organizing of a par- 
ticular church. 

Section I. — Of its King and Head, 

in its first paragraph presents Jesus Christ as the 
King and Head of the Church ; in the second para- 
graph shows his offices in the government of the 
Church ; and in the third tells how he has equipped 
the Church itself; and in the fourth points out the 
nature and method of his activity in the Church, as 
the other paragraphs have treated of his activity 
over the Church. And this section is not a mean- 
ingless collection of pious phrases about Christ, 
but is a most careful and intentional expression of 
Yiews considered specially important. 

This remark applies in all its force to the first 
paragraph, an unusually long and eloquent sen- 
tence. 

8. — I. Jesus Christ, upon whose shoulders the government 
is, whose name is called Wonderful, Counsellor, the Mighty 
God, the Everlasting Father, the Prince of Peace; of the in- 
crease of whose government and peace there shall be no end ; 
who sits upon the throne of David, and upon his kingdom, to 
order it and to establish it with Judgment and with iustice 
from henceforth, even for ever, 

is the subject of the sentence. "Jesus Christ, 
upon whose shoulders the government is," is the 



8 Chap. II., Sec. I., Pak. 1. 19 

opening designation of the Head of the Church; 
and the three following relative clauses ascribe to 
him three things : first, the dignity of Deity ; second, 
eternal authority over the Church ; and third, suc- 
cession to David, thus identifying the Church with 
the Messianic kingdom. Next is interposed a par- 
ticipial clause concerning authority beyond the 
Church for it : 

Having all power given unto him by the Father, who raised 
him from the dead, and set him on his own right hand, far 
above all principality and power, and might, and dominion, 
and every name that is named, not only in this world, but also 
in that which is to come, and hath put all things under his 
feet, and gave him to be Head over all things to the Church, 
which is his body, the fulness of him that filleth all in all ; 

This quotation affirms in the most sweeping way 
the lordship of Jesus Christ as universal, a uni- 
versal lordship that has been given to him as Head 
of the Church, 

he, 

Jesus Christ thus described, 

being ascended up far above all heavens, that he might fill all 
things, received gifts for his Church, 

which already existed, 

and gave all officers necessary for the edification of his Church 
and the perfecting of his saints. 

Here "edification of his Church" must include 
what is meant by "gathering" in paragraph 2. 

The special point of the paragraph is that Jesus 
Christ is the sole source of all church power. No 
man can have any office in the Church except as 
appointed hy Jesus Christ himself^ who himself 
equips and appoints all other officers besides him- 



20 Chap. II., Sec. I., Pak. 2. 9 

self. The Church is a kingdom, and he is, in right 
and practice. King. 

But the power of Christ is not merely an ap- 
pointing power; he himself discharges all official 
functions whatever. 

9. — II. Jesus, the Mediator, the sole Priest, Prophet, King, 
Saviour, and Head of the Church, 

for now there is no subordinate priest or prophet, 
as there is no other King or Saviour or Head ; 

contains in himself, by way of eminency, all the offices in his 
Church, and has many of their names attributed to him in the 
Scriptures. He is Apostle, Teacher, Pastor, Minister and 
Bishop, and the only Lawgiver in Zion. 

For not even Moses is called a lawgiver in the 
Scriptures. Not only is every claim to legislative 
authority or to original control of every sort denied 
as to all but Christ himself; but also he has all 
offices within himself, so that he is not a Minister 
of the Word, but the Minister of the Word, not a 
Euling Elder, but the Kuling Elder, and not a 
Deacon, but the Deacon, of his Church. There- 
fore, 

It belongs to his Majesty from his throne of glory, to rule and 
teach the Church, through his Word and Spirit, by the ministry 
of men ; thus mediately exercising his own authority, and en- 
forcing his own laws, unto the edification and establishment 
of his kingdom. 

By including all official functions under the terms 
''rule and teach," the sentence does not make dis- 
tribution a non-official function, but includes it 
under these as being in order to them. The prin- 
ciple must not be lost sight of, that it is Christ who 
rules and teaches the Church by the ministry of 
men, and not they who rule and teach the Church 



10 Chap. II., Sec. I., Par. 3. 21 

for him. They are not themselves governors, but 
the media of the only Governor. 

We are now to see how Christ as King has 
equipped his Church, so that he may exercise in 
and upon it his authority mediately. 

10. — III. Christ, as King, has given to his Church, officers, 
oracles, and ordinances; and especially has he ordained therein 
his sj^stem of doctrine, government, discipline, and worship; 
all which are either expressly set down in Scripture, or by good 
and necessary consequence may be deduced therefrom ; and 
to which things he commands that nothing be added, and that 
from them naught be taken away. 

Each of the four clauses of this paragraph is import- 
ant. The first enumerates the gifts of the King to his 
Church under three heads: officers; oracles, which 
are the Scriptures; ordinances, which comprise all 
things that he has ordered to be done. None of 
these gifts are originated by the Church or by 
human invention, but they are all gifts of Christ as 
King. The second clause names especially as 
among his ordinances his fourfold system of doc- 
trine, which is expounded in the doctrinal symbols; 
government, the form of which is set forth in this 
book ; discipline, the regulations for which are laid 
down in the Rules of Discipline ; and worship, the 
directions for which are given in the Directory for 
Worship. Everything ought to be done as the 
King has ordained. But where are we to learn 
what he has ordained ? In Scripture. There we 
shall find all his ordinances, it is his entire oracles, 
and it shows what officers he has appointed, and 
with what functions. If anything is not expressly 
set down in Scripture, it may be deduced from it, 
not by fanciful imagination, but by correct infer- 
ence. What seems incomplete is to be completed 



22 Chap. II., Sec. I., Par. 4; Sec. II. 11 

by application of the principles set down in Scrip- 
ture ; for the King allows no man or set of men, 
whatever offices they may hold in his Church, to 
add or substract. This paragraph justifies the first 
sentence of this exposition, that the supreme 
standard, the one rule of faith and practice of the 
Presbyterian Church in the United States is the 
Bible. To this, both the first and the final appeal 
must always be made. 

But it would be a great mistake to suppose 
that the only connection of Christ with the present 
government of the church is through the mere lan- 
guage of Scripture as interpreted by men. 

11. — IV. Since the ascension of Jesus Christ to heaven, he 
is present with the Church by his Word and Spirit, and the 
benetits of all his offices are effectually applied by the Holy 
Ghost. 

Not only by the word, but also by the Holy Spirit, 
is the ascended Christ present with his Church ; 
and thus he is ever effectually discharging all his 
offices in his own living presence through the 
human media. 

The whole section makes the Church to be but 
the completion of Christ, his bodying of himself 
forth : take him away, take away his living activity, 
and the Church is nothing, and its authority is no- 
thing. 

Section II. — The Yisible Church Defined. 

While the visible Church is one, it has two sorts 
of divisions, into different denominations and into 
particular churches ; accordingly, this section, after 
affirming the unity of the Church in the first para- 
graph, discusses the division into denominations 



12, 13 Chap. II., Sec. II., Pars. 1, 2. 28 

in the second paragraph, and the division into 
particular churches in the third paragraph. 

13. —I. The visible Church before the law, under the law, 
and now under the gospel, is one and the same, and consists of 
all those who make profession of the true religion, together 
with their children. 

This is the same principle as that stated in para- 
graph 2 ; but, instead of the more sweeping '' in all 
ages," this particularizes three ages : before Moses, 
from Moses to Christ, and since Christ. This also 
repeats the principle stated in paragraph 3, only 
substituting for "the holy religion of Christ and of 
submission to his laws" its equivalent, 'Hhe true 
religion." 

13.— II. This visible unity of the body of Christ, though 
obscured, is not destroyed by its division into different denom- 
inations of professing Christians ; but al 1 of these which maintain 
the Word and Sacraments in their fundamental integrity are to 
be recognized as true branches of the Church of Jesus Christ. 

Two principles are here conceded: that visible 
unity is desirable, and that the division into differ- 
ent denominations, into separate associations of 
churches, makes against this visible unity. As the 
separation of a particular church from other par- 
ticular churches in one organization obscures 
church unity, so does the separation of an associa- 
tion of churches from union with other associations 
in one organization. But such division does not 
destroy visible unity. The real unity of the invisi- 
ble Church is unity in Christ, the one Head; and, 
since the members of different denominations are, 
in their profession, visibly united to Christ, their 
visible unity is not destroyed by this degree of 
separation. Indeed, it is not so much organiza- 



U Chap. TI., Seo, II., Par. 3. 14 

tional separateness that contravenes organic unity 
as it is organizational disfellowship that argues 
organic disunity. Hence, a broad recognition 
is here given to other denominations. For, on the 
one hand, this recognition is explicitly extended to 
all that maintain the Word and Sacraments in their 
fundamental integrity ; and, on the other, it is not 
withheld from any professing Christians, though 
they reject some of the canon, or deny some of 
the teachings of Scripture, or pervert or omit the 
sacraments, even to the extent of trenching upon 
fundamental integrity. As to such, it must be in- 
quired whether they really profess the true reli- 
gion, that is, whether they profess the holy religion 
of Christ and submission to his laws. And even if 
order should be found altogether absent from an 
association of those making such profession, they 
would themselves be a part of the Church, in spite 
of their lack of order. 

The Presbyterian Church in the United States, 
then, continues its separate existence as a denomi- 
nation only upon the ground that its members 
would not be allowed to obey all the laws of Christ 
in any other organization; and it stands pledged 
to organizational union upon any basis permitting 
full obedience to all the teachings of Christ. And 
in calling itself " Church," it does not mean to reserve 
this title ior itself exclusively, but only to claim 
that it is tentatively endeavoring to make itself, as 
nearly as its enforced separateness will allow, con- 
form to what Christ would have his one catholic 
visible Church to be. 

14. — III. It is according to scriptural example that the 
Church should be divided into many particular churches. 



15 Chap. II., Seo. III., Par. 1. 25 

The division of the Church into particular churches 
does not obscure its unity, provided the courts of 
the particular churches are not independent of the 
court of the Church. (Cf. Par. 5.) 

Section III. — Of the Nature and Extent of Church Power. 
This section is extremely important in a Form of 
Government. The first two paragraphs point out 
the relation of the people and the officers to eccle- 
siastical power; the third paragraph shows what 
the Church as government has power to do, and 
the fourth what is the end of all its doing in all 
aspects, and the fifth recalls the relation of Christ 
to the exercise of this power. 

15. — I. The power which Christ has committed to his 
Church vests in the whole body, the rulers and the ruled, consti- 
tuting it a spiritual commonwealth. This power, as exercised 
by the people, extends to the choice of those officers whom he 
has appointed in his church. 

The statement that Christ has committed power to 
his Church must not be pressed to contradict para- 
graphs 9 and 11 ; but neither must it be weak- 
ened down to the conception that the Church 
is a mere voluntary society, and submission to it a 
matter of individual option. This power does not 
vest in the rulers as such, so that they are in no sense 
accountable to the people, or in the people as such, 
so that the rulers are merely their committeemen ; 
but in the whole body, each in his corporate or 
organic place having authority and being subject 
to authority. And while in relation to Christ the 
Church is a kingdom, in the inter-relations of its 
members it is neither a monarchy or oligarchy, 
nor a democracy, but a commonwealth. But this 
power the people exercise, not in appointing the 



26 Chap. IL, Sec. III., Par. 2. le 

officers, but in choosing those whom Christ has 
appointed and in rejecting usurpers that he has 
not appointed. Only so far ; for all the powers of 
the Church are to be administered by officers. (Cf. 
Par. 4.) 

As the Church is a spiritual commonwealth, the 
members thereof do not as such own material pro- 
perty in common. 

And the power is wholly spiritual; that is, it 
cannot apply physical force or extend material re- 
wards and penalties. 

16.— II. Ecclesiastical power, which is wholly spiritual, 
is twofold: the officers exercise it sometimes severally, as in 
preaching the gospel, administering the sacraments, reproving 
the erring, visiting the sick, and comforting the afflicted, which 
is the power of oj'der ; and they exercise it sometimes Jointly in 
Church courts, after the form of Judgment, which is the power 
of Jurisdiction. 

This must not be understood to contradict para- 
graph five. Even in exercising the power of order, 
that is, power that the individual has been or- 
dained to exercise, he is subject to the orders of 
the court and to its review and control; hence, 
what he does severally, that is, as an individual 
officer, he does as the agent of a court. This is 
true even of deacons, since they act under the im- 
mediate control of the Session. And so all official 
acts are as such to be according to the judgment of 
the court having jurisdiction. But the power of 
jurisdiction itself cannot be committed to an indi- 
vidual officer. For even official reproof of the err- 
ing by an individual officer cannot affect the eccle- 
siastical standing of the reproved. But it is 
important to note that the exercise of ecclesiastical 
power is not unofficial when it is exercised sever- 
ally any more than when it is exercised jointly. 



17 Chap. II., Sec. III., Par. 3. 27 

While the Church is a kingdom and goyern- 
ment, it is as such wholly distinct from the civil 
government. What, then, can its office be? 

17. — III. The sole functions of the Church, as a kingdom 
and government distinct from the civil commonwealth, are to 
proclaim, to administer, and to enforce the law of Christ re- 
vealed in the Scriptures. 

Three functions, though really running into one 
another in action, are distinguished: to proclaim 
law, which is not legislation, but the publication of 
law ; to administer law, which is judicially to praise 
and censure actions as conforming or contrary to 
law, and to enforce law, which is the infliction of 
penalty for violation of law. The nature of penal- 
ties that the Church may inflict is not in this para- 
graph defined ; the law with which church govern- 
ment concerns itself is carefully limited. It is not 
the will of the Church or of its officers, but only the 
law of Christ, nor is it the law of Christ known, or 
supposed to be known, in any way, but only the 
law of Christ revealed in the Scriptures. The law 
there revealed, and that only. The Church may 
require nothing that Christ in the Scriptures does 
not require ; and the Church may endorse nothing 
that Christ does not in the Scriptures teach. Em- 
phatically is nothing to be enforced because it is 
in the subordinate standards unless it is in the 
Scriptures. But the Church is not inhibited from 
formulating Christ's law as given in the Scriptures ; 
only it must be mere formulation of his law already 
thus revealed, and not some extra-scriptural regu- 
lation. 

The proclaiming, administering and enforcing of 
this law is not only the function of the Church, but 
the only function of the Church as a government. 



28 Chap. II., Sec. III., Par. 4. 18 

The scope of the Church's work is broader. 

18. — IV. The Church, with its ordinances, officers and 
courts, is the agency which Christ has ordained for the edifica- 
tion and government of his people, for the propagation of the 
faith, and for the evangelization of the world. 

The meaning is not that the Church and its ordi- 
nances, etc., but that the Church, is the agency, 
and that to the Church, as equipment for its work, 
have been given, besides its life in ail its members 
in varied forms and relations, especially ordinances, 
which are in the Scriptures, and officers and courts. 
The Church, then, and not the government of the 
Church, is the agency which Christ has ordained 
for this end : the edification and government of his 
people, the propagation of the faith from genera- 
tion to generation, and the evangelization of the 
world. This work of edification and evangelization 
is not the work of church officials alone, but of the 
whole Church ; and it is not a work for voluntary 
combinations of saints and others to do, but for the 
Church only. While work done by members of 
the Church in voluntary societies among them- 
selves, more or less apart from ecclesiastical organi- 
zation, is work done by the Church, yet organiza- 
tions, to do what the Church as an organization 
may do, tend to weaken and belittle the Church. 
Whatever is accomplished by organizations and 
societies for the edification of saints and the evan- 
gelization of the world, is not due to their not 
being Church so much as to the Church's putting 
forth its energies in them. 

An exercise of ecclesiastical power, though 
put forth by courts or officers appointed according 
to the Scriptures, fails of the divine sanction, un- 



19 Chap. II., Sec. III., Pae. 6 ; Sec. IV. 29 

less it conforms to the law of Christ ; and likewise 
will it fail of this sanction as an exercise of power, 
however fully it otherwise conforms to his law, if 
it is put forth by the unauthorized. For 

19. — Y. The exercise of ecclesiastical power, whether Joint or 
several, has the divine sanction, when in coDformity with the 
statutes enacted by Christ, the Lawgiver, and when put forth 
by courts or officers appointed thereunto in his Word. 

And this holds even when the persons are in an 
office to which Christ has not really appointed 
them by his Spirit, but when he has appointed the 
office in his Word, and they have come into the 
office in the govermental method prescribed in 
Scripture. And it is important to remember that 
to resist official authority, put forth within the lim- 
itations here indicated, even by men secretly wicked 
themselves, is to resist Christ in his official dignity. 

Section IV. — Of the Particular Church. 

The term local would not be so precise as the 
term particular ; for, if in the same place there are 
two churches, whose members live among one 
another, the one could not be distinguished from 
the other by locality; for two churches, worship- 
ping each in a language not understood by the 
members of the other, might worship even in the 
same building. And "particular" happily desig- 
nates the church as a part of the Church. 

After defining a particular church in the first 
paragraph, and naming its officers and indicating 
their functions in the next three paragraphs, the 
section, properly, enumerates its ordinances in the 
fifth paragraph. In close connection with this is 
added a sixth paragraph, on what ordinances a 
church is to observe when without a Pastor. 



30 Chap. II., Sec. IY., Par. 1. • 20 

20. — I. A particular church consists of a number of pro- 
fessing Christians, with their offspring, associated together for 
divine worship and godly living, agreeably to the Scriptures, 
and submitting to the lawful government of Christ's kingdom. 

The language, " professing Christians with their 
offspring," applies the principle of paragraph 3 to 
a particular church. Besides this, five points are 
to be noticed: (a), One professing Christian can- 
not be a church ; it requires a number. And yet, 
supposing a church loses its members until only 
one remains, is he a church? Strictly, while he is 
a member of the Church, he is not a member of a 
church ; and yet Presbytery might, in such a case, 
continue the name of the church on its roll as having 
in the one member a potential nucleus of a church. 
But he certainly continues a member of the Church. 
(5), It is not any church members put dovvn in 
the same list that constitute a church, but they 
must be associated together, (c). They must be 
associated together for divine worship and godly 
living. An association of such characters for con- 
ducting a certain industry would not be a church; 
but the object of their association must be twofold. 
The first is divine worship. This must be the main 
object of the association in its meetings together; 
for, though the association were for godly living, 
and its meetings mainly for the study of the Scrip- 
tures, rather than for worship, it would not be a 
church. On the other hand, an association that 
aimed at worship, without godly living, would be 
the mockery of a church, {d), They must be asso- 
ciated for these objects agreeably to the Scriptures. 
This must not be pressed so far as to contravene 
the principles laid down in paragraphs 3 and 7; 



21, 22 Chap. II., Sec. IY., Par. 2, 3. 31 

and yet an association fails of the idea of a churcli 
just so far as it does not proceed agreeably to the 
Scriptures, (e), The association must submit to 
the lawful government of Christ's kingdom ; for so 
far as any association is rebellious against the law- 
ful authority of Christ's kingdom, it is the contra- 
diction of a church. Yet it must not be forgotten 
that ho7}a Jide submission to Christ is submission to 
the lawful government of his kingdom in its source 
and essence. Perfect submission to this lawful 
government involves submission to courts of Pres- 
byters over many churches. (Cf. pars. 5 and 7.) 

21. — II. Its officers are the Pastor, the Euling Elders, and 
the Deacons. 

This implies that, ordinarily, a particular church 
should have one Pastor, but a plurality of Euling 
Elders and of Deacons. A church has no other 
officers than these; therefore trustees, Sunday- 
school officers, society officers, etc., are not officers 
of the church, nor independent of the control of the 
proper officers. 

22.— III. 
And the Deacons have no authority of rule what- 
ever. 

Its jurisdiction being a Joint power, 
as is all ecclesiastical jurisdiction, 

is lodged in the hands of the Church Session, consisting of the 
Pastor and Ruling Elders. 

This jurisdiction is not committed to the Pastor 
acting severally, nor to the membership generally, 
but to the Session, which is a Presbytery, that is, 
a court of Presbyters. (Cf. par. 5.) And no one 
can be a member of the Session, or have a vote 



S2 Chap, ll., Sec. IT., Pae. 4 UQ 

therein, unless he is the Pastor or a Billing Elder 
of the church. 

23. — IV. To the Deacons belong the administration of the 
offerings for the poor and other pious uses. To them, also, 
may be properly committed the charge of the temporal affairs 
of the Church. 

Over against the opinion that the function of the 
Deacons is limited to the care of the poor, this 
affirms that to them belongs the administration, not 
only of the offerings for the poor, but also of the 
offerings for other pious uses. The making of of- 
ferings is a part of the worship, and the adminis- 
tration of these, that is, the application of them to 
their uses, cannot be taken from the Deacons with- 
out depriving them of their office. But, while it 
may be assumed that the kingdom of Christ can 
have no temporal interest or property except in 
these offerings and the investment of them, yet it 
comes about that the use and control of these tem- 
poral interests and properties are, on the one side, 
matters of purely secular business, but, on the 
other, not separable altogether from the govern- 
ment of the kingdom in its spiritual activities. 
Therefore the charge of temporal affairs, that is, 
the management of them, the courts of Presbyters 
may retain in their own hands, or may commit to 
the Deacons under such limitations and directions 
as will not impair the full control of the courts 
over all matters. This principle may be applied, 
not only in the particular church, but also in the 
Church at large ; for just as Kuling Elders, though 
primarily officers of the particular church, are 
called to assist in the government of the Church 
generally, so may the Deacons, though primarily 



23 Chap. II, Sec. IV, Par. 4. 33 

officers of the particular church, be called to the 
charge of the temporal aifairs of the whole Church. 
Three principles, tlieu, are stated: that to the 
Deacons may be committed the charge of temporal 
affairs, as well as the mere administration of them ; 
the charge of temporal affairs generally, as well as 
of the immediate administration of offerings; and 
the charge of the temporal affairs of the whole 
Church as well as of the particular church. Of 
course, this commitment should, in each case, be 
by the court of Presbyters ha^^ing authority over 
the interests thus committed. 

The Form of Government says nothing about 
trustees, because the only officers are Pastor, Rul- 
ing Elder, and Deacon. To observe the institu- 
tions of government and administration as ordained 
by Christ, the trustees necessary as a legal instru- 
ment under the laws of the civil government should 
either be the Session ex officio, or, if the Session 
commits the charge of the temporal affairs to the 
Deacons, the Deacons ex officio, or appointees of 
the Session, with no authority whatever except to 
legally execute what the Session may authorize. 
And if the civil laws happen to require that the 
trustees be elected by the body of members, then 
the Session, the Deacons, or nominees of the Ses- 
sion, should always be elected. It does not be- 
long to the congregation to determine questions in 
temporal affairs, for the sole government is vested 
in the Session; but, as the Session may commit 
the charge of temporal affairs to the Deacons, so it 
may consult with the congregation as to these af- 
fairs, and, indeed, as to all concerns. Since the 
Pastor is a member of the Session, he ought to 



84 Chap. II., Sec. IY., Pae. 5. 24 

have the same authority and responsibility for the 
management of temporal affairs as any other mem- 
ber of the Session. 

I am expounding the rule of the Church as here 
laid down, and not the practice. 

24. — V. The ordinances established by Christ, the Head, 
in his Church, are 

nine in number : 

1, prayer, 

a form of worship in which all are to engage either 
audibly or silently ; 

2, singing praises, 

which differs from prayer 'more in the manner of 
the expression than in the matter of it, though pe- 
tition is the prevalent element in prayer, and praise 
in song, and in which those that cannot sing with 
the voice may yet join in attention and consent; 

3, reading, expounding, and preaching the Word of God, 

in which not only the reader, expounder, or 
preacher worships, but also the hearer, if he listens 
to it not as the word of men, but as the word of 
God; 

4, administering the sacraments of baptism and the Lord's 
supper, 

in whicli not only the administrator and the imme- 
diate participants worship, but any spectator that 
reverences God and his will as set forth in these 
ordinances ; 

5, public solemn fasting and thanksgiving, 

in which all may immediately participate, as well 
as through attention and consent ; 

C catechising, 



25 Chap. II., Sec. IV., Par. 6. 35 

which is a form of instruction helpful to all that 
listen, and a form of worship to all that even listen 
with consent; 

7, making offerings for the relief of the poor, and for other 
pious uses, 

in which all should join according to their several 
ability, or, if unable to make an outward offering, 
with their consent and desire, and which is worship 
if done in expression of reverence toward God; 

8, exercising discipline, 

which is worship to all who act in it or witness it 
with reverence for God as thus manifesting his will 
and authority ; 

and, 9, blessing the people, 

which is worship to him that pronounces the bless- 
ing, and to him that accepts it in reverence for God 
thus declaring his mind. All these are parts of 
worship, and of joint worship ; and this and godly 
living are what the members of a particular church 
are associated together for. These are all to be 
done in the assembled church, but only as acts of 
worship ; and only these are to be done. 

The election of officers by the people lying back 
of the exercise of all official functions in the 
church's ordinances is included in them, and the 
term discipline is to be understood here in its 
broadest sense, as indeed all these terms. 

25. — VI. Churches destitute of the official ministrations of 
the Word ought not, therefore, to forsake the assembling of 
themselves together, but should be convened by the Session 
on the Lord's day, and at other suitable times, for prayer, 
praise, the reading of the Holy Scriptures, and exhortation, or 
the reading of a sermon of some approved minister. 



36 Chap. II., Sec. V., Pae. 6. 25 

It being assumed that the Session exists even 
when there is no Pastor or when the Pastor is 
absent, this paragraph makes it clear that Ruling 
Elders as such are not official ministers of the 
Word. A comparison of the acts of worship in 
which a church should engage when having no 
minister might seem to show that the participation 
of a minister is required for expounding and preach- 
ing the Word, for administering the sacraments, 
for fasting and thanksgiving, for catechising, for 
making offerings, for exercising discipline and for 
blessing the people ; but as, manifestly, not all of 
these are meant to be inhibited in the absence of a 
minister, we must understand this paragraph as 
stating the minimum that should be done in the 
absence of a minister, and not the maximum. This 
minimum is, besides prayer, praise and the reading 
of the Scriptures, either exhortation or the reading 
of a sermon. 

It is the Session that should convene the church. 

A church should be convened not only on the 
Lord's day, but also at other suitable times. 

In like manner, Christians whose lot is cast in destitute 
regions ought to meet for the worship of God. 

This holds not only when there is no minister, but 
also when there is no other officer, and even when 
there is no formal organization. It must hold also 
when there are nominal officers that do not act. 

Section Y. — Of the Organization of a Particular Church. 

The first paragraph prescribes the preliminary 
determination of the membership; the second 
states the act of organizing; and the third pro- 
vides for officering the church. 



26 Chap. II., Sec. V., Par. 1. 37 

26. — I. In the organization of a particular church, the 
first step shall be to receive testimonials on behalf of such of 
the applicants as are members of the Church, if there be any, 
and then to admit, upon a profession of faith in Christ, such 
candidates as on examination shall be found qualified. 

It is implied, of course, that the testimonials 
shall be passed upon, and that, if the testimonials 
are found satisfactory, the persons applying upon 
them shall be admitted ; but if the testimonials are 
not found satisfactory, the persons must not be 
admitted, or, if admitted, they must be admitted 
upon profession of faith. The reason for receiv- 
ing testimonials from those already members of 
the Church are two : first, that the previous mem- 
bership in the Church may not be ignored or be- 
littled, which would tend to depreciate the dignity 
of membership in the Church; and second, to give 
due recognition to the official actions of those par- 
ticular churches or branches of the Church from 
which the persons come, thus promoting the unity 
and fellowship of the visible Church . This principle 
requiresthat no persons under just ecclesiastical cen- 
sure shall be admitted into a new church until they 
have been relieved of that censure by the authorities 
having jurisdiction over them, or, if time and dis- 
tance render this impracticable, until they satisfy 
the authorities organizing the church of due re- 
pentance ; and the organizing authority should be 
very slow to decide that an ecclesiastical censure 
imposed by another authority is not just. It is to 
be observed that the Church does not mean the 
Presbyterian Church in the United States, but the 
visible Church catholic. 

The second step is to admit, upon a profession of 



38 Chap. II, Sec. Y., Pak. 2. 27 

faith in Christ, such candidates as may be found 
qualified. The quahfication does not lie in holding 
correct opinions about Christ, but in having faith 
in him. No amount of ignorance or error should 
exclude where there is reasonable evidence of 
saving faith. On the other hand, no one should 
be admitted who does not give such evidence. 

The mere formal fact of presenting testimonials 
regular in form does not make it necessary or ad- 
visable to admit into a church persons that do not 
have this saving faith. The reality is more than 
the form. But see paragraph 67. 

It is implied, of course, that any of these per- 
sons that have not been baptized shall receive 
baptism before the formal organization takes place. 
It is interesting to note that all the persons to be 
organized together in a particular church become 
members of the Church catholic before they become 
members of the particular church. 

No provision is here made for enrolling non- 
communicating members; but the principles else- 
where stated would require that a list of all such 
that come properly under the care of the particular 
church be enrolled, though not taking the covenant 
prescribed in the next paragraph. 

27. — II. These persons, 

not their children, 

should, in the next place, be required to enter into covenant, 
by answering the following questions affirmatively, with the 
uplifted hand, viz. : "Do you, in reliance on God for strength, 
solemnly promise and covenant that you will walk together as 
an organized church, on the principles of the faith and order of 
the Presbyterian Church, and that you will study the purity 
and harmony of the whole body?" The presiding minister 
shall then say : "I now pronounce and declare that you are 



S7 Chap. II., Sec. V., Par. 2. 39 

constituted a church according to the Word of God and the 
faith and ord.er of the Presbyterian Church in the United 
States. In the name of the Father and of the Son and of the 
Holy Ghost. Amen." 

That the answer shall be given with the uplifted 
hand rather than in some other way is, of course, 
not essential, but only recommended as a conve- 
nient way for order and concert; but that an 
affirmative answer be given is essential to persons 
being counted as entitled to full standing as mem- 
bers. If any, after being found qualified upon 
confession, should then refuse to assent to this 
covenant, this refusal would be sufficient ground 
for the organizing authority to reverse its decision 
as to their being qualified, and accordingly omit 
their names without further proceeding. If any 
accepted on testimonials should refase to take the 
covenant, they would, by that refusal, remain in 
the same ecclesiastical connection as before their 
original application. If any accepted on testimo- 
nials or on profession are absent at the time of the 
taking of the covenant, but signify to the organiz- 
ing authority their willingness to be bound by the 
covenant, it would be proper for the organizing 
authority to enroll them as members of the new 
church; but all persons not enrolled by the or- 
ganizing authority as members of the new church 
remain in their previous ecclesiastical relation, 
although they may have applied for admission with 
the first members; and if they still desire to be 
members of the new church, must be admitted by 
the Session of it or by whatever authority acts in 
place of the Session. 

While the minister pronounces those who take 



40 Chap. II., Sec. Y., Par. 2. ^7 

the covenant to be constituted a church, it is un- 
derstood that their children with them are mem- 
bers of the same church. 

The covenant binds to three things : First, that 
they walk together as an organized church, an or- 
ganization and not a mere association, and an or- 
ganization for divine worship and godly living 
(paragraph 20); that they will as an organized 
church go according to the principles of the faith 
and order of tlie Presbyterian Church, that is, ac- 
cording to the principles of the Presbyterian sys- 
tem in both its doctrinal and governmental aspects ; 
and that they will study the purity and peace of 
the whole body of the Presbyterian Church as well 
as of the particular church. In taking this cove- 
nant, they do not profess that they believe these 
Presbyterian principles, but that they are willing 
as an organized church to act according to them. 
This, it is true, involves their own individual belief 
of these principles so far that, in their duties as 
members, nothing will conflict with their conscien- 
tious convictions of what Christ commands them. 
Any one may, therefore, enter into this covenant if 
his beliefs are such that the Presbyterian Church 
will require nothing of its member that he thinks it 
wrong for him to do. But each one must judge 
for himself whether he can, in good conscience 
toward Christ, take this church covenant. 

By Presbyterian Church in the covenant is in- 
tended exactly the Presbyterian Church in the 
United States, as appears from what the presiding 
minister is to pronounce. His pronouncement is 
that the organization is a church in the sense in 
which the term is used in the Scriptures, and in 



28 Chap. II., Sec. V., Par. 3. 41 

the sense in which it is used in the standards of 
this denomination. " In the name of the Father," 
etc., quoted from the baptism formula, serves as a 
recognition of the Trinity in this solemn consum- 
mation of the organization of the church. If by 
oversight or otherwise this whole pronouncement 
were omitted or altered, that would not undo or 
render incomplete the organization of the church. 

28.— III. Ruling Elders and Deacons are then to be elected, 
ordained and installed. 

The church is an organized church before this 
election (and, accordingly, remains an organized 
church when it loses its officers), the minister at 
the organization being directed to pronounce it an 
organized church before proceeding to the election 
of officers; but its organization is not perfected 
until it is fully officered. The organizing authority 
does not remain in immediate guidance through 
the election of a Pastor, for the reason that a 
church with Ruling Elders is fully equipped for 
the calling of a Pastor. The organizing authority, 
how^ever, may remain in immediate supervision 
through the making of Deacons, for the reason 
that a Session in which there is no Minister is 
not competent to ordain Deacons according to 
paragraph 112. 

This section imposes a church covenant, and 
thereby decides three points : First, that it may be 
right to use special covenants for the sake of or- 
ganization to work together in doing something 
together that Christ requires to be done together ; 
that it is right to require of those that wish to 
come into church organization with us that they 
will with us in the organization do what Christ 



42 Chap. III., Pae. 1. 29 

commands to be done by church organization ; and 
that Christ does require that an organized church 
proceed according to the principles of the faith 
and order of the Presbyterian Church. Persons 
are thus excluded from the Presbyterian Church in 
order that the members of the Presbyterian Church 
may, as organized, obey Christ. But persons thus 
excluded from the Presbyterian Church are not 
thereby excluded from the Church. This is de- 
nomination alism as believed and practiced by us; 
the right and duty of all, pending agreement, to 
obey Christ in the activities of church organization 
according to their several convictions of what 
Christ does command. 



CHAPTEE III. 

CHAPTER III.— Of Church Membees. 

This chapter is but an enlargement of para- 
graph 3, entering more minutely into the privi- 
leges of the different sorts of members. As these 
are infants, adults that, being members as infants, 
have not made a profession of faith, and professors 
of faith, the chapter falls into three paragraphs. 

29. — I. The infant seed of believers are, through the cove- 
nant and by right of birth, members of the Church. 

And this is true whether or not their membership 
is acknowledged, and whether or not they are 
members of some organized church. 

Hence they are entitled to baptism, 

which does not render them members, but the ad- 



30, 31 Chap. III., Pars. 2, 3. 43 

ministration of it to them recognizes that they are 
members, 

and to the pastoral oversight, instruction and governnient of 
the Church, with a view to their embracing Christ, and thus 
possessing personally all the benefits of the covenant. 

The obligations of the covenant of Jehovah with 
parents that have faith, to be a God to them and 
their children, remains in full force of its obliga- 
tions upon both him and the children; but he 
must, by the very terms of that covenant, exclude 
from eternal salvation all who will not embrace 
Christ. And the Church is bound to give to these 
children pastoral oversight, instruction and govern- 
ment, with a view to their embracing Christ. The 
children of the saints are to be to the Church and 
its officers somewhat different from the children of 
the profane. It is a grievous omission when no 
teaching is provided for the one except what is 
provided for the other class of children ; and thus 
the very advantage of persuading them through 
their covenant obligations is lost. 

30. — II. All baptized persons 

however long they may have persisted in not em- 
bracing Christ, 
are 

by reason of the covenant still binding upon all 
the parties, 

entitled to the watchful care, instruction and government of 
the Church, even though they are adults, and have made no 
profession of their faith in Christ. 

31 —III Those only who have made a profession of faith 
in Christ are entitled to all the rights and privileges of the 
Church. 



44 Chap. IV., Sec. I, Par. 1. 3S 

For if they are not yet competent to act for them- 
selves, there are some rights and privileges that 
they are not yet capable of exercising and enjoy- 
ing; and much more is this so if they neglect to 
have faith in Christ. They cannot be recognized 
as having this faith if they do not profess it. 



CHAPTEE lY. 

Of Chuech Officers. 

Enlarging upon paragraph 4, this chapter has a 
preliminary section on the classification of these 
officers, followed by three sections on the three 
classes of officers. 

Section I. — Of their General Classification. 
There are three paragraphs : one on extraordinary 
officers that have ceased; another on the perma- 
nent officers; and a third against assuming any 
titles or functions beyond what the Scripture 
assigns; 

33. — I. Under the New Testament, 

it being here assumed that the order of the Church 
under the previous dispensation does not now ob- 
tain except so far as it continued into and through 
the change from that dispensation to this, 

our Lord at first collected his people out of different nations, 
and united them to the household of faith by the mission of 
extraordinary officers, endued by miraculous gifts, which have 
long since ceased. 

And since the miraculous gifts have ceased, all 
classes of officers having functions that require 
miraculous gifts have also ceased. 



33 Chap, IV., Sec. I., Par. 2. 45 

33. — II. The whole polity of the Church consists in doc- 
trine, government and distribution. 

By polity is meant activity as an organization. 
This whole activity consists in, or the sole work of 
the organized Church is limited to^ doctrine, which 
is teaching or proclaiming the law of Christ re- 
vealed in the Scriptures ; government, which is ad- 
ministering and enforcing this law (par. 17) ; and 
distribution, which is the application of the mate- 
rial offerings presented in the worship that the 
Church maintains in obedience to this law. And 
as the Church has nothing else to do but these 
three things, so it needs only the three classes of 
officers corresponding to these three functions. 

And the ordinary and perpetual officers in the Church are' 
Teaching Elders, or Ministers of the Word, who are commis" 
sioned to preach the gospel and administer the sacraments, 
and also to rule ; Ruling Elders, whose office is to wait on 
government ; and Deacons, whose function is the distribution 
of the offerings of the faithful for pious uses. 

The philosophy of the classification is this, that 
government and diatribution are ways or means 
of teaching, or means of preserving the Church as 
a teaching organization ; and all the functions of 
the organized Church may be reduced to one, 
TEACHING and what is necessary thereto. The offi- 
cial teacher, then, has also ex officio the powers of 
government and distribution. So far as this teach- 
ing takes the form of ruling, there are joined with 
the teaching elders other elders, that, while not 
having the teaching office in its fullest scope, have 
it on its governmental side. And these officers, as 
rulers, must either themselves distribute the offer- 
ings, or have it done under their supervision ; and 
for this function the deacons are provided. It is, 



46 Chap. IV., Sec. I., Pae. 3, Sec. II., Pak. 1. 34, 35 

therefore, the office of the Deacons to relieve the 
Elders of the care of the secular affairs of the 
Church, and it is the office of the Ruling Elders to 
co-operate with the Teaching Elders in the govern- 
mental side of their work. (Administering the sac- 
raments, being a form of teaching as distinguished 
from ruling, is reserved to the Teaching Elder.) 

34. — III. No one who holds office in the church ought to 
usurp authority therein, or receive any official titles of spiritual 
pre-eminence, except such as are emploj^ed in the Scriptures. 

Titles are not forbidden that are not exact ren- 
derings of Scripture titles, provided they attribute 
no functions beyond those that the Scriptures attri- 
bute ; and titles that are exact renderings cf titles 
used in the Scriptures are forbidden to be used in 
super- scriptural senses. 

Section II. — Of the Ministers of the Word. 

After a paragraph on the dignity and functions 
of this officer, and another on his qualifications, a 
third points out different works to which he may 
be called, of which three different works are named 
particularly ; and then follows a paragraph on each 
of these three sorts of work, and a paragraph on 
the unclassified sorts of work. 

35. — I. This office is the first in the Church, both for dig- 
nity and usefulness. 

There are, then, three grades of office, of which 
the Minister of the Word is the highest, and the 
Deacon is the lowest. 

The person who fills it has in Scripture different titles expres- 
sive of his various duties. 

Some of these titles may also be given to Buling 



35 Chap. IY , Sec. II., Pak. 1. 47 

Elders, since tliey share in the functions of this 
office in one aspect of it. 

As he has the oversight of the flock of Christ, he is termed 
Bishop. As he feeds them with spiritual food, he is termed 
Pastor. 

This is the Latin word for shepherd. 

As he serves Christ in the Church, he is termed Minister. As 
it is his duty to be grave and prudent, and an example to the 
flock, and to govern well in the house and kingdom of Christ, 
he is termed Presbyter or Elder. 

(Greek and English terms of the same meaning). 

As he is the messenger 

(the Greek for which is angel) 

of God, he is termed Angel of the Church. As he is sent to 
declare the -will of God to sinners, and to beseech them to be 
reconciled, he is termed Ambassador. As he bears the glad 
tidings of salvation to the ignorant and perishing, he is termed 
Evangelist. As he proclaims the gospel, he is termed Preacher. 
As he expounds the Word, and by sound doctrine both exhorts 
and convinces the gainsayer, he is termed Teacher. As he 
dispenses the manifold grace of God, and the ordinances insti- 
tuted by Christ, he is termed Steward of the mysteries of God. 
These titles do not indicate different grades of office, but all 
describe one and the same officer. 

These ten terms, though applied even to Apostles 
in the New Testament, do not designate what is 
peculiar to their extraordinary office, but only what 
office they had in common with all other officers of 
this class. Even then their special functions were 
not dependent upon their holding a higher grade 
of office (for the Apostles themselves did not belong 
to a higher grade of officers than ordinary Minis- 
ters of the Word), but upon their miraculous gifts. 
And now Ministers should be set to different sorts 
of work^ according to their different enduements 



48 Chap. IV., Sec. II., Pae. 2. 36 

and gifts ; but this specialization in functions does 
not destroy parity in official rank. 

36. — II. He that fills this office should possess a compe- 
tency of human learning, and be blameless in life, sound in 
the faith, and apt to teach; he should exhibit a sobriety and 
holiness of conversation becoming the gospel; he should rule 
his own house well ; and should have a good report of them 
that are without. 

Here are named four kinds of qualifications, of 
which the first kind is in the man, and the other 
three manifestations of what is in him and thus 
evidential of the fundamental qualifications being 
in him. And the fundamental qualifications are 
four. One of these he should possess, for it is ex- 
trinsic to his individuality : a competency of human 
learning. What is a competency is not here indi- 
cated. The other three he should be, for they are 
qualifications intrinsic to his individuality. The 
most important is a blameless life. While the 
word must not be pressed to mean more than rela- 
tive blamelessn€ss, yet it must not be weakened so 
as to admit any into this office that would not be 
properly classed as blameless in life in a compara- 
tive classification of professors into the blameless 
and the blemished. Among those that might in 
this sense be classed as blameless in life, some 
are relatively sound in their beliefs, and others are 
erratic. The latter class, however blameless in 
life, are not qualified for the ministry of the truth. 
Some men that are blameless in life and sound in 
the faith are not apt at teaching others, and for 
this reason are disqualified for the teaching office. 
If now a man has these fundamental qualifications, 
they should manifest themselves in three ways. 



37, 38 Chap. IV., Sec. II., Pars. 3, 4. 49 

In general there should appear in his conversation 
or behavior a sobriety or propriety, and a holiness 
or savor of consecration, such as become the 
gospel; for the life should not only be negatively 
blameless, but positively exhibiting a gospel so- 
briety and holiness. If he is in any relation of 
authority over others, he ought to show ability to 
rule well; and this is especially true of the head of 
a family. For no man is qualified to rule in God's 
house who cannot rule in his own. And, unrea- 
sonable as men of the world may be in judging the 
saints, yet no one is fit to be in a position of 
leadership in the Church before the world who 
cannot command the world's respect for his piety 
and morality. Jesus, even at the very moment of 
his condemnation and rejection, had a good report 
of them that were without. 

37. — III. As the Lord has given different gifts to the Minis- 
ters of the Word, and has committed to them various works 
to execute, the Church is authorized to call and appoint them 
to labor as Pastors, Teachers, and Evangelists, and in such 
other works as may be needful to the Church, according to the 
gifts in which they excel. 

Pastors, Teachers and Evangelists are different 
classes of Ministers, but Ministers engaged in more 
or less different functions of the one Ministry of 
the Word ; and this is equally true of Ministers 
engaged in other special work, provided only it is 
work of the Ministry of the Word. 

38. — IV. When a minister is called to labor as a Pas- 
tor, it belongs to his office to pray for and with his flock, as the 
mouth of the people unto God; to feed the flock, by reading, 
expounding, and preaching the Word ; to direct the congrega- 
tion in singing the praises of God ; to administer the sacra- 
ments ; to bless the people from God ; to catechise the chil- 
dren and youth ; to visit officially the people, devoting especial 



50 Chap. IV., Sec. II., Par. 4. 38 

attention to the poor, the sick, the afflicted, and the dying ; 
and, with the other Elders, to exercise the joint power of gov- 
ernment. 

All ministers are pastors, inasmuch as it is the 
duty of them all to feed the people of God with 
spiritual food (par. 85) ; but here the term is used 
of one appointed specially to this work in a par- 
ticular church ; and while what he is charged with, 
all ministers are charged with in their several posi- 
tions, the duties that specially belong to him in his 
position are here enumerated. Seven things he is 
to do severally, or by himself. Some of these it 
may be proper for all saints to do according to 
their capacities and opportunities, and some of 
them it may be the duty of the Ruling Elders to 
do in their official capacity ; but all of them it is 
the official duty of the Pastor to do. The first of 
these is not preaching, but prayer, both apart from 
his flock in intercession for them, and with them 
as their mouth unto God. The Pastor makes a 
mistake to put all his care upon the sermon and 
none upon the public prayer. Yet his distinctive 
work as Pastor is to feed the flock. This he is to 
do by reading the Word as well as by expounding 
it, and by exposition as well as by simply proclaim- 
ing what needs no further exposition. It is not 
enough to handle the Word; he must cause them 
to eat it. Nor is it his whole work to do this in 
the public assembly. His third function is to 
direct the congregation in singing the praises of 
God. As there should be no singing that is not 
worship, so this part of the worship should be 
kept under the Pastor's direction ; and it is a seri- 
ous abdication of his official duty when he hands 



38 Chap. IV., Sec. II., Pak. 4. 51 

this over to those who are not qualified, as well as 
not duly authorized, to direct this part of the wor- 
ship. How far he shall go in determining details 
is matter for wise discretion ; but he and those who 
lead the music as such, and all the congregation, 
should recognize him as having this entire part of 
worship under his discretion. It is the fourth 
function of the pastoral office to administer the 
sacraments. Accordingly, neither baptism nor the 
Lord's supper is to be administered in his congre- 
gation by another minister without his concurrence, 
and he should not for every cause remit to another 
the administration of baptisms, nor forego presid- 
ing at the Lord's Supper. It belongs to the Pastor 
to bless the people from God ; wherefore the bene- 
diction is by him pronounced as an official decla- 
ration of the divine mind. The sixth function, to 
catechise the children and youth, he is to do as 
Pastor, and it is a deplorable disuse of official 
function when he leaves this work altogether to 
other agencies, as to Sunday-schools; for this is 
the Pastor's specific office for the young. His 
seventh function is happily described. It is not 
enough to visit the people, but he should visit 
them officially, that is, he should visit them as 
their Pastor, and in his visits pray with and for 
them, feed them with the Word, catechize the 
children and youth, and perform such like pastoral 
functions. Social visiting that is not also mani- 
festly and really pastoral visiting is a substitution 
to be made only in order to official visiting. So 
far as a distinction is admissible, the people need 
to know him officially rather than socially. And 
in his official visitation he is to devote special 



52 Chap. IY., Sec. II., Paes. 5, 6. 39, 40 

attention to four classes: the poor, who cannot 
contribute much in the offerings; the sick, who 
cannot attend the public worship; the afflicted, 
who need special comfort, and the dying, who are 
both sick and afflicted. So far in the discharge of 
his duties severally; and, with the other Elders, he 
is to exercise the joint power of government, hav- 
ing, in this sphere, no more and no less authority 
and obligation than a Ruling Elder. 

39. — V. When a minister is appointed to be a teacher in 
a school of divinity, or to give instruction in the doctrines and 
duties of religion to youth assembled in a college or university, 

for to teach other branches in an institution of 

learning, is not ministerial work, 

it appertains to his office to take a pastoral oversight of those 
committed to his charge, and be diligent in sowing the seed of 
the Word, and gathering the fruit thereof, as one who watches 
for souls. 

Here "teacher" is not used in precisely the same 
sense as " Teacher" in paragraph 35 ; but the work 
here described is truly work of the ministry of the 
Word ; but the danger is that one engaged in it 
will drift away from his work as a minister. It 
needs to be repeated that when a. man who is a 
minister is giving instruction in other subjects than 
the doctrines and duties of religion, he is not en- 
gaged in ministerial work. 

40. — VI. When a minister is appointed to the work of 
the Evangelist, he is commissioned to preach the Word and 
administer the sacraments in foreign countries, frontier settle- 
ments, or the destitute parts of the Church ; and to him may 
be entrusted power to organize churches and ordain Ruling 
Elders and Deacons therein. 

The philosophy of the matter is, not that the Evan- 
gelist has an office different in order, grade or na- 



40 Chap. IY., Sec. II., Pae. 6. 53 

ture from that of other Ministers of the Word, but 
that he is in a position calling specially for the 
use of those evangelistic functions which are in- 
herent in the very office of the ministry, that is, to 
preach the Word and administer the sacraments, 
not in the organized or fully organized portions of 
the Church, but elsewhere : in countries where the 
Church is not yet organized; in countries where 
the Church is already organized, but in those parts 
where it is not organized ; and in such parts of the 
organized Church as are not fully organized, lack- 
ing a settled ministry adequate to the work to be 
done. It is not here decided that it would be un- 
scriptural to call a minister distinctively an evan- 
gelist who was engaged in fully organized parts of 
the Church in preaching specially to those who 
had not yet accepted the gospel ; but that is not 
the sense in which the term is used in this para- 
graph. 

The organization of churches and the ordination 
of officers, being an exercise of jurisdiction, is a 
function of joint power, for which the individual 
Presbyter as such is not competent ; but the court 
having jurisdiction may commission him to do 
these things as its commissioner, his acts being 
the acts of the court through him. This may be 
made really the court's action by previous orders 
and subsequent validation or annulment; and the 
nature of these acts as joint and not several should 
always be thus preserved. The paragraph says 
that the court may entrust the Evangelist with 
power as its commissioner to organize churches, 
and to ordain Euling Elders and Deacons in 
churches ; but the power to ordain Ministers, while 



54 Chap. IV., Sec. II., Par. 7 ; Sec. III. 41 

it might, without making the ordination a several 
act, be entrusted to the Evangelist, the Form 
of Government does not permit to be thus en- 
trusted. Consequently, there is no way provided 
in the Form of Government lor the ordination of 
Ministers unless the candidates to be ordained first 
come to the Presbytery. To meet this require- 
ment, a candidate in a foreign land must come to 
where the Presbytery meets, or the Presbytery 
must hold a meeting where the candidate is, or the 
candidate must wait till there are several Ministers 
and a Euling Elder in the country of the candidate, 
and these Presbyters are regularly constituted a 
Presbytery. 

41. — VII. When a minister is called to labor through the 
press, or in any other like needful work, it shall be incumbent 
on him to make full proof of his ministry by disseminating the 
gospel for the edification of the Church. 

Otherwise his literary or other labor is not work 

in the ministry of the Word. 

As the Church through Presbytery having juris- 
diction of a minister sanctions his call to any work, 
and appoints him thereto, no minister should per- 
manently devote himself to any sort of ministerial 
work without the approval and sanction of his 
Presbytery. 

Section III. — Of the Ruling Elder. 

This section has two paragraphs on the nature 
of the office : one pointing out the relation of the 
New Testament Elder to the Old Testament Elder, 
and one pointing out his relation to the Minister 
of the Word. Then follow a paragraph on the 
qualifications for the office, and a paragraph on its 
duties. 



42, 43 Chap. IV., Sec. III., Pars. 1, 2. 55 

42. — I. As there were in the Church, under the law, Elders 
of the people for the government thereof, so, in the gospel 
Church, Christ has furnished others besides the ministers of 
the Word with gifts and commission to govern when called 
thereunto, which officers are entitled Ruling Elders. 

It is not asserted that they are called Euling 
Elders in the Scriptures, but in this Form of Gov- 
ernment; but it is asserted that according to the 
Scriptures there are in the New Testament dispen- 
sation as there were in the Old, Elders or rulers 
that are not Ministers of the Word. 

43. — 11. These Ruling Elders do not labor in the Word and 
doctrine, 

officially (for nothing is here decided as to what 
others than Ministers of the Word may do un- 
officially in the Word and doctrine), 

but possess the same authority in the courts of the Church as 
the Ministers of the Word. 

May he then be Moderator of a court, and of the 

higher courts as well as of a Session, seeing that 

to Moderators are assigned certain duties that 

only Ministers can perform ? Yes. 

When, however, a Ruling Elder is Moderator of a Presbytery, 
Synod, or General Assem.bly, any official duty devolving on 
him, the performance of which requires the exercise of func- 
tions pertaining only to the teaching Elder, shall be remitted 
by him for execution to such Minister of the Word, being a 
member of the court, as he may select. 

The Minister must be a member of the same court, 

so that he may be under the control of the court. 

It is to be observed that by a court consisting in 

part of Elders who are not themselves Ministers of 

the Word, men may be appointed to ministerial 

functions, and are subject to the control of the 

court, the power of government extending over the 

Church and its officers in all their functions. It is 



56 Chap. IV., Sec. III., Par. B. 44 

also to be observed that the Moderator is ap- 
pointed to a special work by a court, and is 
answerable to the court appointing him. It is 
further to be observed that there is no funda- 
mental principle requiring that the Moderator shall 
be of this or that class of Elders ; but, since, as a 
matter of conveniency and prudence, certain min- 
isterial functions are, in the detailed regulations of 
the Form of Government, assigned to the Modera- 
tor, the principles of the system do require either 
that these regulations should be abolished, or that 
Euling Elders be kept out of the position of Mod- 
erator, or that a special provision, such as this, 
determine the assignment of ministerial functions. 
Provision is made elsewhere as to the Moderator 
of the Session. 

44. — III. Those who fill this office ought to be blame- 
less in life and sound in the faith ; they should be men of wis- 
dom and discretion ; and by the holiness of their walk and con- 
versation should be examples to the flock. 

By comparison with paragraph 36 it will be seen 
that learning and aptness to teach, fundamental 
qualifications for a Minister of the Word, are not 
required as qualifications for a Ruling Elder, but 
that blamelessness of life and soundness in the 
faith are as fundamental to the Ruling as to the 
Teaching Elder. The secondary qualifications for 
the two offices are the same; for holiness of be- 
havior is named for each, for the ruling well his 
own house and having a good report from those 
that are without, and sobriety of conversation, 
named for the Minister, are all summed up for the 
Euling Elder in wisdom and discretion. However, 
so far as there is a difference, the Ruling Elder has 



45 Chap. IV,, Sec. III., Pae. 4. 57 

even more need than the Minister of the rare 
characteristic, wisdom, and to the Minister is in- 
dispensable a learning and aptness to teach that 
the Euhng Elder, as such, does not need to have. 

45. — TV. Ruling Elders, the immediate representatives of 
the people, are chosen by them, that, in conjimetion with the 
Pastors or Ministers. 

The Ministers cf the TVord belong to that class 
Tvhich finds its highest exponents in the Prophets 
of the Old Testament and the Apostles of the Xew, 
and immediately represent Christ and mediately 
the people ; Trhile the K -oling Elders, so far as any 
difference in conception is permissible, immedi- 
ately represent the people and mediately Christ. 
And these immediate representatives of the people 
meet the immediate representatives of Christ, and 
the two classes exercise government together ; yet 
with this difference, that the Enhng Elders are not 
competent to all the functions of government unless 
in conjunction with Ministers, whereas Ministers, 
were there no other Elders that could be associated 
with them, would have plenary power to govern. 

they may exercise government and discipline, 

for discipline is too important a part of government 
to be omitted from special emphasis, 

and take the oversight of the spiritual interests of the particu- 
lar church, and also of the Church generally, when called 
thereunto. 

As the Church has no interests but spiritual inter- 
ests, this phrase is all-comprehensive ; but, so far 
as a distinction may be made between spiritual 
and temporal, the immediate management of tem- 
poral affairs may be committed to the Deacons, 



58 Chap. IY, Sec. III., Par. 4. 45 

while the oversight of the spiritual interests of 
every sort cannot be withdrawn from Ruling Elders 
and Ministers. While the Minister is ex ojjicio a 
Bishop or overseer of the whole Church, the Rul- 
ing Elder exercises this office only when, and so far 
as, he is called to it from time to time. 

It appertains to their office, both severally, 

which they should never forget, 

and jointly, to watch diligently over the flock committed to 
their charge, that no corruption of doctrine or of morals enter 
therein. Evils which they cannot correct by private admoni- 
tion they should bring to the notice of the Session. They 
should visit the people at their homes, especially the sick ; 
they should instruct the ignorant, comfort the mourner, nourish 
and guard the children of the Church; and all those duties 
which private Christians are bound to discharge by the law of 
charity are especially incumbent upon them by divine vocation, 
and are to be discharged as official duties. They should pray 
with and for the people; thej^ should be careful and diligent in 
seeking the fruit of the preached Word among the flock ; and 
should inform the pastor of cases of sickness, affliction and awak- 
ening, and of all others which may need his special attention. 

Their duties are thrown into three groups. Their 
first and distinctive work is the prevention of evils, 
especially the entrance of corruptions of doctrine 
or morals in the flock. For accomplishing this 
work, they have two means, private admonition 
and report to the Session. Here now is the great 
work of Elders, the protection of the flock from 
heresies and immoralities. To sit and vote in 
Session is a part of their duty ; but there and out 
among the people, they are everywhere the guar- 
dians of the people's faith and manners. The 
second group of duties shows how, in his work as 
much as the Pastor in his, the Ruling Elder is to 
labor for the purity of doctrine and morals among 



40, 47 Chap. TV., Sec. IV., Pak. 1. 59 

the people. It is as mnch a part of his official 
duty to visit the people in their homes as it is the 
Pastor's ; and in his official visiting he is to seek 
out the classes that need instruction and comfort 
and minister to their needs. The children of the 
Church are to lie on his heart as a special charge, 
and he is to show to them and concerning them 
special attention. Even the duties incumbent upon 
all rest upon him as official duties, since he is 
officially an example to others. The third group 
of duties belong to him specially as an assistant of 
the Pastor. He has the duty of prayer for and 
with the people as well as the Pastor. He is to 
follow up the public preaching with personal effort 
most carefully and diligently. And he should to 
the utmost co-operate^ with the Pastor, and give 
him whatever information may help him in his 
work. 

Sectiox IY. — Of the Deacon. 

Here are given the scriptural warrant for the 
office, the duties of it, and the qualifications for it. 
To these three paragraphs three others are added : 
a special regulation for securing a proper supervi- 
sion of the Deacons' work by the Session ; a pro- 
vision for supplying the place of Deacons when 
there are no Deacons: and an explicit statement 
of a power inherent in the Session to appoint' 
women to certain diaconal functions. 

46. — I. The office of Deacon is set forth in the Scriptures 
as ordinary and perpetual in the Church. 

(Cf. pars. 32, 33). 

47. — II. The duties of this office relate to the care of the 
poor, and to the collection and distribution of the offerings of 
the people for pious uses, under the direction of the Session. 



60 Chap. IV., Sec. IV., Par. 3. 48 

This is the same as in paragraph 23, only that 
here is stated what is there implied, that they are 
to care for the poor, and that they are to collect 
the offerings as well as distribute them; but this 
does not imply that it is the duty of Deacons to 
collect anything but offerings, yet they are en- 
gaged in a part of their distinctive work when pro- 
moting in the people the grace of liberality. It is 
also here explicitly stated that they are to do their 
work under the direction of the Session, which is 
something more than mere review. 

To the Deacons, also, may be properly committed the manage- 
ment of the temporal affairs of the Church. 

See exposition of paragraph 23. 

48. — III. To this office should be chosen men of honest 
repute and approved piety, who are esteemed for their prudence 
and sound Judgment, whose conversation becomes the gospel, 
and whose lives are exemplary; seeing that those duties to 
which all Christians are called in the way of beneficence are 
especially incumbent on the Deacon as an officer in Christ's 
house. 

These are substantially the same as the qualifica- 
tions of Euling Elders, except that special empha- 
sis is not here laid on soundness in the faith, nor 
quite so distinct a place given to wisdom as distin- 
guished from prudence. Yet, soundness of judg- 
ment is insisted upon. As the Ministers are to 
stand forth as examples embodying the full truth 
in life, and the Ruling Elders examples embodying 
especially the idea of reverence for the law of 
Christ, so the Deacons are to stand forth as exam- 
ples embodying especially the idea of beneficence 
for Christ's sake; and they, therefore, need for 
their official vfork the whole complex of graces, 



49, 50 Chap. IY., Sec. IV., Par. 4, 5. 61 

without which beneficence loses its Christian sif<ni- 
ficance. 

All officers, then, are to excel in a living piety, 
deep and manifest, and in mental balance, or good 
sense ; to these qualities Kuling Elders are to add 
pre-eminence in wisdom, and a grasp of the sys- 
tem of truth ; and to all these qualities the Minis- 
ters are to add pre-eminence in learning and apt- 
ness to teach. 

49. — lY. A complete account of collections and distribu- 
tions, and a full record of proceedings shall be kept by the 
Deacons, and submitted to the Session for examination and 
approval at least once a year. 

Three things are required: that the Deacons 
keep a complete account ; that they keep a full re- 
cord of proceedings; (and these things they cannot 
do unless they act together as a body) ; and that 
both this account and this record be submitted to 
the Session at least as often as once a year, not 
only for formal approval or disapproval, but also 
for a' real examination, to see whether the Deacons 
have faithfully done the work as required by their 
office and the directions of the Session. It is a 
condition of confusion and disintegration when this 
paragraph is ignored. 

50. — V. In churches where it is impossible to secure the 
appointment of a sufficient number of Deacons, the duties of 
this office devolve on the EuJing Elders. 

(Cf. par. 33 and remarks under it.) In such cases 
the session should appoint one or more or all the 
Euling Elders to act as Deacons; and the Elders 
thus appointed and the Deacons, if there are any, 
should act together as the diaconate of the church, 



62 Pae. 6 ; Chap. Y., Sec. I. 51 

and should keep the account and record, and sub- 
mit the same to the Session, as in paragraph 49. 

51.— VI. Where it shall appear needful, the Church Session 
may select and appoint godly women for the care of the sick, 
of prisoners, of poor widows and orphans, and in general for 
the relief of distress. 

These differ from the male Deacons in the fact 
that they are not selected by the congregation, and 
in the fact that they do not have charge of distri- 
bution generally. It would save much to the credit 
of the Church, and promote greatly the efficiency 
of its beneficent work, if this paragraph were put 
into general execution, so that what is done would 
appear to be done by the Church, as it really is, 
and would be done with fuller counsel and super- 
vision. 



CHAPTEK y. 

Of Chuech Couets. 

The chapter has seven sections, as follows: one 
treating generally of the courts and their officers ; 
one treating particularly of the jurisdiction of the 
courts ; then one each on the four kinds of courts ; 
and, lastly, one on a sort of special courts, called 
commissions. 

Section I. — Of the Courts in General. 

After a paragraph on the gradation and nature of 
these courts, and another paragraph enumerating 
them, there come three paragraphs on their of- 
ficers: two on the Moderator — one providing the 
Moderator for each court, and one defining his 



52, 53, 54 Chap. \., Sec. I., Paes. 1, 2, 3. 63 

duties — and one on tlie clerk. Then is added a 
paragraph on the deyotional exercises that shall 
be observed in the sessions of the higher courts 
(directions as to this matter for the Session being- 
reserved to the section on the Session) ; and an- 
other prescribes the payment of the expenses of 
attendance on the higher courts. 

52. — I. The Church is goremed br various courts, in regu- 
lar gradation: which are all, nevertheless, Presbyteries, as 
being composed exclusively of Presbyters. 

The underlying principle is, that, so far as the fa- 
cilities of intercommunication between the differ- 
ent parts of the Church permit, the courts of the 
Church shall be so related to one another that 
whatever is done by one part of the Church shall 
be done by the one Church in tliat part. All courts 
are essentially the same, being exclusively Elders 
acting jointly, and their powers being, therefore, 
the joint powers of Elders. (Cf. par. 5.) 

53. — II. These courts are: Church Sessions. Presbj-teries, 
Synods, and the General Assembly. 

The first is called church Session, as being the sit- 
ting together of the Elders of a church ; the sec- 
ond, Presbytery, as having assigned to it more 
fully than any other all the joint powers of Pres- 
byters; the third, Synod, as being the coming to- 
gether of many Presbyters; and the fourth, the 
General Assembly, as being the assembly in which 
the whole Church convenes. 

54. — III. The Pastor is Moderator of the Session. 
The real ground for this regulation is, that the 
Moderator is accountable to the court appointing 
him, and a Euling Elder, being directly account- 
able to the Session, would be himself too far re- 



64 Chap. V., Sec. I., Par. 3. 54 

moved from the control of Presbytery; and this 
and other regulations proceed upon the assump- 
tion that the Session may not be as well qualified 
to handle weighty matters as the Presbytery. 

The Moderator of the Presbytery, the Synod, and the General 
Assembly, shall be chosen at each stated meeting of these 
courts: and the Moderator, or, in case of his absence, the last 
Moderator present, or the oldest minister in attendance, shall 
open the next meeting with a sermon, unless it be highly in- 
convenient, and shall hold the chair until a new Moderator be 
chosen. 

The court may have several Moderators at the 
same time, provided their respective functions are 
defined, and to no one of them is assigned any func- 
tion not properly pertaining to a Moderator. (Of. 
56 ; but as to Session, see 63.) While no explicit 
provision is made for the removal of a Moderator 
during his term, it lies in the nature of the case 
that the court may revoke its own appointment. 
The election of a new Moderator at each stated 
meeting is a prudential regulation, that the court 
may not practically lose the power of appointing 
its own Moderator, and come to be, in reality, but 
a counsel of advice to him as a superior ; but it is 
a matter of discretion with the cfourt to re-elect 
the same man, or to elect another. It lies with the 
court to determine at what point in the proceed- 
ings of its stated meeting the election of Moderator 
shall occur. The Moderator retains ail his author- 
ity as Moderator until the election of his successor ; 
but, if he should, at any time during his moderat- 
orship, not be a member of the court, he would 
have no vote as a member, and therefore no cast- 
ing vote in case of a tie. The opening sermon may 
be omitted when circumstances make it highly in- 



55 Chap. Y., Sec. I., Par. 4. • 65 

convenient to have it, of which the Moderator is 
the judge. The Moderator, as there is no prohibi- 
tion of it, may appoint another to act in his place, 
the court not objecting. 

55. — IV. The Moderator possesses all authority neces- 
sary for the preservation of order, and for convening and ad- 
journing the court, according to his own ruling. 

This gives to the Moderator very great authority, 
but it must not be so understood as to give him ab- 
solute power. He has no authority beyond other 
members to determine the actions of the court, but 
only to preserve order ; and his power to convene 
and adjourn the court, according to his own ruling, 
does not mean independently of the order of the 
court, but independently of what any one, not the 
court, may order, or may rule that the court orders. 

He may also, on any extraordinary emergency, convene tha 
court by his circular letter before the ordinary time of meeting. 
And in case of the failure of the appointed meeting, he may 
convene the court at a suitable time and place. 

Of the extraordinary emergency, and of the sui- 
table time and place, he is, of course, to be the 
judge ; but see paragraph 79. If it should happen 
that this regulation, which is designed to provide 
for necessary meetings that the court did not fore- 
see to provide for, fails to thus provide, it must be 
remembered that the court exists when not in ses- 
sion, and that, in the nature of the case, a majority 
of the court may alvvays call a meeting, in the ab- 
sence of all express provisions to the contrary. 

The Moderator, if a member of the court, has 
the same right to vote on all questions as any other 
member, but he can cast only one vote; and he 
cannot vote at all if he is not himself a member of 
the court. 



66 Chap. V., Sec. I. Pars. 5, 6. 56, 67 

56. — V. It is the duty of the Clerk (whose continuance in 
office shall be during the pleasure of the court), besides re- 
cording the transactions, to preserve the records carefully, and 
to grant extracts from them whenever properly required. Such 
extracts, under the hand of the Clerk, shall be evidence to any 
ecclesiastical court, and to every part of the Church. 

It has not been deemed necessary, for prudential 
reasons, to require the 'election of a Clerk at each 
stated meeting ; but each court is at liberty to fix a 
term of office for its Clerk. It is a matter of course 
that the Clerk is not superior to the court appoint- 
ing him, and in all his duties is subject to the 
order of the court ; nor has he any vote or voice in 
the actions of the court, unless he is a member of 
the court, and then he has only the same authority 
as any other member. His duties are three : to 
record the transactions; to preserve the records; 
and to grant extracts. All his work is subject to 
the correction of the court itself. But extracts un- 
der his hand are legal evidence everywhere of what 
the transactions of the court are ; but no evidence 
is final that has in it the possibility of error, if it 
is possible by superior evidence to show aod cor- 
rect the error. The Moderator has nothing to do 
with certifying the record. See, however, para- 
graphs 88 and 213. A court may have several 
Clerks at the same time, provided their respective 
functions are defined, and to no one is assigned 
any function not properly pertaining to a Clerk. 
(Cf. 54.) 

57.— VI. Every meeting of the Presbytery, Synod, and 
General Assembly shall be opened and closed with prayer, and 
in closing the final meeting a psalm or hymn may be sung and 
the benediction pronounced. 

So much ought men engaged in ruling in the 
Church to seek as courts the blessing of God upon 



68 Chap. Y., Sec. I., Par. 7. 67 

themselves and their work as rulers. If the bene- 
diction is pronounced, and a Ruling Elder is at the 
time Moderator, he should remit this function to a 
Minister. (Cf. par. 43, and pars. 24 and 35.) 

58. — YII. The expenses of Ministers and Ruling Elders in 
their attendance on the courts, shall be defrayed by the bodies 
which they respectively represent. 

The expenses of attendance are always what has to 
be paid out above what is provided in the way of 
voluntary entertainment. There might have been 
a regulation providing for each court a fund for 
the expenses of its members; but that is not the 
regulation. By analogy the expenses of members 
of a commission in excess of their expenses as 
members of the court appointing the commission 
must be borne by this court itself; and the same 
principle would apply to committees and other 
appointees. 

What body is represented is not easily answered 
in all cases. A Ruling Elder in Session, Presby- 
tery, or Synod represents his church, and in the 
General Assembly represents his Presbytery. So 
a Minister in the General Assembly represents his 
Presbytery. But in the other courts, what body 
does a Minister represent? If a pastor, he might 
be thought to represent his church or churches; if 
engaged in Evangelistic, or other work, the body 
for which he is doing the work; and if not en- 
gaged in ministerial work, for some "body"; 
What? The two things made unmistakable by the 
paragraph is, that the expenses of delegates to the 
General Assembly are to be paid by their respec- 
tive Presbyteries, and of Ruling Elders in attend- 
ance on all other courts, by their churches. 



68 Chap Y., Sec. II., Pab. 1. 59 

Section II. — Of the Jurisdiction of Church Courts. 

The first paragraph distinguishes these courts 
from civil government, and the second states posi- 
tively the nature and scope of their jurisdiction; 
and the third states the principle underlying the 
gradation of these courts, while the fourth shows 
the particular gradation agreed upon for this branch 
of the Church. 

59. — I. These assemblies are altogether distinct from the 
civil magistracy, nor have they any Jurisdiction in political 
or civil affairs. They have no power to inflict temporal pains 
and penalties, but their authority is, in all respects, moral or 
spiritual. 

Even when the same individual is both a Presby- 
ter and a civil functionary, he is not the one by 
reason of being the other. While he is appointed 
unto each office by Christ the Lord of all, and is 
accountable to him, the method and means of his 
appointment, and offices to which he is appointed, 
are so utterly separate that his holding or not 
holding one of them does not modify his duties in 
the other. The ecclesiastical courts have no juris- 
diction in political or civil affairs, but only in eccle- 
siastical affairs. But may the same affair be at 
the same time political or civil and ecclesiastical? 
It may, and then the ecclesiastical court may deal 
with it. If, for instance, a member of a church 
should be charged with murder, it would pertain 
to the civil authority to try him, and, if guilty, to 
inflict upon him the civil penalty; and it would 
pertain to the session of his church to deal with 
him for the same offence. Nor would the ecclesi- 
astical court be bound to conclude him guilty or 
innocent of the charge according to the decision 



60 Chap. V., Sec. II., Par. 2. 69 

of the civil authority. An ecclesiastical affair is 
any question of doctrine taught in the Scriptures 
or any action commanded or forbidden in the 
Scriptures, or any matter of temporal concern hav- 
ing to do with the use and disposition of offerings 
for pious uses ; but only so far ^s any question or 
action or concern is within what Christ in the 
Scripture has commanded his Church to teach or 
enforce or do as organized for the edification and 
government of his people, the propagation of the 
faith and the evangelization of the world, is it an 
ecclesiastical affair. That question is ecclesiasti- 
cal which the Church cannot expound and apply 
the whole Scripture without answering; and that is 
not ecclesiastical which may be differently an- 
swered by men that agree in their understanding 
of the Scriptures. 

In no case, not even in a case of murder left un- 
punished by the civil authority, or in the case of 
the most awful blasphemies whatsoever, can the 
ecclesiastical court inflict or adjudge to be de- 
served, any penalty whatsoever except the declara- 
tion of the mind of Christ concerning the sin, and 
such treatment in the matter of fellowship in the 
Church as shall express this mind of Christ. The 
censure of Christ through the Church is the only 
instrument for enforcing the law of Christ. 

60. — II. The jurisdiction of church courts is only ministerial 
and declarative, 

that is, these courts can act only as servants to de- 
clare what he, as their King, commands them, 

and relates to the doctrines and precepts of Christ, to the order 
of the Church, and to the exercise of discipline. 



70 Chap. Y., Sec. II., Pae. 2. 60 

Their sphere of action has three sections, more 
or less overlapping: teaching, assigning to place 
and work in the Church, and censure of offenders. 

First, They can make no laws binding the conscience ; but 
may frame symbols of faith, bear testimony against error in 
doctrineiand immorality in practice, within or without the pale 
of the Church, and decide cases of conscience. 

Symbols of faith do not make the courts, but the 
courts make the symbols of faith. The courts exist 
and have all their autliority before they frame the 
symbols, for the courts are nothing but Presbyters 
(appointed by Christ and furnished by him with 
the Word and Spirit) acting jointly. They may, 
therefore, not only formulate systems of truth, but 
also bear testimony, as occasion demands, against 
particular errors and immoralities, and give an- 
swers to questions propounded to them by doubt- 
ful consciences. Since the church is in the world 
as a witness to it from Christ, these courts need 
not confine their testimony to errors and immorali- 
ties of its own members. But with all this, these 
courts cannot make a law, they can only declare 
what laws Christ has already made and set forth 
in the Scriptures. 

Secondly, They have power to establish rules for the gov- 
ernment, discipline, w^orship, and extension of the Church, 
which must be agreeable to the doctrines relating thereto con- 
tained in the Scriptures, the circumstantial details only of 
these matters being left to the Christian prudence and wisdom 
of church officers and courts. 

The Scriptures do not undertake to lay down 
minute regulations for the activities of the organ- 
ized Church, as they do not lay down minute regu- 
lations for the conduct of the individual, but for 
each, regulating principles ; and the Church, as the 



60 Chap. Y., Sec. II., Pae. 2. 71 

indiyidual, is to apply these regulating principles 
to every point of activity. This is to be done 
always under the guidance of the Holy Spirit, but 
the Holy Spirit working within and not speaking 
from without. The Spirit is in the Word to be 
understood, and in the mind seeking to understand, 
using the Word and the mind, and not supersed- 
ing them or suspending them. The individual, 
then, is to decide upon his act in every set of cir- 
cumstances, and ofttimes with only regulating prin- 
ciples in the Scriptures to guide him; and so must 
the organized Church. The Church must decide, 
not in a general parliament of all its members, nor 
in the counsel of any one select mind, but in the 
parliament and counsel of select minds appointed 
to this very function in the Church. This does 
not make the Church inerrant in these matters, 
even as the individual is not inerrant; but the 
liability to error does not free the Church from the 
responsibility of self- direction any more than the 
individual. 

Since both the Church and the individual are 
liable to err, which must yield to the other in case 
of difference? Neither to the other, but both to 
Christ. The disagreement may be due to error in 
the individual, then he ought to correct his error ; 
or to error in Church, then the Church ought to 
correct its error ; or to error in both, then both 
should correct their error. But the individual and 
the Church are equally answerable to Christ alone, 
and equally free from control by the other, except 
so far as each speaks the mind of Christ. The 
Church must show the gentleness of Christ toward 
the individual, and the individual must show the 



72 Chap. Y., Sec. II., Pak. 2. 60 

humility of Christ toward the Church; but each 
must obey Christ, and each must judge what 
Christ commands. And woe to the individual that 
sets up his error against the teaching of Chriit in 
the Church ; and woe to the Church that sets up 
its error against the teaching of Christ in the indi- 
vidual. But so far as the rules established by the 
Church al-e agreeable to the doctrines reletting 
thereto contained in Scripture, Christ requires 
the individual to obey them, however unwisely 
they order circumstantial details. 

These rules may have to do with the administra- 
tion of government in general, as the regulations 
laid down in the Form of Government, or with the 
exercise of discipline in particular, as the regula- 
tions laid down in the Rules of Discipline, with 
the conduct of worship, as the regulations laid 
down in the Directory for Worship, or with the 
work of extending the Church, as the regulations 
adopted from time to time touching the various 
missionary activities of the Church. The very fact 
that these regulations are not wrought out in detail 
in the Scriptures, implies that they should be 
adapted to changing conditions from time to time. 

Thirdly, They possess the right of requiring obedience to 
the laws of Christ. Hence, they admit those qualified to seal- 
ing ordinances and to their respective offices, and they exclude 
the disobedient and disorderly from their offices and from 
sacramental privileges; but the highest censure to which their 
authority extends is to cut off the contumacious and impenitent 
from the congregation of believers. 

The right of requiring obedience implies the pos- 
session of means of enforcing obedience ; but the 
only means in the hands of church courts is sen- 
tence of approval or censure. The sentence of 



61, 62 Chap. V., Sec. II., Paks. 8, 4. 73 

approval may extend to admission to sacraments 
and office ; and the sentence of censure to exclu- 
sion from sacraments and office. Since tlie use of 
the sacraments is limited to the congregation of 
believers, the children being baptized only upon 
the faith of parents, to exclude from the sacraments 
is to exclude from the congregation of believers; 
and this is the utmost to which the sentence of a 
church court may go. 

Mm-eoner, they possess all the administrative authority 
necessary to give effect to these powers. 

For instance, if one is excluded from the sacra- 
ments, any Minister administering the sacraments 
to him is subject to ecclesiastical censure for dis- 
regarding the authority of Christ in the sentence 
of exclusion ; but a church court has only declara- 
tive authority, and can never inflict temporal pains 
and penalties. 

61. — III. All church courts are one in nature, constituted 
of the same elements, possessed inherently of the same kinds 
of rights and powers, and differing only as the Constitution 
may provide. Yet it is according to scriptural example, and 
needful to the purity and harmony of the whole Church, that 
disputed matters of doctrine and order, arising in the lower 
courts, should be referred to the higher courts for decision. 

62. — lY. For the orderly and efficient dispatch of eccle- 
siastical business, it is necessary that the sphere of action of 
each court should be distinctly defined. 

The general principle that aU the courts have the 
same kinds of rights and powers is subject to two 
Kmitations : "that disputed matters of doctrine and 
order, arising in the lov>'er courts, should be referred 
to the higher courts for decision"; and that, by 
special regulations, the sphere of action of particu- 
lar courts should be limited by express definitions. 



74 Chap. Y., Sec. II., Par. 4. 62 

Ifc is involved in these two principles, that every 
court has all ecclesiastical powers not expressly 
withheld from it or expressly assigned exclusively 
to another court; that every higher court has 
all power over all courts and persons within its 
jurisdiction, subject only to constitutional rules of 
procedure ; and that no court has any power over 
those who do not belong to that part of the Church 
of the Presbyters of which the court is an as- 
sembly. 

The Session exercises Jurisdiction over a single church, 
but not over Ministers at all; 

the Presbytery over what is common to the Ministers, Sessions 
and churches within a prescribed district, 

that is, it has exactly the same authority over one 
of its Ministers, Sessions or churches, as it has 
over any other of its Ministers, Sessions or churches ; 

the Synod over what is common to three or more Presbyteries, 
and their Ministers, Sessions and churches, 

from which it appears that every Minister, Session 
or church must belong to some particular Presby- 
tery, and that a Synod must have at least three 
Presbyteries ; 

and the G-eneral Assembly over such matters as concern the 
whole Church, 

where " Church " means, as often, the Presbyterian 
Church in the United States, but that striving to 
be, within its measure, what tho whole visible 
Church should be, and keeping itself a separate 
organization only so long as it has to do this for 
the sake of liberty to obey Christ ; 

and the Jurisdiction of these courts is limited by the express 
provisions of the Constitution. Every court has the right to 



62 Chap. V., Sec. III. 75 

resolve questions of doctrine and discipline seriously and 
reasonably proposed, and in general to maintain truth and 
righteousness, condemning erroneous opinions and practices 
which tend to the injury of the peace, purity or progress of the 
Church ; and although each court exercises exclusive original 
jurisdiction over all matters specially belonging to it, the lower 
courts are subject to the review and control of the higher 
courts in regular gradation. Hence, these courts are not sepa- 
rate and independent tribunals ; but they have a mutual rela- 
tion, and every act of jurisdiction is the act of the whole 
Church, performed by it through the appropriate organ. 

In the nature of the case, the entire Eldership of the 
Church assembled together would be a court hav- 
ing all power of every sort over every part and 
member of the Church, subject only to such limi- 
tations as in its nature ecclesiastical power is sub- 
ject to. For this catholic assembly of all the 
Presbyters, as being impracticable, there is, by 
constitutional regulations, substituted an assembly 
of selected representatives of the Eldership from 
all parts of the Church, and, besides this delegated 
assembly, smaller assemblies, as Synods and Pres- 
byteries, partly delegated and limited in their 
scope of action to the parts of the Church to which 
they respectively pertain, and also local assemblies 
of Presbyters not delegated. But all these assem- 
blies are but sections of the one Eldership, who 
thus, for practical reasons, distribute among them- 
selves fragments of the one jurisdiction pertaining 
to them as one court. 

Section III. — Of the Church Session. 

The first paragraph shows who are members of the 
Session; the next three paragraphs show who is 
Moderator in the absence of the Pastor, when there 
is no Pastor, and when there are more Pastors than 
one, it being already settled that the Pastor is the 



76 Chap. Y., Sec. III., Pae. 1. 63 

Moderator of the Session (paragraph 54) ; the fifth 
paragraph enumerates the rights and powers and 
duties of the Session, and the remaining paragraphs 
add some special regulations — one as to when 
meetings of the Session shall be held, one as to 
records of its proceedings, one as to certain items 
that are especially to be recorded, and one as to 
devotional exercises in connection with the meet- 
ings. 

63.— I. The church Session consists of the Pastor or 
Pastors, if there be any, and the Ruling Elders of a church. 

From this it appears that a church may have a 
plurality of Pastors. A Pastor is a merrtber of the 
Session, having the same voice and vote, perma- 
nency and responsibility therein, as any other 
member, no more and no less. 

Two Ruling Elders, if there be so many, with the Pastor, if 
there be one, shall be necessary to constitute a quorum. But 
the Pastor and one Ruling Elder may constitute a quorum in 
cases where there are only two Elders. 

In this last sentence "Elder" must be understood 
to mean Euling Elder as distinguished from Teach- 
ing Elder. We have then the following cases : 
When the Session consists of one or more Pastors 
and three or more Ruling Elders, then a Pastor 
and two Ruling Elders are a quorum ; if the Ses- 
sion consists of one or more Pastors and one or 
two Ruling Elders, then a Pastor and one Ruling 
Elder are a quorum ; when the Session consists of 
more than one Ruling Elder without a Pastor, then 
two are a quorum ; and when the Session consists 
of one Ruling Elder, one is a quorum. By analogy 
in the above sentences, we might write Pastor for 
Ruling Elder and Ruling Elder for Pastor. If the 



64 Chap. V., Sec. III., Par. 2. 77 

Session lias both sorts of Elders, one at least of 
each sort is required to make up a quorum ; if the 
Session has a plurality of members, a plurality is 
required to make up a quorum, and if the Session 
has a plurality of Elders of one sort only, a plurality 
of that sort is required to make up a quorum. 

64. — II. In case of the absence of the. Pastor, or when for 
prudential reasons it may ar>pear advisable that some other 
Minister should preside, such Minister belonging to the same 
Presbytery, as the Pastor, with the concurrence of the Elders, 
may designate, shall be invited to preside in his place. 

There are two cases when some one not the 
Pastor may preside, in cases where the church has 
a Pastor: in the absence, of the Pastor, so that his 
attendance is impracticable ; and when, for pruden- 
tial reasons (for he cannot lose his right to preside 
while remaining Pastor), it appears advisable that 
another preside. Appears advisable to whom? To 
the Pastor, and the other Elders consent ; or to the 
other Elders, and the Pastor consents ; or to both 
the Pastor and the other Elders. But neither can 
the other Elders forbid the Pastor to preside, nor 
can the Pastor require them to permit some one 
else to preside. Four things must be true of the 
substitute Moderator: he must be a Minister; he 
must belong to the same Presbytery as the church ; 
he must be designated by the Pastor ; and he must 
be acceptable to the rest of the Elders. Of course, 
by common consent, any member of the Session 
may preside in the Pastor's presence, by way of 
relieving him from labor ; but in case of any dis- 
pute of his ruling, the Pastor must resume the 
chair and make the moderatorial ruling. No pro- 
vision is made for the case in which a church has 



78 Chap. V., Sec. III., Par. 3. 65 

a Pastor that has become incapacitated for desig- 
nating a substitute, as by illness or mental de- 
rangement; but in such case the church is really 
without a Pastor, and the next paragraph would 
apply ; but, in case of doubt or dispute, the Pres- 
bytery would have to determine whether the emer- 
gency and conditions are such as require this. 

When the Pastor is going to be absent for a 
length of time, and it is probable that there will 
be need for sessional action before his return, he 
and the other Elders may agree beforehand what 
Minister shall be invited to preside in his place. 

65.— III. When a church is without a Pastor, the Moder- 
ator of the Session shall be either the Minister appointed for 
that purpose by the Presbytery, or one invited by the Session 
to preside on a particular occasion. But when it is inconveni- 
ent to procure the attendance of such a Moderator, the Session 
may proceed without it. In judicial cases this Moderator shall 
always be a member of the same Presbytery to which the 
church belongs. 

The Moderator of the Session is an appointee of 
the Presbytery, to which, and not to the Session, 
he is responsible for his behavior and decisions as 
Moderator. (Cf. par. 54.) When the church has 
no Pastor, who is always appointed to his office by 
the Presbytery, it belongs to the Presbytery to 
appoint some one of its Ministers as Moderator of 
the Session. In case this has not been done, or in 
case this presbyterial Moderator cannot be present 
without hurtful delay, of which the Session must 
judge, the Session may invite some Minister to 
preside, but with two limitations : the Session can 
never select any one as its permanent Moderator, 
but only to preside on a particular occasion ; and, 
if the particular occasion is to take action in a ju- 



ee, 67 CHAr. Y., Sec. III., Pars. 4, 5. 79 

dicial case, the Moderator tbus invited for tlie par- 
ticular occasion must be a Minister of the same 
Presbytery as the church, that in so important a 
matter no confusion of jurisdiction may arise. 
And only when the Session finds it inconvenient 
to procure the attendance of either the Moderator 
appointed by the Presbytery, or of any Minister 
invited by itself for a particular occasion, may the 
Session select one of its own members to moderate 
it for that occasion. Even in a judicial case, a 
Session may proceed with one of its own number 
as Moderator, if the emergency requires. And, of 
course, the Session can always convene, with one 
of its own members presiding, for the purpose of 
inviting a Minister to preside. 

If one of the Euling Elders acts as Moderator, or 
some Minister not appointed by Presbytery to 
preside, the appeal from his decisions must be to 
the Session ; but if the Moderator of the Session is 
the Pastor or any other appointee of the Presby- 
tery, the appeal from his decipions must be to the 
Presbytery. 

66. — IV. hi churches where there are two or more Pastors, 
they shall, when present, alternately preside. 

That is, that one present since whom the others 

present have presided shall preside. And this 

paragraph forbids a church's having an assistant 

Pastor in the sense of a Pastor with less authority 

in the government of the church than another, 

however the other work of the pastoral office may 

be distributed among them. 

67. — V. The church session is charged with maintaining the 
spiritual government of the church, 

it being discretionary with the Session to commit 



80 Chap V., Sec. III., Par. 5. 67 

the management of the temporal affairs to the 
Deacons, 

for which purpose it has power 

1. to inquire into the knowledge, principles, and Christian 
conduct of the church members under its care ; 

The Euling Elders and the Deacons are individu- 
ally under the care of the Session, as well as all 
others enrolled as members, whether admitted to 
the Lord's Supper or not. It has power to in- 
quire into their knowledge ; this is especially to be 
done in the case of the children of the church, in 
order to deal wisely with them as to their coming 
to the Lord's Supper, and it is needful in the case 
of all, in order to judge of their principles and 
conduct and of what instruction they need. In- 
quiry into principles and conduct is necessary, not 
only for purposes of discipline, but also for the 
prevention of the entrance of heresies and immor- 
alities. But the inquiry of Session has to do only 
with Christian conduct, that is, with their conduct 
as to whether it is as Christian conduct should be. 

2. to censure those found delinquent ; 

This is to be done always in accordance with the 
Kules of Discipline; hut it is to he done. And 
when this function is unused, then Presbyterian 
government becomes a set of unused functions, 
which are sure to become diseased and perverted 
to wrong uses. 

3. to see that parents do not neglect to present their chil- 
dren for baptism ; 

Otherwise Christ is disobeyed in neglecting the 
very first step to be taken by the Church toward 
saving its own children. Such negligence is a vio- 



67 Chap. Y., Sec. III., Par. 5. 81 

lation of their cliurcli eoyenant on the part of the 
parents. The Session is not to urge parents to 
present their children for baptism and with that be 
content, but to see that they do it. 

4. to receive members into the communion of the Church ; 

The persons thus admitted may be either ah-eady 
members of the Church not hitherto admitted to its 
communion, or not before members of the Church 
at all. It must be observed that the phrase is 
"communion of the Church," not "communion 
of the church." The power to admit into the 
membership of the particular church from other 
churches is not here given to the Session, nor 
anywhere; for such persons have already been 
admitted by the Church, acting through its ap- 
propriate organ, to its communion, and the only 
question remaining for decision, after it is ascer- 
tained that an applicant for membership in the 
particular church is already a member in the 
Church, is the mere question of particular jurisdic- 
tion, for which rules are elsewhere given. For if 
one Session should refuse admission to those to 
whom another Session has granted it, that would 
be for the Church through one organ to contradict 
its action through another organ. But such a per- 
son, it being determined to what particular juris- 
diction he belongs, must be dealt with by that 
court as a member of the Church ; and if unworthy 
of membership, he must be suspended or excom- 
municated by the methods prescribed, and not by 
a mere refusal to acknowledge the fact of member- 
ship. This principle is subject to three modifica- 
tions. First, as to applicants from other churches 
G 



82 Chap. V., Sec. III., Pab. 5. 67 

or denominations, the Session has more discretion, 
for the reasons that the refusal to admit leaves the 
person where he was in the Church, and does not 
make the one set of Elders, working together as 
one under our Constitution, do contradictory acts, 
and that the principles which guided in the previous 
admission of these persons in the other denomina- 
tion were more or less short of what the Session 
has itself undertaken to apply. In the second 
place, as in the organization of a new church (par. 
26), so in enlarging the membership of an organ- 
ized church, there is a higher necessity of preserv- 
ing the church from destruction by an influx of the 
unregenerate than of complying with the letter of 
requirements that were meant to conserve and not 
to destroy the efficiency of the Church in all its 
parts. And in the third place, it is, after all, con- 
stitutional for one court to complain to the higher 
courts against the actions of another court, and 
pending the final decision let the status quo re- 
main. And the unity and purity of the Church 
require that, if a Session refuses to accept mem- 
bers from another Session's jurisdiction, it refer 
their status back to the Session from which they 
came, that that Session either cancel the testi- 
monials it has given or insist upon their acceptance, 
and that, the two Sessions not agreeing, the matter 
be brought in an orderly way to the higher courts 
for decision. 

5. to grant letters of dismission to other churches, which, 
when given to parents, shall always include the names of their 
baptized children ; 

Eegulations given elsewhere direct when such 
letters of dismission shall be granted. They 



67 Chap. V., Sec. III., Par. 5. 83 

should, of course, certify nothing that the Session 
does not believe to be true. The ''churches" to 
which the letters are given need not be in the 
Presbyterian Church in the United States ; nor is 
it necessary always that a church be named in a 
letter of dismission. It would be proper to give a 
letter of dismission of a baptized but non-commu- 
nicating member, if he has no parents in whose 
letters his name could be included, or if he is not 
to reside with them and under their control. 

6. to ordain and install Ruling Elders and Deacons on their 
election by the church, and to require these officers to devote 
themselve's to their work ; 

The Session has power to decline to ordain and in- 
stall those who are not qualified, even if the church 
elects them, just as the Presbytery has power to 
decline to ordain and install as a Pastor a proba- 
tioner called by a church ; and it is the duty of the 
Session not to ordain and install, unless satisfied 
that the persons elected are qualified. The deci- 
sion to ordain and install should be made by the 
Session in formal meeting; and it is advisable that 
this meeting be not the same as that at which the 
ordination and installation takes place. The Ses- 
sion, as a body, has jurisdiction over the individual 
Kuling Elder or Deacon in his official capacity, and 
should inquire into his knowledge, principles and 
Christian conduct in his office, and censure him if 
found delinquent. No one should be allowed to 
remain in office who will not devote himself to his 
official work. 

7. to examine the records of the proceedings of Deacons ; 
This record includes the account of collections and 



84 Chap. Y., Sec. III., Par. 5. 67 

distributions. (Par. 49.) The neglect to do this 
means neglect of the previous duty ; so far as it 
applies to the Deacons, means the divorce of the 
temporal and the spiritual affairs of the church, so 
that the church may come to have temporal affairs 
not subordinated to its spiritual interests, and 
means a condition making for disunity. 

8. to establish and control Sabbath-schools and Bible 
classes, with especial reference to the children of the Church ; 

Schools and classes for study of the Bible on other 
days than the Sabbath are included. Such schools 
the Session is not only to establish, but also to 
control. It belongs to the Session to appoint the 
officers and teachers of these schools, or else to 
order the method of their appointment, which 
should always be subject to the approval of the 
Session, and to prescribe and enforce regulations 
for the conduct of the schools. In all its actions 
touching Bible schools the Session is to have spe- 
cial reference to the children of the Church. (Cf. 
pars. 29, 30 and 45.) 

9. to order collections for pious uses ; 

Collections are not to be ordered by the Deacons, 
nor by the Pastor, nor by individual Elders, nor 
by trustees, nor by leading persons in the congre- 
gation, male or female, but by the Session; and 
this applies to collections from house to house or 
from individual to individual, outside the public 
assembly, as well, as to collections in the public 
assembly. No one should solicit am4Dng the mem- 
bers of the church, as such, except by order of the 
Session. The reservation of this power to the 
Session is needful for the unity and harmony of 



67 Chap. Y, Sec. III., Pae. 5. 85 

the church, and for the right direction and training 
of the people in making offerings for pious uses. 

10. to take the oversight of the singing in the public wor- 
ship of God ; 

Compare paragraph 38, where it says that the 
Pastor is to direct the congregation in singing the 
praises of God. It pertains to the Session to give 
orders concerning it, but to the Pastor, in the midst 
of the worship, to direct it, always himself observ- 
ing the orders of the Session. Only the Session 
should ever determine what books of praise and 
what instruments of music, and w^hat persons as 
musicians and singers shall be used as helps to the 
congregation in the service of praise; and it be- 
longs to the discretion of the Session to be more or 
less minute in its directions concerning this matter ; 
but never should the Session allow it to pass out 
of the real control of the Session. 

11. to assemble the people for worship when there is no 
minister ; 

(Cf. par. 25). 

12. to concert the best measures for promoting the spiritual 
interests of the church and congregation ; 

The congregation here includes all who meet in 
the church's assemblies of worship, and indeed all 
who are so related to the church or its members, 
that their spiritual good is more or less imme- 
diately connected with the worship and doings of 
the church; but in some places congregation is 
used in a narrower sense, the church convened or 
convenable. The Session is to aim at promoting 
the spiritual interests (the only sort of interest that 
a church can have) of the church, both from all 



86 Chap. V., Sec. III., Pak. 5. 67 

other points of view and when regarded as an as- 
sembly. 

There is nothing in principle or prudence for- 
bidding others to suggest to the Session measures 
for this end, if only these suggestions are made 
with a proper sense of the sole authority of the 
Session, to act according to them or not, in its own 
wisdom. And it would be in harmony with all re- 
quirements for the Session to convene the church 
for hearing information, for considering and advis- 
ing in such matters as the Session should refer to 
it for this purpose, and for such other action as 
the Session should convene it for, provided, only, 
the sole authority and responsibility of the Session 
for the spiritual government of the church be never 
ignored or compromised. 

13. to observe and carry out the higher injunctions of the 
lower courts ; 

whether these injunctions are lawful the Session must 
judge. Compare the discussion under paragraph 
60, item secondly^ which principles apply here. 
But in no case can it be proper for a session to ig- 
nore the injunction of a higher court ; it should al- 
ways either obey the injunction, or certify its refu- 
sal and reasons therefor to the next superior court. 

and 14. to appoint representatives to the Presbytery and 
the Synod, v^ho shall, on their return, make report of their 
diligence. 

The Pastor, being a member of the Session, has an 
equal vote with any other member of the Session 
in appointing these representatives. The neglect 
of this duty on part of Session means the cutting 
itself off to that extent from co-operation with the 



68 Chap. V., Sec. III., Par. 6. 87 

rest of the Eldership of the Church and thus im- 
pairing the unity of the Church. 

(38. — VI. The iSession shall hold stated meetings at least 
quarterly. 

The neglect of this rule when a church has a Pas- 
tor means the government of the church by him 
instead of by the Session , and his failure to con- 
vene the Session is presumptive evidence of his 
willingness to rule without his brother Elders. 
The neglect of this rule when the church has no 
Pastor means either anarchy or paralysis of church 
life. 

Moreover, the Pastor has power to convene the Session 
when he may Judge it requisite ; and he shall always convene 
it when requested to do so by any two of the Ruling Elders; 
and when there is no Pastor, it may be convened by two Ruling 
Elders. 

The lodging of this power in the hands of the 
Pastor is simply a matter of convenience ; for if a 
majority, counting him, do not desire to proceed 
to the business, nothing can be done; nor can two 
Elders by calling a meeting, or having it called, 
carry any action, or even have the Session consider 
it, unless a majority are in favor of so doing. If a 
Pastor should refuse to convene a meeting when 
properly requested to do so, he would be censur- 
able upon conviction before Presbytery. It is 
always necessary, in convening the meeting of any 
court, to give due notice to all its members ; and 
should it appear that any member w^as not given 
reasonable timely notice of the time, place and 
purpose of the meeting, the proceedings of that 
meeting would be null and void, should he call 
their validity in question. "What would be timely 



88 Chap. V., Sec. III., Pars. 7, 8. 69, 70 

notice the Session, or, on complaint, the Presbytery, 
would have to decide. In no case ought the 
validity of an action to be upheld, if there was a 
purpose to promote the absence of a member of the 
court by the imperfection of the notice. 

The Session shall also convene when directed so to do by 
the Presbytery. 

When the Presbytery gives such a direction, it 
should see that notice is given to each member of 
the Session. It is evident, from this regulation, 
that the Session is largely the Presbytery acting 
through a sort of commission. 

69.— VII. Every Session shall keep a fair record of its pro- 
ceedings, which record shall be at least once in every year 
submitted to the inspection of the Presbytery. 

The record should show all the proceedings of 
Session; and the records of congregational meet- 
ings may be ordered spread upon its own records, 
as may any communication or document referred 
to the Session. If the Session fails to submit its 
records at the first stated meeting of Presbytery in 
any year, it should submit them at the next stated 
meeting in the same year. 

70. — VIII. Every Session shall keep a fair record of bap- 
tisms, 

ordered by it and reported to it as administered ; 

of those admitted to the Lord's table, 

by it; 

of non-communicating members, 

enrolled by it as under its jurisdiction; 

and of the deaths 



71,72 Ch. v., Sec. III., Par. 9, Sec. lY., Par. 1. 89 

reported to it (and all deaths of members should 
be formally reported to it), 
and dismissions of church members. 

All these items come properly in the proceedings 
of the Session ; but inasmuch as there is often kept 
a separate tabulation of such items, it might be 
thought unnecessary lo record them among the pro- 
ceedings but for this explicit regulation. 

71. — IX. Meetings of the Session shall ordinarily be opened 
and closed with prayer. 

It would seem reasonable that when prayer is 
omitted, it be omitted by action of the Session, 
and not by the single decision of the Moderator; 
and then the reason for the omission might be 
stated in the action. 

Section IV. — Of the Presbytery. 

The first five paragraphs have to do with the 
question of what members the Presbytery shall be 
composed. The first two define the membership, 
the second prescribing how a Euling Elder's right 
to sit shall be determined; the third defines the 
quorum ; and the next two prescribe how Ministers 
shall be admitted and what obligations they shall 
subscribe. The sixth paragraph enumerates the 
powers of Presbytery. And the last three para- 
graphs contain some special regulations; the first 
as to records and reports to higher courts ; the next 
as to meetings ; and the last as to extending the 
courtesies of the fioor to other Ministers than the 
members. 

72. — I. The Presbytery consists of all the Ministers and 
one Ruling*Elder from each church within a certain district. 



90 Chap. Y., Sec. IV., Par. 1. ^ 72 

Three things are here determined : that the 
Presbyteries shall not territorially overlap; that 
every Minister within the district shall be a mem- 
ber of the Presbytery ; and that one Ruling Elder, 
and only one, from each church shall be a member. 
The principle underlying the district regulation is 
this : that neither shall Ministers or churches select 
their own Presbytery, nor shall Presbyteries select 
their own Ministers and churches, but that the 
Presbyterial connection of Ministers and churches 
shall be determined by their residence and sphere 
of labor. For "district" is not to be interpreted 
rigidly, so that, for instance, a Minister, could not, 
for convenience, reside in the territory of one Pres- 
bytery and be Pastor of a church in another Pres- 
bytery; but a Minister could not be Pastor of a 
church belonging to a different Presbytery from 
himself. It is not, then, the place of residence of 
a Minister that determines his Presbyterial connec- 
tiod, but the sphere of his labor. Accordingly, if 
a Minister is engaged in labor that has no terri- 
torial location, or that is not under the control of 
one Presbytery rather than another, his Presby- 
terial connection is not determined by the provi- 
sions of this paragraph. The district regulation is 
to be interpreted more rigidly as to churches, and 
yet the end of the regulation is to be kept in view. 
If there were two populations of different lan- 
guages inhabiting the same territory, so that it 
would be impossible for their Elders to understand 
one another in the same Presbytery, it would not 
violate the principle here intended to have two 
Presbyteries covering more or less the same geo- 
graphical district; but to have churches lying 



72 Chap. V., Sec. IV., Par. 1. 9L 

within the same district of inter-communication to 
belong to different Presbyteries would violate the 
principle. Other causes than distance in place or 
difference in language might be important enough 
to enter into the delimitation of a Presbytery's dis- 
trict; and of such possible causes the higher courts 
would have to decide. But in no case must 
churches be permitted to group themselves accord- 
ing to their mere preference. 

Every Minister, even if his labor is not specially 
under the control of a Presbytery, must be assigned 
to that labor by some Presbytery, and be answer- 
able to this Presbytery for his ministerial conduct 
therein. Even when he is not engaged in any 
ministerial labor, he must be answerable to some 
Presbytery for not being so engaged, and subject 
to some Presbytery's direction when called to a 
work. At all times a minister must be answerable 
to some Presbytery for his behavior. He must, 
therefore, always be a member of some Presbytery, 
that he may always be under the immediate juris- 
diction of some court. And the Presbytery is the 
lowest court whose jurisdiction is extensive enough 
to direct and to judge him in the labors proper to 
his office. The necessity of his always being a 
member of some Presbytery is not so much that he 
may have a voice in ruling the Church as that the 
Church may be able to rule him. 

The Ruling Elder is not a member of the Pres- 
bytery in order to come under its jurisdiction, for 
he is under the immediate jurisdiction of his Ses- 
sion, but in order that the Church may have his 
counsel in the Presbyteries. That they are not all 
members of Presbytery is due to the practical dif- 



92 Chap. Y., Sec. IV., Pars. 2, 3. 73, 74 

ficulty of attendance by them all. One is required 
from each church, that there may be in the Presby- 
tery intelligence of the needs of every church, and 
that every church may be kept in living connection 
with the Presbytery. Only one is required, however 
numerous the membership of the particular church, 
because it is not the theory that majorities are wise 
and. should rule, but that the Church comes to see 
together the mind of Christ by counselling together 
in love. While, from practical necessity, the ma- 
jority prevails when there is a difference of judg- 
ment, this difference of judgment, after delibera- 
tion, is simply a failure of men to work out the rule 
of Christ. And the members of a majority ought 
to grieve more over the difference of judgment 
than rejoice over carrying the decision their way. 

73. — II. Every Ruling Elder not known to the Presbytery 
shall produce a certificate of his regular appointment from the 
Session of the church which he represents. 

This implies that a Euling Elder may not sit in 
Presbytery unless regularly appointed by his Ses- 
sion ; but there is no prescription for how long he 
may be appointed. 

74. — III. Any three Ministers belonging to the Presbytery, 
together with at least one Ruling Elder, being met at the time 
and place appointed, shall be a quorum competent to proceed 
to business. 

If less than a quorum, thej can wait the coming of 

others, until the required quorum is present, the 

time of meeting being construed to mean from the 

point of time named until a quorum is present; 

and so, if none are present at the point of time, 

but afterwards a quorum arrives, it may proceed to 

business. But if less than a quorum are present at 

the point of time, and have left, supposing there 



Y5 Chap. V., Sec. IV., Pars. 3, 4. 93 

w.ould be no quorum, then the meeting fails, and 
no number coming later would be a quorum. 
Otherwise there would be no determinable point 
at which the meeting fails. 

As in the case of the Session (paragraph 63), so 
here, it is required that both sorts of Presbyters 
be present, but the number of each is a matter of 
practicability ; for while, in the case of the Session, 
one Minister and two Ruling Elders are required, 
here three Ministers and one Ruling Elder. And 
the requirement that both should be present is not 
grounded on a denial that a court of Presbyters of 
either class, were there none of the other available, 
would be a competent court, but on the affirmation 
that neither class can lawfully assume to themselves 
authority to the exclusion of the other class. 

It is calculated that ordinarily the numbers here 

named will be present, even when the meeting is 

held at an inconvenient time and place, and that so 

small a number may be trusted to act for the time 

rather than to delay pressing business. 

75.— IV. Ministers seeking admission to a Presbytery shall 
be examined on experimental religion, and also touching their 
viaws in theology and church government. If applicants come 
from other denominations, the Presbytery shall also require 
them to answer in the affirmative the questions put to candi- 
dates at their ordination. 

This is simply an instance of Presbytery inquir- 
ing into the knowledge, principles, and Christian 
conduct of the ministers under its care (compare 
paragraph 67) ; and it would be altogether in har- 
mony with the principles of the Book of Church 
Order for the Presbytery to make such inquiry on 
other occasions. This inquiry is prescribed at the 
transition of a minister into another Presbytery, 



94 Chap. V., Sec. IV., Par. 5. 75 

lest sometimes one should by change of Presbyte- 
ries escape discipline. Moreover, this regulation 
occasions a frequent recurrence of the question of 
the purity of their own life and doctrines to the 
members of Presbytery. It may therefore serve to 
confirm what is good as well as to prevent what is 
evil. The special requirement of applicants from 
other denominations simply requires of them what 
the others have complied with at their ordination. 

If the Presbytery should reject an applicant who 
comes from another denomination, and take no 
further action, he would be left in ecclesiastical 
standing where he was before ; and there is no ac- 
tion that the Presbytery could take, unless to com- 
municate its reasons to that ecclesiastical authority 
from which he came. But in the case of a Minis- 
ter coming from a sister Presbytery of this Church, 
as his application could not be considered until it 
v/as ascertained that he had been regularly dis- 
missed from that Presbytery to the one to which 
he applies, under the jurisdiction of which Presby- 
tery is he, between the time of the acceptance of 
his certificate as a regular dismissal and his formal 
admission? Under the jurisdiction of the Presby- 
tery from which he, comes. Otherwise, he would, 
as soon as his certificate is acted upon, and before 
his examination, be a member of the Presbytery 
to which he applies (for he is a member of that 
Presbytery which has jurisdiction over him), and 
he could no longer be said to be seeking admission. 
But if the Presbytery refuses, after the examina- 
tion, to admit him, the reasons for that refusal 
should be certified to the Presbytery that granted 
him his certificate. Then that Presbytery should 



76 Chap. T., Sec. IT., Par. 5. 95 

either try and censure him by due process, or in- 
sist upon his admission into the other Presbytery, 
leaving the issue between the two Presbyteries, if 
they cannot agree, to be determined by the higher 
coui'ts. For the unity of the Church is broken if 
it does contradictory things through two courts. 
(Cf. par. 67 : 4.) 

76. — V. The Presbytery shall cause to be transcribed, in 
some convenient part of the book of records, the obligations 
required of Ministers at their ordination, which shall be sub- 
scribed by all admitted to membership, in the following form, 
\\z. : "I, A. B., do exanimo receive and subscribe the above 
obligation as a Just and true exhibition of my faith and princi- 
ples, and do resolve and promise to exercise my ministry in 
conformity thereunto." 

These obligations are the first seven questions in 
paragraph 119, the eighth being a question for in- 
stallation only. 

All persons admitted to the communion in this 
Church are required to promise to behave accord- 
ing to the j^'f'^'f^cijjles of the faith and practice of 
this Church. All officers are required to profess 
acceptance of the standards of doctrine and gov- 
ernment, and to promise faithfulness in office; and, 
in the case of Euling Elders and Ministers, special 
emphasis is laid upon soundness in the faith as a 
qualification. (Par. 44 ; cf. par. 48.) In addition 
to this, Ministers are required to make this sub- 
scription, which involves two special particulars: 
they here profess that the affirmations and pro- 
mises made at their ordination are a just, as well 
as a true exhibition of their faith and principles; 
and they further promise to exercise their ministry 
in conformity thereunto. It is conceivable that a 
man might sincerely answer all the questions in the 



96 Chap. Y., Sec. IY., Par. 5. 76 

affirmative, and yet not be able to say that they 
are a just exhibition of his principles. And it 
might come about that one who sincerely answered 
these questions in the affirmative at his ordination 
would not be able to do so at his transition to an- 
other Presbytery. In such case, he could not sub- 
scribe. Here emerge two questions. 

If, for this or any reason, a Minister refuses to 
subscribe as here required, is he a member of the 
Presbytery to which he has come? No; his ad- 
mission is not completed until he subscribes, any 
vote to admit him being really a vote to admit him 
upon his subscribing. Strictly, a Minister who has 
been approved on examination should not be en- 
rolled as a member until he subscribes. 

If a Minister, after his ordination, changes his 
convictions, so that he cannot sincerely make the 
affirmations that he made at his ordination, what 
ought he to do ? It is the doctrine of the Form of 
Government that he ought not to change his mind ; 
and, therefore, it does not belong to an exposition 
of it to answer the question. "Whether the courts 
should treat such a change as an offence, should 
be answered under paragraph 152 of the Rules of 
Discipline. 

Here belongs the consideration of the question 
whether the Church should require such a sub- 
scription as a condition of admission to the minis- 
try. That turns upon the question whether this 
requires more than Christ requires. Are the faith 
and principles which he toaches, and to which he 
commands all his ministers to conform their minis- 
try, justly exhibited in the affirmations required 
by the Form of Government at ordination ? And 



77 Chap. V., Sec. IV., Par. 6. 97 

this question is reserved for discussion where those 
affirmations are required. But the requiring of 
promise and subscription is a prudential means, 
permissible if nothing is required beyond what 
Christ requires. 

77. —VI. The Presbytery has power 

1. to receive and issue appeals, complaints and references 
brought before it in an orderly manner ; 

What is an orderly maner, and how the Presby- 
tery shall proceed, are questions answered in the 
Kules of Discipline. 

2. and in cases in which the Session cannot exercise its 
authority, shall have power to assume original jurisdiction; 

The continuity and harmony of the sentence would 
have required it to run thus : "to assume original 
jurisdiction in cases in which the Session cannot 
exercise its authority." But the clause was in- 
serted as an amendment, and in the framing of it 
the harmony of the sentence was not sufficiently 
attended to. These cases will be as follows : where 
there is no Session ; in all matters for which one 
Elder is incompetent, where there is but one mem- 
ber of the Session ; in every matter for which the 
Session as it exists is disqualified by the relations 
of its members to the matter. Of its own ability 
the Session must judge, and of the need of assum- 
ing jurisdiction the Presbytery must judge. 

If the Session undertakes that for which it is not 
competent, the Presbytery does not have to wait 
for the Session to refer the question of its inability 
to the Presbytery, nor for some one to complain 
against the Session as unable ; but the Presbytery 
may act upon its own information, and assume the 
functions of the Session at its discretion, whenever 
6 



98 CflAP. Y., Sec. IV., Pak. 6. 77 

the Presbytery judges the Session to be unable. 
This action of the Presbytery, as every other of its 
actions, is subject to review by the higher courts. 

In all cases where there is no Session, the Pres- 
bytery is the Session. 

3. to examine and license candidates for the holy ministry ; 

As no time is prescribed to elapse between the 
Presbytery's first recognition of one as a candidate 
till his licensure, he may be under the Presbytery's 
care as a candidate an indefinite length of time; 
and his examinations may take place from time to 
time, in the discretion of Presbytery. But he is 
not a licentiate, until he is licensed ; and after he 
is licensed, he still remains a candidate for the 
holy ministry, for no one is a Minister until he is 
ordained. Obviously, it lies with the Presbytery 
to give directions to a candidate in his prepara- 
tions pending the conclusion of his examinations. 

4. to receive, dismiss, ordain, install, remove and Judge 
Ministers ; 

More special regulations for the exercise of these, 
as of other functions, are to be found elsewhere; 
but such regulations are not intended to take away 
the powers here assigned. The power to receive, 
dismiss, ordain and judge Ministers involves full 
jurisdiction over their conduct and teachings, pri- 
vate and official ; and the power also to install and 
remove them involves full control over them in 
assigning them to spheres of labor. While the 
PrSsbytery could not appoint any Minister to a 
labor to which Christ does not appoint him, and it 
must be assumed that Christ will make known his 
will to the Minister as well as to the Presbytery, 



77 Chap. V., Sec. IV., Pak. 6. 99 

yet Christ may speak to liim through the Presby- 
tery ; and he has promised subjection to his breth- 
ren in the Lord. Constitutionally, Ministers r.re 
subject to the order of Presbytery. 

5. to review the record of church Sessions, redress what- 
ever they may have done contrary to order, and take effectual 
care that they observe the Constitution of the Church ; 

It is not enough to look oTer the sessional records, 
but the Presbytery should "redress whatever" the 
Sessions "have done contrary to order." The 
Sessions are small in numbers, and often of neces- 
sity composed of men only imperfectly acquainted 
with the application of the principles of order, and 
the Presbytery is supposed to be composed of men 
among whom will be some of superior skill and 
wisdom in these matters ; and accordingly the Pres- 
bytery is given the greatest power of supervision. 
And it is able effectually to see that they observe 
the Constitution ; for the Presbytery may, as pointed 
out above, assume the functions of the Session 
when it finds the Session unable to exercise its 
authority. As it would be exceedingly tedious to 
read over all the Session records before the whole 
Presbytery, they may be referred to committees 
to examine in detail and report upon; but care 
should be taken that these committees are men of 
superior ability as Presbyters, and they should do 
their work carefully and make their reports to 
Presbytery full. 

6. to establish the pastoral relation, and to dissolve it at 
the request of one or both of the parties, or where the interests 
o± religion imperatively demand it ; 

Full regulations are elsewhere given for the first two 
items of this clause; but where the interests of 



100 Chap. V., Sec. IY, Par. 6. 77 

religion imperatively demand the dissolution, the 
Presbytery may act without the request or consent 
of either party. 

7. to set apart Evangelists to their proper work ; 

The principle must apply to teachers, editors and 
Ministers called to labor in such other works as 
may be needful to the Church. (Cf. par. 37.) 

8. to require Ministers to devote themselves diligently to 
their sacred calling and to censure the delinquent ; 

There is much official work for a Minister to do 
who is not engaged as Pastor or in any special 
work. Ministers may be delinquent in doing this 
general labor, a^nd they may be delinquent in not 
entering into openings for special labor. The 
Presbytery should allow no man to retain the dig- 
nity and power of a Minister who will not dili- 
gently devote himself to his official work. If the 
Presbyteries will faithfully exercise their power of 
appointing their Ministers to special work, they 
may also exercise this power of requiring them to 
devote themselves to their ministerial duties. 

9. to see that the lawful injunctions of the higher courts 
are obeyed ; 

by itself and by its Sessions and churches. 

10. to condemn erroneous opinions which injure the purity 
or peace of the Church ; 

It is not intended that Presbytery shall take note 

of all opinions. An opinion to be condemned by 

Presbytery should be such as is erroneous, as is 

injurious to either the purity or the peace of the 

Church, and as will have its injurious influence 

diminished by the Presbytery's condemnation. But 

the Presbytery in condemning such opinions is not 

going outside of its proper sphere. 



77 Chap. V., Sec. IY., Par. 6. 101 

11. to visit churches for the purpose of redressing the evils 
that may have arisen in them ; 

For the exercise of this power the Presbytery is 
given an effectual method, the assumption of the 
jurisdiction of Session in needful cases. 

12. to unite or divide churches, at the request of the mem- 
bers thereof ; 

While Presbytery has discretion to refuse to unite 
or divide churches when the members request, it 
may not unite two churches unless the members of 
each request it, nor divide a church unless its 
members request it. This makes sacred to its own 
decision the individuality of the particular church. 
It is in the particular chuch as nowhere else that 
the whole idea of the Church is gathered up and 
expressed; and a group of churches such as is 
united in a denomination, as the Presbyterian 
Church in the United States, cannot so well or so 
fully express the life and unity of the whole Church 
as can a particular church. Therefore the particular 
church, while not independent of other churches, 
does not exist for the denomination, but the de- 
nomination for the particular church. It is to be 
assumed that, when there ought to be a union or 
division of particular churches, the members 
thereof can be brought to see it; and if they 
should be too hasty to request union or division 
in any case, the Presbytery may refuse the request. 
Has Presbytery, then, the power to dissolve a 
church without the consent of its members? Cer- 
tainly not. For if it cannot divide it without its 
consent, it cannot annihilate it. But a church may 
cease to exist, and whether a church still exists or 
not Presbytery must judge; otherwise, Presbytery 



102 Chap. V., Sec. IV., Pae. 6. 77 

could not even determine what churches are under 
its jurisdiction. When does a church cease to exist 
as a particular church? When (paragraph 20) it 
ceases to consist of a number of professing Chris- 
tians ; when, its members having offspring, it ceases 
to associate these with their parents ; when it ceases 
to he an association for divine worship ; when it 
ceases to be an association for godly living ; when 
it ceases to act according to the Scriptures; or 
when it ceases to submit to the lawful government 
of Christ's kingdom. When the Presbytery finds 
any of these marks it may declare the fact that the 
church has ceased to be a church. Individual 
members of a church thus dissolved, as all mem- 
bers under the jurisdiction of Presbytery and not 
under the immediate jurisdiction of a Session, are 
under the immediate jurisdiction of Presbytery 
and may by it be given letters of dismission to 
other churches. 

Whenever what was a church ceases to meet 
statedly for divine worship, it ceases to be a church. 

13. to form and receive new churches ; 

(Cf. Sec. V. of Chap. II.) It may also receive 
churches from other Presbyteries or (subject to 90: 
14) churches existing outside of the Presbyterian 
Church in the United States. 

14. to take special oversight of vacant churches; 

(Cf. 2.) 

15. to concert measures for the enlargement of the Church 
within its bounds ; 

It belongs to the Presbytery to do this rather than 
to individuals or voluntary associations ; but in the 
exercise of this power the Presbytery cannot tran- 



78 Chap. Y., Sec. IV., Pars. 6, 7. 103 

scene! limitations or violate regulations elsewhere 
laid down. 

16. in general, to order whatever pertains to the spiritual 
welfare of the churches under its care ; 

As the, churches have no other sort of welfare, this 
is equivalent to saying welfare. Here, again, the 
Presbytery is not by this clause given any power 
beyond limitations or contrary to regulations else- 
where laid down. In this and the preceding regu- 
lation, it is implied that it belongs to higher courts 
to care for the enlargement of the Church and the 
welfare of the churches outside the bounds of the 
Presbytery. 

17. to appoint commissioners to the General Assembly ; 

By analogy with paragraph 67, last clause, and ac- 
cording to paragraph 88, these are to make report 
of their diligence. 

18. and, finally, to propose to the Synod or to the Assem- 
bly such measures as may be of common advantage to the 
Church at large. 

For while it does not belong to the Presbytery it- 
self to care for what lies outside of its own district, 
it Is proper for it to be concerned, and to propose 
to the higher courts measures reaching beyond its 
own district. And, indeed, the Presbyteries are 
the very courts where plans for the whole Church 
can receive the most careful and prolonged consid- 
eration in counsel. In the larger courts and courts 
whose action will be final, there is likely to be de- 
bate rather than counsel. 

78. — VII. The Presbytery shall keep a full and fair record 
of its proceedings, and shall send it up to the Synod annually 
for review. It shall report to the Synod and the General 
Assembly every year the condition and progress of religion 



104 Chap. V., Sec. IY., Paes. 7, 8. 79 

within its bounds during the year; and all the important 
changes which may have taken place, such as the licensures, 
the ordinations, the receiving or dismissing of members, the 
removal of members by death, the union and the division of 
churches and the formation of new ones. 

The records are sent up to Synod in order that 
the Synod may be able to discharge its function of 
review and control ; and the examination and cri- 
ticism of these records slioiild be thorough. The 
reports to Synod and Assembly are for informa- 
tion, and especially for the tabulation of statistical 
information. It is striking that no report of the 
dissolution of churches is called for. Does the 
Constitution assume that a church cannot cease? 
(Cf. par. 77: 12.) 

79. — VIII. The Presbytery shall meet at least twice a year 
on its own adjournment j and when any emergency shall re- 
quire a meeting sooner than the time to which it stands ad- 
journed, the Moderator, or, in case of his absence, death, 
or inability to act, the Stated Clerk shall, with the con- 
currence, or at the request of two Ministers and two Ruling 
Elders of different churches, call a special meeting. For this 
purpose he shall give notice, specifying the particular business 
of the intended meeting^ to every Minister belonging to the 
Presbytery, and to the Session of every vacant church, in due 
time previous to the meeting, which shall not be less than ten 
days. And nothing shall be transacted at such special meet- 
ing besides the particular business for which the court has 
been thus convened. 

A meeting of Presbytery, then, is a single session, 
or a series of sessions. 

A meeting "on its own adjournment" is a ''stated 
meeting" (par. 54), and not a part of the sessions 
of a meeting. It is the intention that a Presby- 
tery shall hold at least two stated meetings a year, 
not counting adjourned sessions. Regular meeting 
is a synonym of stated meeting. 

The power of the Moderator to call a special 



79 Chap. V., Sec. IY., Par. 8. 105 

meeting before the time of the stated or regular 
meeting (par. 55) is here limited in the case of the 
Moderator of the Presbytery, for he is not to call it 
unless with the concurrence of two Ministers and 
two Ruling Elders of different churches. Is he 
bound to call it upon the request of these four, 
when in his own judgment there is no emergency 
requiring it? No. To him, as Moderator, belongs 
some authority in this matter; but if he had no 
discretion but to call it at the request of less than 
a quorum, he would have no authority at all. Less 
than a quorum cannot force a meeting; for the 
power of the Moderator as defined in paragraph 55 
is not here taken away, but only limited. Other- 
wise a very small minority, even less than a quo- 
rum, could force a special meeting in such condi- 
tions as would permit the attendance of so few 
that they would be a majority, and thus the Pres- 
bytery would be at the mercy of a faction. But 
the Moderator, who is assumed to represent the 
Presbytery, and who, in the exercise of his discre- 
tion, would properly consider what the Presbytery 
would desire, may protect the Presbytery against 
design and useless expense and trouble. How- 
ever, this conclusion, that the Moderator is not 
bound to call a meeting when thus requested, is so 
doubtful that he ought not to refuse unless for very 
good reasons. 

That the whole spirit of the paragraph discourages 
special meetings is evident from the three pruden- 
dential and preventive requirements : that the two 
Ruling Elders must be of different churches, thus in- 
creasing the difficulty of getting the number ; that 
so long, and so universal, and so particular a notice 



106 Chap. V., Sec. IY., Par. 9. 80 

must be sent out ; and that nothing can be trans- 
acted at the special meeting but what is specified 
in the call. 

That these precautions may not make a special 
meeting impossible, in case the call cannot be issued 
by the Moderator, on account of absence, death, or 
inability, the Clerk, who will be generally known, 
is to act in his place ; but the Clerk is not to act 
in case the Moderator, being compos mentis, re- 
fuses to call a meeting. 

The actions of a meeting not properly called are 
void if called in question. 

80. — IX. Ministers, in good standing in other Presbyteries, 
or in any ecclesiastical body with which this Church has es- 
tablished correspondence, being present at any meeting of 
Presbytery, may be invited to sit and deliberate as correspond- 
ing members. Also, Ministers of like standing in other Evan- 
gelical Churches may be invited to sit as visiting brethren In 
all these cases it is proper for the Moderator to introduce 
these Ministers to the Presbytery, and give them the right 
hand of fellowship. 

Euling Elders are not included, as not being ex 
officio members of Presbytery, but of Session. 

Churches are here classified as non-Evangelical 
and Evangelical, which term, not beiug elsewhere 
defined in this connection, and being necessarily 
more or less approximate, the Presbytery must 
construe as cases arise. And Evangelical Churches 
are classified into those with which this Church 
has established correspondence, and those with 
which it has not — a provision designed to empha- 
size the difference between correspondence and fra- 
ternal relations without correspondence, corres- 
pondence being intermediate between fraternal rela- 
tions and organic union. For this Church looks 



81,82,83 Chap. Y., Sec. v., Pars. 1,2,3. 107 

upon other Churches with this question, What hin- 
ders organizational unity? Accordingly, corres- 
ponding members are invited to deliberate, but 
not to vote, whilst visiting brethren are invited 
only to sit, but not to deliberate or vote. 

Section V. — Of the Synod. 

Before laying down the powers of the Synod in 
paragi^aph 4, the questions of membership, meetings 
and corresponding members are disposed of in the 
first three paragraphs, and the regulations concern- 
ing its records and reports are added in paragraph 5. 

81. — I. The Synod consists of all the Ministers and one 
Ruling Elder from each church, in a district comprising at 
least three Presbyteries. The qualifications for membership 
in the Synod and the Presbytery are the same. 

The Synod being simply a larger Presbytery, the 
difference between a single Presbytery and two 
meeting together is not sufficient to justify a dis- 
tinction of courts. A Session may send one Eul- 
ing Elder to Presbytery and another to Synod. 

82. — II. The Synod shall meet at least once in each year, 
and any seven Ministers belonging to it, who shall convene at 
the time and place of meeting, -with at least three Ruling El- 
ders, shall be a quorum; provided not more than three of the 
said Ministers belong to one Presbytery. 

(Cf. remarks on par. 74.) The provision secures 

that at least three Presbyteries will be represented. 

Nothing could pass a bare quorum without having at 

least six in favor of it, as less than six would not 

be a majority. 

83. — III. The same rule as to corresponding members, 
which is laid down with respect to the Presbytery, shall apply 
to the Synod. 

Probably this includes also the rule as to visit- 
ing brethren. (Cf. par. 80.) 



108 Chap. Y., Sec. Y., Par. 4. 84 

84. — IV. The Synod has power 

1. to receive and issue all appeals, complaints, and refer- 
ences, regularly brought up from the Presbyteries ; 

(Cf. par. 77: l.J 

3. to review the records of the Presbyteries, and redress 
whatever they may have done contrary to order ; 

(Cf. par. 77 : 5.) 

3. to take effectual care that they observe the Constitution 
of the Church, and that they obey the lawful injunctions of the 
higher courts; 

(Cf. pars. 77 : 5, 9.) 

4. to erect new Presbyteries, and unite or divide those 
which were before erected; 

This is parallel to the Presbytery's power to form, 
unite, and divide churches. But the Synod does 
not have to wait for the consent of the Presbyte- 
ries. 

5. to appoint Ministers to such work, proper to their office, 
as may fall under its own particular jurisdiction ; 

This does not involve the powers of Presbytery 

enumerated in 77 : 4, 6, 7, 8. 

6. in general, to take such order with respect to the Pres- 
byteries, Sessions, and churches under its care as may be in 
conformity with the Word of God and the established rules, and 
may tend to promote the edification of the Church, 

(Cf. 77: 15.) 

Sweeping as this provision appears, it has three 
limitations : whatever a Synod may do in the exer- 
cise of this power, not in conformity to the Word 
of God, is null and void, and of this conformity 
each Presbytery, Session, and church must judge, 
as well as the Synod; the same may be said of 
conformity to the established rules, that is, the 
rules laid down in the Book of Church Order ; and 
it must tend to promote the edification of the church, 



85,86 CHAP.y.,SEC.V.,PAR.5;SEC.yL,PAR.l. 109 

of which tendency, however, the Synod is the sole 
judge, subject to the review of the Assembly. 

7. to concert measures for promoting the prosperity and 
enlargement of the Church within its bounds ; 

(Cf. 77: 14.) 

8. and, finally, to propose to the General Assembly such 
measures as may be of common advantage to the whole 
Church. 

(Cf. 77 : 17.) 

85. — V. It shall be the duty of the Synod to keep full and 
fair records of its proceedings, to submit them annually to the 
inspection of the General Assembly, and to report to it the 
number of its Presbyteries and of the members thereof, and in 
general, all important changes which may have occurred with- 
in its bounds during the year. 

(Cf. 78.) The number of its Euling Elder mem- 
bers is the same as the number of the churches of 
its Presbyteries. 

Seotion yi. Of the General Assembly, 
After a special statement of the dignity and dis- 
tinctive nature of the General Assembly in the 
first paragraph, and the disposal of the matters of 
meetings, members and quorum in the next three 
paragraphs, the powers of the Assembly are enum- 
erated in the fifth paragraph, and a special provi- 
sion as to adjournment is added in the sixth para- 
graph. 

86. — I. The General Assembly is the highest court of this 
Church, and represents in one body all the churches thereof. 
It bears the title of THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY OF THE 
PRESBYTERIAN CHURCH IN THE UNITED STATES, 
and constitutes the bond of union, peace and correspondence 
among all its congregations and courts. 

The title was not meant to deny that there are 
other Presbyterian Churches in the United States, 
but was selected as indicating that this Church is 



110 Chap. V., Sec. VI., Pars. 2, 3. 87, 88 

not sectional and as recognizing tlie duty of obedi- 
ence to the government under which its members, 
in the providence of God, are placed. While it is 
manifestly the bond of union and peace among all 
its congregations and courts, and its dignity and 
efficiency should be cherished as such, it must be 
remembered also that it is the bond of correspond- 
ence. For as churches may not negotiate with 
one another, except under review of their Presby- 
teries, nor Presbyteries with one another, except 
under review of their Synods, so neither can 
Synods with one another, except under review of 
the Assembly. 

87. — II. The General Assembly shall meet at least annually, 
and shall consist of commissioners from the Presbyteries in 
the following proportion, viz. : Every Presbytery shall be en- 
titled to send one Minister and one Ruling Elder ; but if it con- 
sists of more than twenty-four ministerial members, it shall 
send an additional Minister and Ruling Elder. 

This makes the number of Ministers and Ruling 
Elders in the Assembly equal. It also operates as 
an inducement to divide Presbyteries when they 
come to have many more than twenty-four Minis- 
ters. (Cf. remarks under 72.) 

88. — III. Each Commissioner, before his name shall be en- 
rolled as a member of the Assembly, shall produce from his 
Presbytery a commission under the hand of the Moderator and 
Clerk 

The end of these requirements is to prevent the 
possibility of anyone coming in w^ho has not been 
appointed by his Presbytery ; and they were more 
necessary when there was no telegraph and like 
means of rapid communication, and when there 
was danger that the civil power might appoint 
men to attend as members ; but doubtless now, the 



88 Chap. V., Sec. YI., Pae. 3. Ill 

end being secured, it T^-ould be no violation of the 
intent of the Constitution if the Assembly, after 
being constituted, should permit a delegate to sit 
without producing his written commission, in case 
it had been misplaced or, by accident, had not been 
made out. The requirement of the Moderator's 
signature is a modification of the provision in the 
last sentence of 56. 

in the following or like form, viz.: ''The Presbytery of 

being met at on the 

.... day of doth hereby appoint A. 

B., Minister [or Ruling Elder, as the case may be], and in 
case of his absence, then C. D., Minister [or Ruling Elder, as 
the case may be], to be a Commissioner on behalf of this Pres- 
bytery to tiie next General Assembly of the Presbyterian 

Church in the United States, to meet at on the 

. . day of . . . ., A. J)., or wherever and whenever the said 
Assembly may happen to sit: to consult, vot^s, and determine 
on all things that may come before that body, according to the 
principles and Constitution of this Church and the Word of God. 
And of his diligence herein he is to render an account at his 
return. Signed by order of the Presbvtery. 

"[C. D.], Clerk: [A. B.], Moderator/' 

A commissioner is appointed to sit in one As- 
sembly; but, if a Presbytery so chooses, it may 
appoint the same man as often as it will. If an 
Assembly adjourns to a continuance of its sessions, 
the commissioners already appointed have the right 
to sit in the adjourned sessions; but a Presbytery 
would certainly have the right to withdraw a com- 
mission once issued, and to commission another to 
the same xlssembly at any time. So, if neither the 
principal delegate nor his alternate can attend, the 
Presbytery would have the right to make a new 
appointment. And the alternate, appearing at any 
time, even after the principal has been enrolled, 
would have the right to sit in the absence of his 



112 Chap. Y., Sec. YI., Paks. 4, 5. 89, 90 

principal. In other words, a Presbytery cannot be 
deprived of its right to full representation in all 
the sessions of the Assembly. "One Assembly" 
means one meeting of the Assembly. (See defini- 
tion of "meeting" under 79.) 

A Presbytery may appoint as delegate to the 
General Assembly any Euling Elder belonging to 
a church under its jurisdiction, including even a 
Euling Elder not at the time in ofl&cial relations 
with any church. 

89. — IV. Any eighteen of these commissioners, of whom 
one-half shall be Ministers, and at least five shall be Ruling 
Elders, being met on the day and at the place appointed, shall 
be a quorum for the transaction of business. 

(Cf. par. 74.) As there must be at least nine 
Ministers, at least nine Presbyteries (unless some 
of the Presbyteries are quite large) will be repre- 
sented, and almost certainly more than one Synod. 
It is assumed that, in case of special difficulties in 
the way of securing a quorum, more Ministers 
could be present than Kuling Elders. 

Here it reads, "quorum for the transaction of 
business," making it plain that, if the number pre- 
sent at any time falls below the requirements for a 
quorum, business cannot be transacted ; and this is 
to be assumed also in the cases of the other courts. 

90.— V. The General Assembly shall have power, 1, to re- 
ceive and issue ail appeals, references, and complaints regu- 
larly brought before it from the inferior courts ; 

(Cf. 77,1; and 84, I.) 

2. to bear testimony against error in doctrine and immorality 
in practice, injuriously affecting the Church ; 

(Cf. 77: 10.) 

3. to decide in all controversies respecting doctrine and disci- 
pline ; 



90 Chap. V., Sec. VI., Pak. 5. 113 

This is a power peculiar to the Assembly; for, 
while the other courts decide in the sense of ren- 
dering a judgment, that judgment, if controverted, 
is not the decision of the controversy ; but the As- 
sembly's judgment is the judgment of the Church, 
and is, therefore, the end of the controversy. 
When, then, the Assembly has decided, is that a 
prohibition of further discussion? By no means. 
But the Assembly's decision in a controversy re- 
specting doctrine is thenceforth the doctrine of the 
Church; and further opposition to this doctrine is 
opposition to the doctrine of the Church, and is 
permissible only within the limitations within which 
opposition to the doctrine of the Church is per- 
missible. And the decision of the Assembly in a 
controversy respecting discipline fixes the status 
of the parties affected, and they are to be treated 
accordingly in their ecclesiastical relations by all 
who prefer to remain in this Church and free from 
its censure. 

4. to give its advice and instruction, in conformity with the 
constitution, in all cases submitted to it; 

Such judgments given by the Assembly are not 
decisions in the sense of the preceding paragraph, 
because there is here no controversy; nor could 
any one be charged with contravening the doctrine 
of the Church, or disobeying its authority, on the 
ground of teaching or acting contrary to such judg- 
ments. At the same time, these judgments should 
be treated with respect, even by those who are 
constrained to controvert them; and the utmost 
care should be taken in rendering such judgments, 
that they may be such as will command respect for 



114 Chap. Y., Sec. VI., Par. 5. 90 

the consideration and intelligence and earnest love 
of truth manifest in them. 

5. to review the records of the Synods ; 
(Cf. 77: 5, and 84: 2.) 

6. to take care that the inferior courts observe the Constitu- 
tion; 

(Cf. 77: 5, and 84: 3.) 

7. to redress whatever they may h ave done contrary to order : 
(Cf. 77: 5, and 84: 2.) 

8. to concert measures for promoting the prosperity and en- 
largement of the Church ; 

without as well as within its existing borders. (Cf. 
77: 14, 15, and 84: 7.) 

9. to erect new Synods • 

which includes the power of uniting and dividing 
Synods, with or without their consent. (Cf. 77: 
12, 13, and 84: 4.) 

10. to institute and superintend the agencies necessary in 
the general work of evangelization , 

(Cf. 90: 8.) The Assembly is to superintend as 
well as to institute these agencies. 

11. to appoint Ministers to such labors as fall under its 
jurisdiction ; 

(Cf. 84: 5.) 

12. To suppress schismatical contentions and disputations, 
according to the rules provided therefor; 

What contentions and disputations are schismatical 
the Assembly must judge. In the exercise of this 
power and that named in 90: 6, 7, it is not 
necessary for the Assembly to wait till one of the 
parties to a controversy brings it before the As- 
sembly; but the Assembly must not, in the exer- 
cise of this power, proceed without rule, nor 



90 Chap. Y., Sec. YI., Pae. 5. 115 

according to any rules but those provided for this 
very purpose in the Book of Church Order, Other- 
wise, the Assembly violates law in order to uphold 
law. 

13. to receive mider its Jurisdiction, with the consent of a 
majority of the Presbyteries, other ecclesiastical bodies whose 
organization is conformed to the doctrine and order of this 
Church : 

14. to authorize Synods and Presbyteries to exercise similar 
power in receiving bodies suited to become constituents of those 
courts, and lying within their geographical bounds respect- 
ively ; 

In these two clauses a peculiar power of the As- 
sembly is presented. It is the power to receive 
under its jurisdiction bodies which, being received, 
become incorporated in this Church as it is, with 
no change in its Constitution; and even this the 
Assembly cannot do without the consent of a ma- 
jority of its Presbyteries. But, to unite this Church 
and another into a Church having a Constitution 
differing, however slightly, from the existing Con- 
stitution of this Church, is beyond the power of 
the Assembly, even vdth the consent of a majority 
of its Presbyteries. If this Church is to be united 
with another into a Church having a Constitution 
differing from the existing Constitution of this 
Church, the new Constitution must first be adopted 
by this Church according to the provisions laid 
down in Chapter YII. Where there is to be union 
without change of Constitution, and the body to be 
thus incorporated into this Church lies geographi- 
cally so that it would be merged into some existing 
Synod or Presbytery, that Presbytery or Synod 
receives the body, but not without being first 



116 Chap. Y., Sec. YI., Paes. 5, 6. 91 

authorized by iiie Assembly ; but in such a ease, 
where only a Presbytery or Synod is directly 
affected, it is not necessary to obtain the consent 
of a majority of all the Presbyteries. But there 
can be no absorption of larger or smaller bodies, 
unless they ,are conformed to the doctrine and 
order of this Church ; for otherwise the doctrine 
and order of this Church would be acknowledged 
as not justifying a denominational existence to 
maintain them. 

15. to superintend the affairs of the whole Church ; 

For this superintendence is not to be left unpro- 
vided for and liable to be assumed by irresponsible 
parties. 

16. to correspond with other Churches ; 

With what Churches is left to the discretion of the 
Assembly, except that paragraph 80 implies that 
there will bo no correspondence except with Evan- 
gelical Churches. 

17. and in general to recommend measures for the promo- 
tion of charity, truth and holiness tlirough all the churches 
under its care. 

Things which the Assembly may not enjoin, either 
because it lacks the authority or because it deems 
it inadvisable to go so far as to enjoin, it may 
recommend. 

91 . — VI. The whole business of the Assembly being finished, 
and the vote taken for dissolving the present Assembly, the 
Moderator shall say from the chair: "By virtue of the au- 
thority delegated to me by the Church, let this General As- 
sembly be dissolved, and I do hereby dissolve it, and require 
another General Assembly, chosen in the same manner, to 
meet at on the day of A. D.," after which 

he shall pray and return thanks, and pronounce on those 
present the apostolic benediction. 



82 Chap. Y., Sec. YII., Pae. 1. 117 

For convening sj)ecial meetings of the xlssemblj 
or of a Synod see paragraph 55. The same As- 
sembly, once dissoived, cannot be reconvened. 

Section YII. — Of Ecclesiastical Corannissions. 

The first paragraph defines a commission; the 
second, specifies certain things that may properly 
be done by commission ; the third, indicates within 
what limitations judicial cases may be tried by 
commission ; and the fourth directs how the gen- 
eral work of evangelization shall be carried on by 
commission. 

92. — I. Commissions differ from ordinary committees in 
this, that while the committee is appointed simply to examine, 
consider, and report, the commission is authorized to deliberate 
upon and conclude the business submitted to it, subject, how- 
ever, to the review of the court appointing it. To this end, 
full records of its proceedings shall be submitted to the court 
appointing it, which, if approved, may be entered on the min- 
utes of that court. 

A commission is a committee, but a committee 
appointed to conclude the business, while an ordi- 
nary committee is appointed to report upon the 
business, that the appointing court may conclude 
it. The commission concludes the business in the 
sense in which an inferior court concludes a busi- 
ness, subject to the review of the court above. The 
conditions of that review are somewhat different. 
In the case of an inferior court, several ways of 
review are provided ; but the conclusion of a com- 
mission is always reviewed in hearing or inspecting 
its records, and in no other way. Its conclusion 
stands as that of the court appointing it, unless 
modified or reversed by that court at its review of 
the records of the commission ; but this conclusion. 



118 Chap. Y., Sec. YII., Par. 2. 93 

as any other decision, may be carried up to a higher 
court, except where the General Assembly confirms 
or sets aside the conclusion of a commission of 
itself. While it helps to prevent confusion, to 
reserve the term committee for only such com- 
mittees as are not appointed to conclude a business, 
and commission for only such committees as are 
appointed to conclude a business, yet^ if a court 
neglects this distinction in terms, a committee ap- 
pointed by it is really a commission or not, accord- 
ing as it is or is not appointed to conclude a busi- 
ness. 

93. — II. The taking of testimony in Judicial cases, 

by Session or Presbytery, 

the ordination of Ministers, the installation of Ministers, the 
visitation of portions of the Church affected with disorder, and 
the organization of new churches, 

by Presbytery, 

may be executed by commission. 

As it might be supposed from regulations elsewhere 
given that these things could be done only by the 
court itself, it is here distinctly stated that these 
things may be done by commission. For whatso- 
ever the court may do, that it may commit to a 
commission to be done, with such exceptions and 
limitations as are here or elsewhere stated or 
implied. 

The commission for the ordination of a Minister shall 
always consist of a quorum of the Court, but the Presbytery 
itself shall conduct the previous examinations. 

A Presbytery may not commit the examination of 
a licentiate for ordination to a commission ; but the 



94 Chap. V., Sec. VII., Pak. 3. 119 

ordination itself it may commit to a commission, 
provided the commission consists of as many as 
three Ministers and one Ruling Elder, A com- 
mission for any other purpose may consist of such 
number, from one up, as the court may determine. 
That a commission may consist of one only is 
evident from this, that an Evangelist authorized to 
organize new churches and to ordain Ruling Elders 
and Deacons therein, is essentially a commission. 
The quorum of a commission, except as defined in 
paragraph 94, or by express order of the appoint- 
ing court, is a majority of those appointed as the 
commission. Hence, if Presbytery appoints three 
Ministers and one Ruling Elder to ordain a Minis- 
ter, any three of the four will be a quorum of the 
commission; but the Presbytery may otherwise 
define what shall be a quorum. 

94. — III. The Synod and the General Assembly may, with 
the consent of parties, commit any case of trial coming before 
them on appeal to the Judgment of a commission, composed of 
others than members of the court from which the appeal shall 
come up. The commission of a Synod shall consist of not less 
than fifteen, of whom seven shall be Ruling Elders; the com- 
mission of the Assembly of not less than twenty-seven, of 
whom thirteen shall be Ruling Elders. In each case two-thirds 
of the commissioners shall be a quorum to attend to business. 
The commission shall try the cause in the manner- prescribed 
by the Rules of Discipline; and in rendering Judgment shall 
make a full statement of the case, which shall be submitted to 
the court for its action as its Judgment in the cause. 

May these courts do anything else by commis- 
sion? Yes. For the next paragraph names, ex- 
pressly, much that the Assembly may do by com- 
mission. But where parties bring a cause to a 
court for trial, even if it be an appeal, the court, 
even the General Assembly, may not try it by com- 



120 Chap. V., Sec. YII., Par. 4. 95 

mission without consent of parties. The principle 
is here recognized, that the parties have a right to 
trial by a full court. May a complaint be tried by 
commission ? Yes, with consent of parties ; for if 
an appeal, much more a complaint. May a Pres- 
bytery or a Session try a cause by commission? 
Yes, with consent of the parties ; and it may take 
testimony without such consent (93). But, lest 
trial in the appellate courts by commission should 
become a reference to individuals rather than a 
trial by a court in reality, it is prescribed that the 
commission shall be so large, and contain so many 
Euling Elders, that the resort to a commission in 
judicial cases will be impracticable unless the court 
is very large, and then the commission will be large 
enough to have the essential qualifications of a 
court for counsel together. And while in other 
cases the action of the commission is in force until 
annulled by the appointing couit, in judicial cases 
the action of the commission is not in force until 
endorsed by the court as its own action. Is the 
court bound to make the action of the commission 
its own? By no means. It may annul it, reverse 
it, modify it, and even order it tried over by a 
commission or before itself. For nothing is final 
in a judicial case but the decision of the court 
itself. 

95. — IV. The General Assembly shall have power to com- 
mit the various interests pertaining to the general work of 
evangelization to one or more commissions. 

(Cf. 90:10.) . 

This whole doctrine of commissions is to be put 
in practice with caution. On the other hand, there 
is danger that Presbyteries and the higher courts 



95 Chap. VI., Sec. I. 121 

will call commissions executive committees, or sim- 
ply committees, and forget that they are commis- 
sions, and many evils result. On the other hand, 
courts may often be tempted to do by commission, 
as more convenient or agreeable, what it were better 
for the court itself to do. But if the distinction 
between commissions and other sorts of committees 
is preserved, and commissions are used for those 
executive functions and special investigations which 
can be better done by a small number of specially 
fitted commissioners than by a large court, this 
section mav be practiced with great gain to the 
Church. 



CHAPTER YI. 

Of Chuech Orders. 

This chapter, which has to do with the induc- 
tion of men into office, after two preliminary sec- 
tions on the doctrines of vocation and ordination, 
has a section on the election of officers, followed 
by two sections on their ordination and installation, 
one as to Ruling Elders and Deacons, and one as 
Ministers. And there is added a section concern- 
ing the preliminary step toward ordination, called 
licensure. 

Section I. — Of the Doctrine of Vocation. 

This first preliminary section, which has to do 
with the theory of how men are called to office 
in the Church, has three paragraphs, one of them 
having to do particularly with one, and one with 
another, of the three elements in a call. 



122 Chap. YI., Sec. I., Paks. 1, 2. 96, 97 

96.— I. Ordinary vocation to office in the Church is the call- 
ing of God by the Spirit, through the inward testimony of a 
good conscience, the manifest approbation of Grod's people, 
and the concurring judgment of the lawful court of Christ's 
house according to his Word. 

"Ordinary vocation," means vocation to the ordi- 
nary offices. (Par. 33.) A true call is wholly by 
the Spirit, making a concurrent indication of God's 
will through three means : by producing the same 
conviction in the mind of the called, in the mind of 
the people of God that have experience of the 
called man's service or knowledge of him, and in 
the mind of the appropriate court. The essence of 
the call lies in the Holy Spirit working an inward 
conviction in the man himself ; but subsidiary and 
confirmatory means are not to be despised as helps 
to the man himself, and are indispensable for the 
sake of order in the Church. 

97. — II. Since the government of the Church is representa- 
tive, the right of the election of their officers by God's people, 
either immediately by their own suffrages, or mediately 
through church courts composed of their chosen representa- 
tives, is indefeasible. Nor can any man be placed over a 
church, in any office, without the election, or at least the con- 
sent of that church. 

The sole authority is Christ, and from this point of 
view the Church is a monarchy. But he adminis- 
ters the government solely by his Spirit working 
in all his people, and from this point of view the 
government is representative; for if the Holy 
Spirit calls any man to an office, he also calls the 
people to elect him thereto. It is observable, how- 
ever, that this right of election has necessary limi- 
tions. If the members of a church differ, some 
choosing and some opposing the same man for an 
office over them, it must either be that no man is to 



98 Chap. YI., Sec. I., Par. 3 ; Sec. II. 123 

be put in office without the unanimous voice of 
the people, or that over some, a man may be put 
in office without their consent. Here emerges the 
practical principle of submission to the brethren. 
But the particular church is made the sacred unit, 
whose voice, as such, must not be disregarded. (Cf. 
77: 12.) 

98. — III. Upon"^ those whom God calls to bear office in his 
Church he bestows suitable gifts for the discharge of their 
various duties. Wherefore every candidate for office is to be 
approved by the court by which he is to be ordained. And it is 
indispensable that, besides possessing the necessary gifts and 
abilities, natural and acquired, every one admitted to an office 
should be sound in the faith, and that his life and conversation 
be according to godliness. 

It is a serious omission, when a court inducts into 
office, as a matter of course, those elected by the 
people. Before ordination the court is bound to 
inquire into three things concerning the man 
elected : his possession of the necessary gifts ; his 
soundness in the faith ; and his life and behavior. 
The court may make this inquiry before election, 
but it must make it at some time before ordination 
or installation. 

Section II. — Of the Doctrine of Ordination. 

The distinction between ordination and vocation 
is this, that the vocation is the concurrent testi- 
mony of the Spirit of God through the man's own 
inner conviction, through the election by the peo- 
ple, and through the approval by the court, that 
the man should be inducted into office ; and ordi- 
nation is the formal induction. The section has 
three paragraphs, answering the questions, who 
are to ordain, what is ordination, and to what ordi- 
nation is. 



124 Chap. VI., Sec. II., Paks. 1, 2, 3. 99, 100, 101 

99. — I. Those who have been lawfully called are to be in- 
ducted into their respective offices by the ordination of a 
court. 

For even when the ordination is by a commission, 
even bj one man called an Evangelist, or by one 
man called a Commissioner, he acts as the agent of 
the court, and the ordination is done by the court 
through its appointed agency. (Cf. remarks un- 
der 6 and 93.) 

100. — II. Ordination is the authoritative admission of one 
duly called to an office in the Church of God, accompanied 
with prayer and the imposition of hands, to which it is proper 
to add the giving of the right hand of fellowship. 

A defect in the ceremony, as such, would not 
render the ordination invalid, provided there is an 
authoritative admission of one duly called. 

101. — III. As every ecclesiastical office, according to the 
Scriptures, is a special charge, no man shall be ordained un- 
less it be to the performance of a definite work. 

If a man is ordained as Deacon, it must be to 
serve in some definite work of distribution ; if as a 
Euling Elder, to some definite work of ruling ; and 
if as a Minister, it must be to some definite minis- 
terial work. If that particular work ceases, or he 
ceases to be engaged in it, the exercise of his office 
is suspended until he is called to some other defin- 
ite work; but as assisting to rule in the Church 
courts is always a part of the definite work to which 
a Minister or a Kuling Elder is ordained, this func- 
tion of his office never suffers suspense, so long as 
he is a member of a court. If an officer is called 
to another definite work than that to which he w^as 
originally ordained, he must be ordained to this 
new work also; but this secondary ordination is, 



101 Chap. VI., Sec. III. 125 

for distinction's sake, called installation. For the 
same reason, the term "installation" is used of that 
part of original ordination which relates especially 
to the definite work. 

Section III. — Of the Election of Church OJice^'s.^ 

This section treats of that part of vocation which 
is effected through the people ; and it treats, in the 
election of Ministers, only of their election to one 
sort of definite work, the pastoral office. There is 
neither here nor elsewhere any provision regulat- 
ing the participation of the people in calling a 
Minister to the work of Evangelist, or Teacher, or 
Editor, or other like work. (Cf. pars, 87 and 38.) 

The first four paragraphs give regulations for the 
election of Pastor, Ruling Elder, or Deacon; the 
other five paragraphs give special directions con- 
cerning the election of a Pastor and the certifica- 
tion of his election to Presbytery. No regulations 
on this point are thought to be necessary in the 
case of a Ruling Elder or a Deacon, as the ordain- 
ing court, the Session, is supposed to be present. 
In the general regulations, the first concerns the 
meeting of the church ; the second, the Moderator 
of the meeting^ ; the third, the order of procedure ; 
and the fourth, the electors. In the special regu- 
lations as to a Pastor, the first prescribes the es- 
sential duty of the Moderator; the second, the 
form of the call or communication from the church 
to the Pastor-elect ; the third, who shall sign this 
call, and how their signatures are to be certified; 
the fourth, how the call is to be presented to Pres- 
bytery; and the fifth, the mode of procedure when 
the Minister called belongs to a different Presby- 
tery from the church. 



126 Chap. YI., Sec. III., Pars. 1, 2. 102, 103 

102. — I. Every church shall elect persons to the offices of 
Pastor, Ruling Elder, and Deacon in the following manner, 
viz. : Public notice shall previously be given by the Session 
that the church is to convene at the usual place of public wor- 
ship for such purpose; and it shall always be the duty of the 
Session to convene them when requested by a majority of the 
persons entitled to vote. 

The meeting must be at the usual place of pub- 
lic worship, and after public notice, that those en- 
titled to vote may be able to attend ; and while the 
meeting must be called by the Session, the Session 
is bound to call such meeting when, a majority re- 
quests it, that the right of the people to elect may 
not be infringed. 

103. — II. It is important that in all these elections a Minis- 
ter should preside; but if the Session find it impracticable, 
without hurtful delay, to procure the attendance of a Minister, 
the election may nevertheless be held. 

The meeting is under the direction of the Ses- 
sion ; and it belongs to the Session, and not to the 
congregation, to provide a Moderator. If that 
Moderator is not a Minister, his rulings are subject 
to the review of the Session ; it a Minister, to the 
review of the Presbytery ; but in no case to the re- 
view of the congregation ; for that would be for the 
congregation, as such, to take part in government 
beyond electing, contrary to paragraph 15. It is, 
therefore, desirable that a Minister preside, so that 
his rulings may, if questioned, be reviewed by a 
body probably more competent, and less related in 
an embarrassing way to the questions involved. 
The relation of the Session to the Moderator of a 
congregational meeting being the same as its rela- 
tion to the Moderator of the Session, whoever is 
Moderator of the Session is, ex officio, Moderator 



104 Chap. YI., Sec. III., Par. 3. 127 

of the congregation, with the limitations specified 
in paragraphs 64 and 65. (Cf. par. 104.) 

104, — III. The voters being convened, the Moderator shall 
put the question to them whether they are ready to proceed to 
the election. If they declare themselves ready, the Moderator 
shall call for nominations, after which the election shall im- 
mediately proceed, unless the electors prefer to postpone it to 
a subsequent day; or the election may proceed by ballot with- 
out nominations. But in every case a majority of all the 
voters present shall be required to elect. 

We have said that the meeting is under the direc- 
tion of the Session ; and who but the Session can 
determine who of those present are voters? The 
Moderator of the congregation is, at the same 
time, the Moderator of the Session in session at 
the same time, and he must ascertain who are 
voters, through the Session. 

The first question to be ascertained is whether 
the voters are convened. Supposing a church has 
one hundred voters, would two of them be the 
voters ? Surely not ; and yet it is impracticable to 
have all the voters convened. What, then, is a 
quorum of a church ? In the absence of any regu- . 
lation, it must be decided by general principles 
that it requires a majority to make a quorum. 
But always, when the question of a quorum is not 
raised, either at the time or within a reasonable 
time afterwards (cf. par. 258), less than a majority 
may act. 

The second question must be decided by the 
voters themselves : whether they are ready to pro- 
ceed. 

The third question must also be decided by 
them: whether they will elect with or without 
nominations. 



128 Chap. VI., Sec. III., Paes. 3, 4. 105 

If it is decided to have nominations, the fourth 
thing is to hear nominations; the fifth, to deter- 
mine by the electors whether to vote at once or to 
postpone the voting. If the decision is to vote at 
once, the sixth thing is to determine, by the voters, 
whether to vote by ballot or in some other way; 
but this question must itself be determined by 
ballot, if any insist upon a ballot upon this ques- 
tion, for otherwise the very reason of a ballot at 
all, secrecy in voting, would be taken away. 

If no one receives a majoritj^ of the votes for a 
given office, no one is elected. Whether a second 
vote may be taken, with or without dropping one or 
more of the nominees or persons already voted for, 
is not prescribed ; but it would seem, from the 
principle that a church does not so much need 
officers, as qualified and acceptable officers, that 
there should be no second vote ; but of this the 
congregation must judge ; and sometimes the fail- 
ure of any one to receive a majority may be due to 
what seems to the congregation a superabundance 
of suitable material. 

The principle, that a majority shall rule, is a 
practical necessity rather than an inherent right; 
and for this reason there should be a great desire 
to have the same mind. The failure to be unani- 
mous is a failure that should be always lamented. 
And it would certainly be in order for a majority 
to recede from its own choice, just as it is in order 
for a minority to give up its opposition ; but either 
must judge for itself what is the will of Christ in a 
given case. 

105. — IV. All communicating members in good and regu- 
lar standing, but no others, are entitled to vote in the election 



105 Chap. VL, Sec. III., Par. 4. 129 

of church officers in the churches to which they are respectively 
attached ; and when a majority of the electors cast their votes 
for a person for either of these offices, he shall be considered 
elected. 

Here a majority of electors must mean a majority 
of those present ; for no one can vote who is not 
present, and no one is present unless present in 
his own person and by his own consent counted as 
present. (Cf. 105.) 

Here appears the necessity for the Session to be 
in session and to conduct the election as a part of 
the business of the Session. Then, also, the pro- 
ceedings of the congregational meeting, as what is 
done under the supervision of the Session, will be 
recorded in the records of the Session, and the 
Clerk of the Session will be the clerk of the con- 
gregational meeting. (Cf. 105.) 

Those not members of the Church are excluded 
from voting for its officers, as a matter of course ; 
for nothing can entitle him who will not acknow- 
ledge Christ to the right of participating in the 
government of his Church. Those not members of 
the particular church are excluded, for otherwise 
the individuality of the particular church would 
perish. Those not communicants are excluded, for 
the reason that only those who are themselves en- 
deavoring to obey Christ can be qualified to act as 
his agents in pointing out what men he would put 
over his people. For the same reason, none under 
censure can be allowed to vote. A member of the 
Session (except a Minister) has the same right as 
any other member of the Church to make a nomi- 
nation or motion, and to vote. 

Has the Session authority to make nominations ? 
9 



130 Chap. YI., Sec. III., Par. 5. 106 

Yes, unless the church decides to elect without 
nominations ; but for the Session to announce nomi- 
nations before the congregation has decided this 
point is to take away from the congregation the 
decision of this point. But it must be remembered 
that the Session has the right to refuse installation 
to those chosen by the congregation ; and this right 
should always be exercised when there is need 
thereby to preserve the church from having officers 
not qualified. 

106. — V. On the election of a Pastor, if it appear that a 
large minority of the voters are averse to the candidate who 
has a majority of votes, and cannot be induced to concur in the 
call, the Moderator shall endeavor to dissuade the majority 
from prosecuting it further; but if the electors be nearly or 
quite unanimous, or if the majority shall insist upon their 
right to call a Pastor, the Moderator shall in that case proceed 
to draw a call in due form, and to have it subscribed by them, 
certifying at the same time in writing the number and circum- 
stances of those v/ho do not concur in the call, all of which 
proceedings shall be laid before the Presbytery together with 
the call. 

The principles of this paragraph should obtain 
also in the case of the election of Ruling Elders 
and Deacons. 

The direction to the Moderator that he endeavor 
to dissuade the majority when it appears that the 
minority will not concur must not be interpreted 
too strictly ; for it might be that he could not con- 
scientiously make this endeavor. But he should at 
least press upon them the importance of unanimity, 
and a sense of the responsibility that they assume. 
Sometimes, hov/ever, there is a wilful and obstinate 
minority who oppose, as Pastor, the very servant of 
his that Christ presents to them, and who ought 
not to be yielded to. 



107 Chap. VI., Sec. III., Par. 6. 131 

The full and exact facts should be certified to 
the Presbytery by the Moderator, that the Presby- 
tery may have all the data for judging. What is 
meant by the circumstances of those who do not 
concur in the call is not clear. Surely it cannot 
mean financial circumstances especially. Probably 
it means the circumstances connected with their 
non-concurrence, including the grounds and in- 
tensity of their opposition. The financial ability 
of the church to meet its proposed obligations the 
Presbytery would need to know; but this it can 
learn from the commissioners. That circumstances 
cannot mean financial ability, or other thing of the 
sort, is certain, from the fact that the Moderator 
would not as a rule know such facts so well as the 
commissioners; besides, it were contrary to the 
whole spirit of the Form of Government to give 
weight to any member's vote because of his wealth. 

107. — VI. The call shall be in the following, or like form, 

viz. : The church of , being on sufficient grounds 

well satisfied of the ministerial qualifications of you . . . . , 
and having good hopes from our past experience (or know- 
ledge) of your labors, that your ministrations in the gospel will 
be profitable to our spiritual interests, do earnestly call you to 
undertake the pastoral office in sai'd congregation, promising 
you, in the discharge of your duty, all proper support, encour- 
agement, and obedience in the Lord. And that you may be 
free from worldly cares and avocations, we hereby promise 
and oblige ourselves to pay you the sum of .... in regular 
monthly (or quarterly, or half-yearly, or yearly) payments, 
during the time of your being and continuing the regular Pastor 
of this church. 

In testimony whereof we have respectively subscribed our 
names this .... day of .... A. D. 

Attested hy A. B., Moderator of the Meeting. 

The Moderator, who draws up the call (106), 
should not vary from this form, unless the congre- 



132 Chap.VL,Sec.IIL,Pars.7, 8,9. 110 

gation by its action adopts the yariation; and it 
belongs to the congregation to adopt the amount 
or statement of salary, and what payments are to 
be made. This form, and all the provisions of the 
Book, contemplate only one church to a Pastor; 
but where the church does not ask for all the time 
of the Pastor, it is proper that the form of call 
should indicate what time it does ask for ; and this, 
too, it belongs to the church to determine. 

108. — VII. But if any church shall choose to subscribe its 
call by the Ruling Elders and Deacons, or by a committee, it 
shall be at liberty to do so. But it shall, in such case, be fully 
certified to the Presbytery by the Minister, or other person 
who presided, that the persons signing have been appointed for 
that purpose by a public vote of the church, and that the call 
has been in all other respects prepared as above directed. 

This provision is for convenience ; but the obliga- 
tions of the people are the same as if they all 
themselves signed. That they may not lightly 
enter into obligations, it would be well, unless they 
are already familiar with them, to read over to the 
congregation, when about to enter upon an elec- 
tion, the obligations that are to be assumed. 

109. — VIII. One or more commissioners shall be appointed 
to present and prosecute the call before Presbytery. 

These it belongs to the congregation to select. 

110. — IX. If the call be to a Minister or Probationer of 
another Presbytery, the commissioners appointed to prosecute 
the call shall produce an attested certificate from their own 
Presbytery that it has been laid before that body and found in 
order, and that permission has been granted them to prosecute 
it before the Presbytery to which he belongs. 

It is an irregular procedure for the Pastor elect to 
change Presbyteries before the call has been placed 
in his hands. Indeed, he need have no opinion, or 



112 Chap. YI., Sec. IV., Pars. 1, 2. 133 

at least give no assurance of what his answer will 
be, until after the call is placed in his hands ; for 
only so can the church and the Presbyteries speak 
their mind to him before he speaks his mind to 
them, as the Book contemplates. 

Section IV. — Of the Ordination and Installation of Ruling 
Elders and Deacons^ and of the Dissolution of their Official Rela- 
tions. 

Under the head of ordination and installation is 
treated that part which the court takes in the voca- 
tion (paragraphs 96-98) of officers, as well as what 
these terms properly signify. The ordination of 
Euling Elders and Deacons is treated together, and 
separately from that of Ministers, because they are 
ordained by the Session and Ministers by the 
Presbytery. After a paragraph on appointing a 
day for the ordination, follows a paragraph on the 
ordination itself; and then come three paragraphs 
on the dissolution of these relations : one on disso- 
lution upon request ; one on dissolution by removal ; 
and one on the renewal of relations once dissolved. 

111.— I. When any person has been elected to either of 
these offices, if the way be clear, and he declare his purpose to 
accept, the Session shall appoint a day for his ordination. 

Whether the way is clear the Session must deter- 
mine, especially observing paragraph 98. No one 
can be required to assume an office without his 
own consent. 

112. — II. The day having arrived, and the Session being 
convened in the presence of the church, a sermon shall be 
preached, if convenient; after which the presiding Minister 
shall state in a concise manner the warrant and nature of the 
office of Ruling Elder or Deacon, together with the character 
proper to be sustained and the duties to be f ulfiled. 



134 Chap. VI., Sec. IY., Pae. 2. 112 

The presiding Minister is, of course, the Moderator 
of the Session, which is in session from the begin- 
ning of this service of ordination, the ordination 
being by the Session and not by the Minister. 

Having done this, he shall propose to the candidate, in the 
presence of the church, the following questions, viz. : 

1. Do you believe the Scriptures of the Old and New Testa- 
ments to be the word of God, the only infallible rule of faith 
and practice ? 

As this is not intended to inquire into a man's 
opinion as to the genuineness of particular readings, 
so not as to the authenticity of particular books, 
but into his opinion concerning these Scriptures 
as a whole. It is purposely asked whether they 
are the word of God, instead of whether they con- 
tain the word of God ; for, though there are senses 
in which it might be more exact to say that they 
contain the word of God, yet, unless one believes 
that they are, being the word or teaching of some 
one person, God's Word, he is not able to answer 
this question affirmatively in the sense intended. 
For, while we would claim for our standards only 
that they contain the word of God, we claim for 
the Scriptures that they are the word of God. 
And while these standards are a rule of faith and 
practice, and we believe them to be, on the whole, 
a correct rule, yet neither they nor any other rule 
set forth by individuals or councils is an infallible 
rule ; but, in contrast with them all, however excel- 
lent some of them may be, we believe that the 
Scriptures are an infallible rule, and so the only 
infallible rule whatever. Being such, they teach 
the truth and nothing but the truth. This does 



112 Chap. VL, Sec. IV., Par. 2. 135 

not determine whether there may be errors in some 
of the statements of the Bible as it actually lies 
before us, nor how such errors, if any, have come 
to be there, but it does determine that the Scrip- 
tures, as they came from God and as they now exist 
in the possession of the Church, are infallible in 
their teaching as to belief and duty. And all 
officers of our Church stand together upon this 
fundamental platform, and no one is asked or ex- 
pected to associate himself with us in office who 
cannot sincerely stand with us upon this basis. 

2. Do you sincerely receive and adopt the Confession 
of Faith and Catechisms of this Church, as containing the 
system of doctrine taught in the Holy Scriptures ? 

The question is not concerning the Westminster 
Confession and Catechisms, but concerning the 
Confession and Catechism^ of this Church, though 
the difference between them is slight. The ques- 
tion has to do, not with a favorable opinion of 
these standards, nor even with such an approval of 
them as one might give to a set of regulations, but 
with such a receiving of them as is an adoption of 
them as one's own utterance of his beliefs. And 
yet there is a limitation. Not only is any formula- 
tion of doctrine incomplete, in that it does not con- 
tain all that the complete teaching of the Scrip- 
tures contains, and more or less one-sided, in that 
it is a contradiction of the particular forms of error 
prevailing at the time of its formulation, and lays 
special emphasis upon the truths just then most in 
dispute, or most thoroughly agreed upon by the 
formulators ; but it is fallible, and liable to contain 
positive error in its teaching. Hence one is not 
asked to say that these standards are the doctrines 



136 Chap. VI., Sec. IV., Pae. 2. 113 

of Scripture, but that they contain the doctrines 
of Scripture. 

But while we admit that these standards may 
contain error, and a man can properly answer this 
question affirmatively who believes that this or 
that in the standards is erroneous, yet no one can 
properly answer this question affirmatively who 
does not believe that the system of doctrine con- 
tained in these standards is the system of doctrine 
taught in the Scriptures. If one believes that no 
system is taught in the Scriptures, but only partic- 
ular facts and doctrines incapable of being reduced 
to a system, or if he does not believe that the con- 
fessional system is the scriptural system, though 
with some defects, it may be of omission, undue 
emphasis, and even positive errors, he cannot with 
propriety make this confession of faith his own. 

3. Do you approve of the government and discipline of the 
Presbyterian Church in the United States ? 

A gradation is noticeable : the Scriptures are said 
to he the word of God ; the standards of doctrine 
are adopted as containing the scriptural syste7n of 
doctrine; but the governmental standards are not 
thus adopted, but the government and discipline 
are approved. In view of this evidently intended 
difference, while the principles of doctrine under- 
lying the government and discipline, so far as set 
forth in the doctrinal standards, are covered by the 
preceding question, yet the application of these 
principles, as set forth in the Book of Church Or- 
der, are here only approved in the sense of agreed 
to as regulations to be observed. But unless one 
can thus sincerely approve, being willing to assume 
covenant obligations to carry out these provi- 



112 Chap. VI., Sec. IY., Par. 2. 137 

sions, he ought not to answer this question affirma- 
tively. 

4. Do you accept the office of Ruling Elder (or Deacon, as 
the case may be) in this church, and promise faithfully to per- 
form all the duties thereof ? 

Of course, if at any time afterwards one becomes 
unwilling to perform all the duties of his office 
faithfully, he is bound, on common principles of 
honesty, to resign his office obtained upon this 
promise. And surely no one can without sin allow 
himself to answer this question affirmatively with- 
out first acquainting himself, in some good mea- 
sure, with the duties to which he thus pledges 
himself; just as no one can, without sin, affirm the 
three questions preceding, until after he has exam- 
ined the Scriptures, the Confession, and Cate- 
chisms, and the government and discipline, and 
satisfied himself of his ability to answer Yes intel- 
ligently and sincerely. 

5. Do you promise to study the peace, unity, edification, 
and purity of the Church ? 

This pertains not to the particular church alone, 
but also to the whole Church. The officer is to 
earnestly endeavor that he may positively promote, 
as well as not hinder, the peace, including espec- 
ially the unity of the Church. He will therefore 
labor to keep his particular church in unity with 
the Church. But the peace of the Church is not 
to be purchased with its edification and purity, 
but the peace is in order to purity. 

The Ruling Elder or Deacon elect having answered in the 
affirmative, the Minister shall address to the members of the 
church the following question, viz. : 

Do you, the members of this church, acknowledge and re- 



138 Chap. YI., Sec. IV., Pak. 2. 112 

ceive this brother as a Ruling Elder (or Deacon), and do you 
promise to yield him all that honor, encouragement and 
obedience in the Lord to which his office, according to the 
word of God and the Constitution of this Church, entitles 
him? 

The members of the Church include the baptized 
children that have not yet been admitted to the 
Lord's table, if they choose to assent to this ques- 
tion. While " obedience " is hardly due to a deacon 
as such, honor and encouragement are, and the 
question is framed to cover the case of both Deacon 
and Kuling Elder. If the members that have a 
right to vote should now refuse to agree to this 
pledge, such refusal would be sufficient reason for 
proceeding no further with the ordination, of which 
matter, as of all others arising in the course of 
ordination, the Session must judge, and not the 
Minister. 

The members of the church having answered this question 
in the affirmative, by holding up their right hands, the Minister 
shall proceed to set apart the candidate, with prayer and the 
laying on of the hands of the Session, to the office of Ruling 
Elder (or Deacon, as the case my be). Prayer being ended, 
the members of the Session (and the Deacons, if the case be 
that of a Deacon) shall take the newly ordained officer by the 
hand, saying, in words to this effect: "We give you the right 
hand of fellowship, to take part in this office with us." The 
Minister shall theti say: "I now pronounce and declare that 
A. B. has been regularly elected, ordained and installed a 
Ruling Elder (or Deacon) in this Church, agreeably to the 
word of God, and according to the Constitution of the Presby- 
terian Church in the United States ; and that as such he is en- 
titled to all honor, encouragement and obedience in the Lord : 
In the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy 
Ghost. Amen." After which he shall give to the Ruling 
Elder (or Deacon) and to the church, an exhortation suited to 
the occasion. 

The members of the Session, being all ex officio 



113 Chap. YL, Sec. ly., Pae. 3. 139 

Deacons, may say to a newly ordained Deacon, 
*'to take part in this office with us." It is impor- 
tant to notice that not only the Minister, but all 
the members of the Session, lay on their hands 
npon the candidate ; but the Deacons do not, nor 
any Euling Elder or Minister not sitting in the 
Session as a member or by courtesy, for the ordi- 
nation is a sessional act. 

118. — III. The offtces of Ruling Elder and Deacon are per- 
petual ; nor can they be laid aside at pleasure ; nor can any 
person be degraded from either office but by deposition after 
regular trial. Yet a Ruling Elder or Deacon may, though 
chargeable with neither heresy nor immorality, become unac- 
ceptable in his official character to a majority of the church 
which he serves. In such a case, it is competent for the Ses- 
sion, upon application, either from the officer or from the 
church, to dissolve the relation. But no such application from 
either party shall be granted without affording to the other 
party full opportunity for stating objections. 

See Bules of Discipline, Chap. YIII., Sec. X. 
The office is perpetual in the same sense as the 
status of communicating member is perpetual ; as 
one cannot come into either dignity without the 
coaction of the Church, so one cannot pass out of 
either obligation Y\^ithout the coaction of the Church. 
And the Church cannot deprive any one of either 
status without regular trial. But just as the pas- 
toral relation between a Minister and a particular 
church may be dissolved without degrading him 
from the oifiice of Minister, so the official relation 
between a Euling Elder or Deacon and a particu- 
lar church may be dissolved without degrading him 
from his office. When called again to serve in his 
office in the same or another particular church, lie 
needs not to be ordained again, but only to be in- 
stalled. And as it is the Presbytery that dissolves 



140 Chap. YI., Sec. IV., Pars. 3, 4. 114 

the relation in the case of a Minister, so it is the 
Session that dissolves the relation in the case of a 
Killing Elder or Deacon. Either party may re- 
quest the dissolution, but the court may not act 
without first hearing from the other party. How 
the church can initiate proceedings in such a case 
is not pointed out, and there seems to be no way 
provided, unless one of these two be resorted to : a 
majority of those entitled to vote may request the 
Session to convene the Church for the purpose of 
taking action on the question of the official relation 
of such or such, and then the Session would be 
bound to convene the Church as requested (102) ; 
or the Session itself, without request from either 
party, may present the question of the continuance 
of his official relations either to an officer or to the 
church, as the Presbytery might present such a 
question to a Pastor or to his church. Our para- 
graph suggests unacceptability in his official capa- 
city to a majority of the church as a reason for the 
dissolution of one's official relation ; but, of course, 
unacceptability to a minority, or other reason, 
might be sufficient ground, as in the case of a 
Pastor, of which the Session must judge. But by 
analogy (cf. par. 128), the Session has no option 
but to dissolve the relation when both parties re- 
quest it. 

114. — IV. When a Ruling Elder or Deacon removes perma- 
nently beyond the bounds of the church which, he serves, his 
official relation shall be thereby dissolved, and the Session 
shall record the fact. 

The relation is dissolved by the removal, whether 
the officer obtains a certificate of dismission or 
not; and the Session should make record of the 



115 Chap. YI, Sec. IY., Par. 5; Sec. Y. 141 

fact of permanent removal and the consequent dis- 
solution of official relation, without waiting for an 
application for dismissal. 

There is no provision for releasing a Ruling 
Elder or Deacon from his official relation on the 
ground of old age or physical inability (unless so 
far as paragraph 113 may be construed thus) ; nor 
may his official relation be dissolved on such 
ground except under paragraph 113. 

115. — Y. When a Ruling Elder or Deacon who has been 
released from his official relations is again elected to his office 
in the same or another church, he shall be installed after the 
above form, with the omission of ordination. 

All the questions v/ould be asked, and everything 
done as prescribed in paragraph 112, omitting the 
words "shall proceed to set apart. . . . After 
which he." If a Ruling Elder thus released is 
afterwards elected a Deacon in the same or another 
church, he would be installed simply, since a Rul- 
ing Elder is ex-qfficio a Deacon. (See last para- 
graph of remarks on 112.) 

Section Y, — Of the Ordination of Ministers, and tlie Forma- 
tion and Dissolution of tJie Pastoral Relation. 

The relation of a Minister to a church as one of its 
officers is treated apart from the like relation of a 
Ruling Elder or Deacon, because this the Session 
controls, and that the Presbytery. The section 
falls into three parts — seven paragraphs on the 
ordination of Pastors; six paragraphs of special 
regulations to cover cases not provided for in the 
preceding paragraphs; and one paragraph on the 
dissolution of the pastoral relation. The seven 
paragraphs on the ordination of Pastors have three 
on the steps antecedent to the ordination, one on 



142 Chap. VI., Sec. Y., Pars. 1, 2. 116, 117 

the placing of the call, one on the acceptance of it, 
and one on trials with a view to ordination ; and 
three on the ordination itself, one on the obliga- 
tions of the candidate, one on the obligations of 
the church, one on the act of ordination, and one 
on the recognition of the new Pastor. 

116. — I. No Minister or Probationer shall receive a call 
from a church but by the permission of his Presbytery. When 
a call has been presented to the Presbytery, if found in order 
and the Presbytery deem it for the good of the Church, they 
shall place it in the hands of the person to whom it is ad- 
dressed. 

The principle is fundamental, that neither Minister 
nor church may enter into the pastoral relation 
without the consent of Presbytery; and the estab- 
lishment of what is virtually the pastoral relation 
without the regular process and installation, what- 
ever the relation may be called, is subversive of 
our system. Even for the Minister to signify his 
own mind concerning his proposed relation to the 
church before the Presbytery has acted will often 
tend to render the interposition of the Presbytery 
impracticable. The ideal would be for the called 
to give no indication of his own mind, and not to 
be consulted at all, until after the Presbytery has 
put the call into his hands. 

117. — II. When a call for the pastoral services of a Proba- 
tioner has been accepted by him, the Presbytery shall take 
immediate steps for his ordination. 

Wlien the three parties — the church and the Pres- 
bytery and the man called — have all agreed that 
the relation should be established, no pleas of 
convenience or of other ground shall be permitted 
to delay it, in the case of a probationer ; but in the 



118 Chap. VL, Sec. Y., Par. 3. 143 

case of an ordained Minister other interests may 
justify a delay. 

118. — III. The trials for ordination, especially in a different 
Presbytery from that in which the candidate was licensed, 
shall consist of a careful examination as to his acquaintance 
with experimental religion; as to his knowledge of philosophy, 
theology, ecclesiastical history, the Greek and Hebrew lan- 
guages, and such other branches of learning as to the Presbytery 
ehall appear requisite, and as to his knowledge of the doctrine 
of the sacraments, and the principles and rules of the govern- 
ment and discipline of the Church. He shall further be re- 
quired to preach a sermon before the Presbytery. The Pres- 
bytery being fully satisfied of his qualifications for the sacred 
office, shall appoint a day for his ordination, which ought, if 
practicable, to be in that church of which he is to be the Pastor. 

It must be borne in mind that the one object of 
these trials is to satisfy the Presbytery of the pro- 
bationer's qualifications for the ministry; Presby- 
tery is not to ordain until fully satisfied as to quali- 
fications, and the trials should continue until this 
full satisfaction is reached, and need continue no 
further. But the Presbytery is not at liberty to 
omit altogether any part of the trials here pre- 
scribed, unless it be such part as has been had al- 
ready before the Presbytery in trials for licensure ; 
and these need not be omitted. 

These trials fall into three groups. The first is a 
careful examination as to his own inward experi- 
ence. The question, not merely whether the pro- 
bationer gives credible evidence of faith in Christ, 
but whether, having such faith, his religious expe- 
rience is such as a Minister needs to have as a 
qualification for his office. For one may have 
some acquaintance with genuine experimental reli- 
gion, and not have sufficient acquaintance for this 
office. As this is immeasurably more important 



144 Chap. VI., Sec. V., Par. 3. 118 

than any learning, so upon this the chief stress 
ought to be laid. Whatever other trial is abridged 
or given little attention, this, which is put first and 
is first, should be thorough, and too great defi- 
ciency here should always arrest the trials for ordi- 
nation, it not being worth while to go further, un- 
less the probationer is qualified in this respect. 

The second group is a careful examination as to 
knowledge. And the branches of knowledge are 
specified in three specifications. The first specifi- 
cation is philosophy, theology, ecclesiastical his- 
tory, the Greek and Hebrew languages. Philoso- 
phy is named before theology, a man's philosophy 
having more to reveal of his mental make-up, and 
more ^ to do with determining his theology, than his 
theology has to reveal of his mental make-up, or 
to do with his philosophy. And yet theology is 
the central subject, to which philosophy contri- 
butes on the one hand, and ecclesiastical history 
and the original languages of Scripture on the 
other. It must appear strange that knowledge of 
the Scriptures is not distinctly named, unless the- 
ology is understood to be another term for it. The 
second specification is such other branches of 
learning as to the Presbytery shall appear requi- 
site. Kequisite for what? Eequisite for showing, 
whether he has the qualifications for the office of 
the ministry. For one might be destitute of learn- 
ing in some of the subjects named, and yet have 
such learning in subjects not named as would make 
him superior, in point of human learning, to many 
that have satisfactory learning in the subjects 
named. Now, it is manifest that the requirement 
to examine in these branches of learning that are 



119 Chap. VI., Sec. Y., Pae. 4. 145 

named, is not a requirement that the probationer 
shall show a knowledge of them all. The Presbj- 
tery is to examine as to his knowledge ; but how 
much knowledge of this or that will be necessary 
to satisfy Presbytery of his qualifications the Pres- 
bytery must decide. The third specification is the 
sacraments and the government and discipline. 
These items are thrown off to themselves, that they 
may the more certainly receive distinct attention 
before Presbytery. 

The third group of trials is the sermon ; and this 
the Presbytery is not at liberty to omit. For he is 
being tested as to his qualifications to preach. 

The ordination must be in the presence of the 
church (paragraph 120) that he is to be pastor of, 
and therefore ought, if practicable, to be in the 
church building in which this church is accustomed 
to worship. 

119. — IV. The day appointed for the ordination having 
come, and the Presbytery being convened, a member of the 
Presbytery, previously appointed to that duty, shall preach a 
sermon adapted to the occasion. The same, or another mem- 
ber appointed to preside, shall afterwards briefly recite from 
the pulpit the proceedings of the Presbytery preparatory to the 
ordination ; he shall point out the nature and importance of 
the ordinance, and endeavor to impress the audience with a 
proper sense of the solemnity of the transaction. 

Then addressing himself to the candidate, he shall propose 
to him the following questions, viz.: 

1. Do you believe the Scriptures of the Old and ISTew Tes- 
taments to be the Word of God, the only infallible rule of faith 
and practice ? 

2. Do you sincerely receive and adopt the Confession of 
Faith and the Catechisms of this Church as containing the sys- 
tem of doctrine taught in the Holy Scriptures ? 

3. Do you approve of the government and discipline of the 
Presbyterian Church in the United States? 

4. Do you promise subjection to your brethren in the Lord ? 

5. Have you been induced, as far as you know your own 
10 



146 Chap. YL, Sec. v., Par. 4. 119 

heart, to seek the office of the holy ministry from love of God 
and a sincere desire to promote his glory in the gospel of his 
Son? 

The purport of the first three questions was set 
forth under paragraph 112, but questions 4, 5, and 
7 are additional to the questions asked of Euling 
Elders and Deacons at their ordination. What the 
Minister here explicitly professes and promises is 
all implied in the obligations assumed by those 
lower officers; but the superior dignity and im- 
portance of the Ministerial office is indicated in 
making these elements of the obligation explicit. 
Subjection to one's brethren is, of course, qualified 
by such teachings as are contained in Section I. of 
Chapter II., and by the particular provisions of the 
Book of Church Order ; but within these limits the 
obligation of obedience to ecclesiastical authority 
is assumed, and should be humbly and strictly 
kept. And so many are the temptations to enter 
the Ministry from unworthy motives, so impossible 
is it to do the work of this ofiice efficiently except 
from love to God, and so great is the guilt of pros- 
tituting this office to the service of lower motives, 
that each one is put upon searching his own con- 
science to see and to declare this pure motive his 
real motive. 

6. Do you promise to be zealous and faithful in maintain- 
ing the truths of the gospel and the purity and peace of the 
Church, whatever persecution or opposition may arise to you 
on that account ? 

This is substantially the same as question 5 in 
paragraph 112, put to Ruling Elders and Deacons; 
but lays more emphasis upon fidelity in the face 
of opposition and persecution; and for this there 
is the fact that a Minister may lose his means of 



120 Chap. YI., Sec. V., Pars. 4, 5. 147 

living and professional standing by such fidelity, if 

lie thereby encounters opposition from the worldly 

and ignorant in the Church. Perhaps this part of 

the Ministerial vow is more often violated than any 

other, on this very account. 

7. Do you engage to be faithful and diligent in the exercise 
of all your duties as a Christian and a Minister of the gospel, 
whether personal or relative, private or public ; and to endeavor 
by the grace of God to adorn the profession of the gospel in 
your conversation, and to walk with exemplary piety before 
the flock of which God shall make you overseer? 

See comments under question 5. Emphasis is 
thus put upon the preeminent importance of the 
Minister's life as distinguished from his teaching. 

8 Are you now willing to take the charge of this church, 
agreeably to your declaration at accepting their call? And do 
you, relying upon God for strength, promise to discharge to it 
the duties of a Pastor ? 

This is parallel with question 4 in paragraph 112. 
If the candidate should fail to answer any of 
these questions in the affirmative, that failure 
would arrest the ordination service. 

130. — V. The candidate having answered these questions 
in the affirmative, the presiding Minister shall propose to the 
church the following questions: 

It appears that only a Minister may preside on 
such an occasion. 

1. Do you, the people of this congregation, continue to 
profess your readiness to receive . . . whom you have called 
to be your Pastor ? 

These four questions replace the one question 
asked the church, paragraph 112, at the installa- 
tion of Ruling Elders and Deacons, and, by laying 
more emphasis upon these obligations to a Minister 
than upon the like obligations to them, again indi- 



148 Chap. VI., Sec. Y., Par. 5. 120 

cate the greater dignity and importance of the order 
of Ministers. 

It is conceivable that the church may change its 
mind between the election and the installation ; and 
if so, here would be the place, if it has not been 
done already, to show this change of mind by 
refusing to answer affirmatively. And should there 
be such a refusal by the members generally, or by 
so large a number as to indicate such a change of 
mind, the Presbytery should not proceed with the 
installation. 

2. Do you promise to receive the word of truth from his 
mouth with meekness and love, and to submit to him in the 
due exercise of discipline? 

This is a specific promise not to do what members 
of the church are so liable to do, receive the 
preaching with adverse criticism, and resist or 
disapprove discipline. 

3. Do you promise to encourage him in his labors, and to 
assist his endeavors for your instruction and spiritual edifica- 
tion? 

Here is emphasized a thing so commonly neglected 
by the members of the church, and yet so much 
needed by the Pastor, an obligation the more 
sacred because indefinable. 

4. And do you engage to continue to him while he is your 
Pastor that competent worldly maintenance which you have 
promised, and to furnish him with whatever you may see 
needful for the honor of religion and for his comfort among you ? 

It being assumed that the church in its call has 
promised a competent worldly maintenance, it here 
repeats that promise, especially promising not to 
discontinue or diminish the same on account of 
any disaffection arising, until discharged from this 
obligation by the dissolution of the pastoral rela- 



121 • Chap. YI., Sec. V., Pars. 5, 6. 149 

tion ; and to this is added a promise that to this 
minimum shall be added whatever, if anything, is 
needful to the honor of religion or the comfort of 
the Pastor. 

A beautiful undertaking ! But who is bound to 
do this?' Each individual to the extent of his par- 
ticular promise already made? Yes and No. The 
individual i^ bound in just the sense and to just 
the extent in which every member of a body is 
bound for its obligations; his obligation is not 
limited or measured by the pro rata which he may 
have undertaken to pay, except so far as the terms 
or conditions of that promise may define his rela- 
tions to his fellow members ; for his obligation is 
not, immediately to the Pastor, but to the church. 
It is the church that is under obligation to the 
Pastor; and its whole ability in property and in 
its resources of contributions from its members is 
under pledge. 

This being true, a church ought not to enter 
into an obligation beyond its reasonable ability to 
meet, nor ought a Presbytery to permit it. But 
since a church ought not to promise anything less 
than a competent support, a church not really able 
to give such a support ought not to continue as a 
distinct church. By sharing the support of a Pas- 
tor with one or more neighboring churches, or by 
receiving a fixed aid from Presbytery or other 
source, a church not able alone to have a Pastor 
may yet have a Pastor agreeably to these princi- 
ples. 

121. — VI. The people having answered these questions in 
the affirmative, by holding up their right hands, the candidate 
shall kneel, and the presiding Minister shall, with prayer and 



150 Chap. VI., Sec. Y., Par. 6. ISl 

the laying on of the hands of the Presbytery, according to the 
apostolic example, solemnly set him apart to the holy office of 
the gospel ministry. Prayer being ended, he shall rise from 
his knees; and the Minister who presides shall first, and after- 
wards all the members of Presbytery in their order, tal<e 
him by the right hand, saying, in words to this effect: "We 
give you the right hand of fellowship, to take part in this min- 
istry with us." The Moderator shall then say: "I now pro- 
nounce and declare that A. B. has been regularly elected, or- 
dained, and installed Pastor of this congregation, agreeably to 
the word of God, and according to the Constitution of the 
Presbyterian Church in the United States; and that as such he 
is entitled to all support, encouragement, honor, and obedience 
in the Lord. In the name of the Father, and of the Son, and 
of the Holy Ghost. Amen." After which the Minister' pre- 
siding, or some other appointed for the purpose, shall give a 
solemn charge to the Pastor and to the congregation to perse- 
vere in the discharge of their reciprocal duties; and then by 
prayer recommend them both to the grace of God and his holy 
keeping; and finally, after singing a psalm or hymn, shall dis- 
miss the congregation with the usual blessing. And the Pres- 
bytery shall duly record the transaction. 

It is to be noted that the Minister presiding is 
to do everything but preach the sermon and de- 
liver the charge, and he may also deliver the ser- 
mon or the charge, or both ; that the charge to the 
Pastor and to the people is to be delivered by one 
Minister, there being prescribed here only one 
charge by one Minister, and not two charges by 
two Ministers ; and that a Ruling Elder cannot be 
an appointee for any of these functions. As there 
is nowhere any rule for determining an order of 
precedence between the members of Presbytery, 
the phrase "members of the Presbytery in their 
order" must mean simply one after another. Rul- 
ing Elders, members of the Presbytery, lay their 
hands on the head of the candidate, and extend to 
him the right hand of fellowship, as well as the 
Ministers. It is proper for them also to use the 



125 Chap. VI., Sec. V., Pars. 7, 8, 9, 10. 151 

words "to take part in this ministry with us," al- 
thougli these words can mean, in their mouth, only 
the ministry of ruHng. (Cf. also par. 112 and com- 
ments.) 

122.— VII. After the installation, the heads of families of 
the congregation then present, or at least the Ruling Elders 
and Deacons, should come forward to their Pastor, and give 
him their right hand, in token of cordial reception and affec- 
tionate regard. 

Others are not forbidden to do the same ; nor is 
it wrong to extend like welcome to a Ruling Elder 
or Deacon. 

123. — VIII. In the ordination of Probationers as Evangel- 
ists, the eighth of the preceding questions shall be omitted, 
and the following substituted for it, namely : 

Do you now undertake the work of an Evangelist, and do 
you promise, in reliance on God for strength, to be faithful in 
the discharge of all the duties incumbent on you as a Minister 
of the gospel of the Lord Jesus Christ? 

While it would be according to the principles of 
the Form of Government to substitute a similar 
question in ordination to the office of Teacher or 
other sort of labor as Minister, no express pro- 
vision is made for such cases. (Cf. remarks at be- 
ginning of Sec. III.) 

124. — IX. No Presbytery shall ordain any Probationer to 
the office of the gospel ministry, with reference to his laboring 
within the bounds of another Presbytery, but shall furnish him 
with the necessary testimonials, and require him to repair to the 
Presbytery within whose bounds he expects to labor, that he 
may submit himself to its authority, according to the Consti- 
tution of the Church. 

This accords with paragraphs 101 and 62. 

125. — X. In the installation of an ordained Minister, the 
following questions are to be substituted for those addressed 
to a candidate for ordination, namely : 

1. Are you now willing to take charge of this congregation 



152 Chap. YI., Sec. V., Paes. 10, 11. 126 

as their Pastor, agreeably to your declaration at accepting its 
call? 

This is identical with the first part of question 8 
in paragraph 119. 

2. Do you conscientiously believe and declare, as far as 
you know your own heart, that, in taking upon you this charge, 
you are influenced by a sincere desire to promote the glory of 
God and the good of the Church ? 

This is a particular application of the principle of 
question 5 in 119. 

3. Do you solemnly promise that, by the assistance of the 
grace of God, you will endeavor faithfully to discharge all the 
duties of a Pastor to this congregation, and will be careful to 
maintain a deportment in all respects becoming a Minister of 
the gospel of Christ, agreeably to your ordination engagements? 

This is substantially the same as question 7 in 
119, with a reiteration of all the ordinary obliga- 
tions. 

126 — XI. A congregation desiring to call a Pastor from his 
charge, shall, by its commissioners, 

109, 

represent to the Presbytery the ground on which it pleads his 
removal. The Presbytery having heard all the parties, 

The Pastor himself, as well as his church and the 
church calling, is one of the parties; but he is not 
obliged to indicate his opinion. 

may, upon viewing the whole case, either recommend them to 
desist from prosecuting the call, 

This recommendation the calling church is not 
obliged to follow, 

or may order it to be delivered to the Minister to whom it is 
addressed, with or without advice ; 

The Presbytery may be unwilling to prevent his 



126 Chap. VI., Sec. V., Par. 11. 153 

translation witliont his consent, and yet may feel 

constrained to advise him to decline the call ; or 

the Presbytery may be so strongly persuaded that 

his translation is desirable for the general good as 

to advise him to accept, although it is without 

authority to command. 

or may decline to place the call in his hands, 

however much any or all the parties may desire 

the translation, 

as it shall appear most for the peace and edification of the 
Church at large ; or it may refer the whole matter to the Synod 
for advice and direction ; 

As a lower court may refer any question according 

to 247-254, 

and no Pastor shall be translated without his consent, 

Although he may, without his consent, be removed, 

that is, have his pastoral relation dissolved. 

If the parties . are not ready to have the matter issued at the 
meeting then in progress, a written citation shall be given the 
Minister and his church to appear before the Presbytery at its 
next meeting, which citation shall be read from the pulpit 

of his church 

on the Sabbath after sermon, at least two Sabbaths before the 
intended meeting. 

The meaning is not that the citation shall be read 
at least twice, but that it shall be read once as 
much as two Sabbaths before. This gives the 
church ample time in which to meet as a congre- 
gation and send its answer, by commissioners or 
otherwise. The next meeting of Presbytery may 
be its next regular meeting or an adjourned meet- 
ing. The principle is, that the Presbytery must 
not, unless in such extraordinary cases as are 



154 Chap. YI., Sec. Y., Paes. 12, 13. 128 

meant in the latter part of 77 : 6, dissolve a pastoral 
relation without giving both the Pastor and the 
church opportunity to show why it should not be 
dissolved. 

127. — XII. If the congregation, or other field of labor, to 
which a Minister or Probationer is called, be under the juris- 
diction of a different Presbytery, 

from that of the Minister or Probationer, 

on his acceptance of a call he shall be furnished with the pro- 
per testimonials, and required to repair immediately to that 
Presbytery, in order that he may be regularly inducted into his 
oflRce according to the preceding directions. 

This would not require the dismissal of one who 
had come under charges, nor would it forbid- the 
dismissal of one in whose hands a call had been 
placed and not yet accepted or declined. 

It may be remarked here that a church that has 
called a Pastor may withdraw that call at any time 
before his acceptance, and even at any time after 
his acceptance and before his installation is con- 
summated ; but, of course, if done between his ac- 
ceptance and installation, the withdrawal could be 
morally justified only upon the discovery of impor- 
tant facts forbidding the institution of the proposed 
relation. 

128. — XIII. When any Minister shall tender the resignation 
of his pastoral charge to his Presbytery, the Presbytery shall 
cite the church, as in the preceding directions, to appear by its 
commissioners at the next meeting, to show cause, if any it 
has, why the Presbytery should not accept the resignetion. If 
the church fail to appear, or if its reasons for retaining its 
Pastor be deemed insufficient, his resignation shall be accepted, 
and the pastoral relation be dissolved. If any church desires 
to be relieved of its Pastor, a similar process shall be observed. 
But whether the Minister or the church initiate proceedings 
for a dissolution of the relation, there shall always be a meet- 



128 Chap. YI., Sec. V., Par. 13. 155 

ing of the church, called and conducted precisely in the same 
manner as when the call of a Pastor is to be made out. 

A Pastor resigns to the Presbytery, and not to 
the church ; and the church applies to the Presby- 
tery for a dissohition, and does not ask the Pastor 
to resign. It is the Presbytery that establishes and 
dissolves the pastoral relation, and not the Minis- 
ter and the church. These two parties have no 
negotiations with each other directly concerning 
the pastoral relation, but only through the Pres- 
bytery. 

At the same time, according to the principle 
indicated in paragraph 126, that the church may 
have already had a meeting and prepared its an- 
swer to Presbytery, in case some other church 
has made out a call that, aims at the removal of 
the Pastor, the church may likewise, if its 
Pastor gives notice of his intention of tendering 
his resignation to the Presbytery, hold a congrega- 
tional meeting and appoint its commissioners to 
answer in the matter to Presbytery, before that 
meeting of Presbytery at which the Pastor's resig- 
nation is to be presented ; and the issue may then 
be determined. 

The church, when cited by Presbytery, must 
be convened in congregational meeting, but it may 
decide to make no opposition, and in that case 
may decide not to send any answer to the Presby- 
tery. And this requirement of a congregational 
meeting does not forbid the Presbytery to dissolve 
the pastoral relation on its own motion, without 
consulting either Pastor or church, "where the in- 
terests of religion imperatively demand it." (See 
77:6.) 



156 Chap. VI., Sec. VI., Par. 1. 129 

How a churcli can initiate proceedings is ex- 
plained in remarks under paragraph 113. 

Section VI. — Of the Licensure of Probationers for tlie Gospel 
Ministry. 

The section contains two preliminary paragraphs, 
one defining the object of licensure and one pre- 
scribing what Presbytery, and upon what condi- 
tions, shall take np the question of licensing a 
candidate; four on evidences of fitness for licen- 
sure, of which the first prescribes three preliminary 
tests, the next outlines the body of the trials, the 
third states the end and limit of these examina- 
tions, and the last permits licensure in extraordi- 
nary cases; two on the act of licensure, one pre- 
scribing the obligations to be demanded of the 
licentiate, and one the form of licensure; two on 
transfer of candidates in process of examination 
for licensure, and of unordained licentiates; and 
two concerning the duties of the licensed proba- 
tioner, and the withdrawal of license. 

129. — I. Presbyteries shall license Probationers to preach 
the gospel, in order that, after sufficiently trying their gifts, 
and receiving from the Church a goo(t report, they may, in due 
time, ordain them to the sacred office. 

Licensure is a tentative ordination ; for the essence 
of ordination does not lie in the ceremony of the 
imposition of hands, but in the decision of the or- 
daining court to recognize a man as appointed by 
Christ to an office. And licensure is a tentative 
recognition. But it is tentative. The candidate is 
licensed as a Probationer. Especially is it neces- 
sary to bring into use the test of the call of the 
Spirit through the people of God; and the special 



131 Chap. VI., Sec. VI., Paes. 2, 3. 157 

object of licensure is in order to the application of 
this test. 

130. — II. The trials of a candidate for licensure shall ordi- 
narily be had by the Presbytery having jurisdiction of the 
church of which he is a member; but should any one find it 
more convenient to put himself under the care of a Presbytery 
at a distance from that to which he most naturally belongs, he 
may be received by the said Presbytery on his producing testi- 
monials, either from the Presbytery in the bounds of which he 
has usually resided, or from any two Ministers of that Presby- 
tery in good standing, of his exemplary piety and other requi- 
site qualifications. 

It is a striking fact that, in this provision for 
applying for licensure outside the Presbytery to 
which the applicant's church belongs, no mention 
is made of the Session ; nor does the Constitution 
anywhere give the Session any function in connec- 
tion with the induction of men into the ministerial 
office. 

131. — III. Candidates applying to the Presbytery to be li- 
censed to preach the gospel shall produce satisfactory testimo- 
nials of their good moral character, and of their being commu- 
nicating members of the Church in regular standing. And the 
Presbytery shall examine them respecting their experimental 
acquaintance with religion, and the motives which influence 
them to desire the sacred ofRce. This examination shall be 
close and particular, and shall ordinarily be conducted in the 
presence of the Presbytery only. And it is recommended that 
the candidate be also required to produce a diploma of Bache- 
lor or Master of Arts from some college or university, or at 
least authentic testimonials of his having gone through a regu- 
lar course of learning. 

Here are three preliminary requirements, the 
first two of which are imperative. The first is evi- 
dence, apart from the applicant's word, that he has 
a good moral character and is a communicating 
member of the Church. It is striking that neither 
of these facts is regarded as involving the other. 



168 Chap. YI., Sec. YI., Par. 3. 131 

The decision of Presbytery that the evidence sub- 
mitted on these points is satisfactory constitutes 
the applicant a candidate under the care of the 
Presbytery. 

The next requirement is independent of testi- 
mony concerning the candidate : it is a personal 
examination of the candidate on his experimental 
acquaintance with religion, in general, and on his 
motives for seeking the office of the ministry, in 
particular. Three things are contained here con- 
cerning this examination. The first is that it shall 
be an examination of the candidate. The Presby- 
tery may examine through a committee and by 
writing ; but the Presbytery must examine the can- 
didate himself, and examine to form a judgment of 
its own concerning his religious experience and 
inner mind ; not, indeed, simply to determine 
whether he gives credible evidence of regenera- 
tion, but of spiritual fitness for the ministry. And 
it lies in the nature of the case that the Presbytery 
need not conclude this part of the examination on 
the first occasion, but may take it up again and 
again until licensure is granted. In the second 
place, this examination is to be close and particu- 
lar. However much individual members of the 
Presbytery may be persuaded of the candidate's 
piety, or even of his fitness for the ministry, the 
principle is, that the court will be led to perceive 
and attest this fitness, upon a thorough examina- 
tion conducted in the humility and wisdom of the 
Spirit, if it exists ; or, if it does not exist, to dis- 
cern and declare the lack of it. In the third place, 
that the examination may be such as this principle 
requires, the examination is ordinarily to be con- 



132 Chap. VI., Sec. VI., Par. 4. 159 

ducted in the presence of the Presbytery only, that 
there may be no embarrassment to the candidate 
in answering, nor restraint to the members of Pres- 
bytery in asking, such questions as are proper to a 
thorough examination. 

The third requirement Presbyteries are not en- 
joined to make. Presbytery may not license any 
one without satisfying itself that he has ''learning" 
(paragraph 133) ; but Presbytery may proceed by 
examination to ascertain whether he has the learn- 
ing without requiring external proof that he has 
had the opportunity to acquire the learning. It is 
recommended, however, that this precaution be not 
omitted; for no one has learning naturally, how- 
ever able he may be, and it is useless to examine a 
man to determine whether he has learning, if he 
has not gone through the only sort of course that 
leads to learning. The Constitution means to re- 
quire learning in all cases. 

It is remarkable that Ruling Elders and Deacons 
are presumed by the Constitution to receive their 
call from the people (and the court) first, and the 
inward call afterward ; but Ministers are presumed 
to receive the inward call first, and that of the court 
and of the people afterward. 

132. — IV. The Presbytery shall try each candidate as to his 
knowledge of the Latin language and the original languages of 
the Holy Scriptures. 

This knowledge of the languages is set first and. 
to itself, as lying at the basis of learning in general 
(that is, of the sort of learning required, which is 
rather that of the classical than of the scientific 
course), and of biblical learning in particular. 

It shall also examine him on mental philosophy, logic, and 
rhetoric : 



160 Chap. VI., Sec. YI., Pae. 4. 132 

Teachers need to understand psychology, since 
they are to work upon mind ; logic, that they may 
be able to interpret, expound, and maintain their 
doctrines ; and rhetoric, that they may be able ef- 
fectively to present their teachings, 
on ethics ; 

This must be understood here to include meta- 
physics ; and the singular importance of this 
branch of study as underlying theology is not to 
be overlooked. 

on the natural and exact sciences ; 

While the mental and ethical sciences are more 
important for the minister, the training of the 
mathematical and physical sciences may not be 
dispensed with in a regular course of learning; 
and not only is this element of training needful for 
the minister, but the knowledge of the physical 
sciences is now of practical importance. 

on theology, natural and revealed; 

This means not only a systematic arrangement of 
the doctrines of Scripture, but also a comprehen- 
sive philosophy of the system of doctrines taught 
in the Scriptures and otherwise known concerning 
God and man's relations to him. 
and 

not only is it indispensable that the candidate 
stand a satisfactory examination on theology in 
general, but, for practical reasons, especially 

on ecclesiastical history, the sacraments, and church govern- 
ment. 

It is noteworthy that the Presbytery is never at 



132 Chap. VI., Sec. VI., Par. 4. 161 

liberty to omit trying each candidate on these sub- 
jects. How much he shall know on these subjects 
is left to the Presbytery's discretion under the 
guidance of paragraph 133 ; but it is not left to the 
Presbytery's discretion whether to ascertain, hy ex- 
amination, some just measure of his knowledge and 
discipline in each of these subjects; nor may the 
Presbytery omit any of the exercises following. 

Moreover, the Presbytery shall require of him— 

1. A discussion in Latin of a thesis on some common head 
in divinity. 

This will test his knowledge of the Latin language, 
of theology, and of logic and rhetoric. 

2. An exegesis or critical exercise^ in which the candidate 
shall give a specimen of his taste and Judgment in sacred criti- 
cism ; presenting an explication of the original text, stating its 
connection, illustrating its force and beauties, removing its 
difficulties, and solving anj^ important questions which it may 
present. 

This will test his acquaintance with one, if not 
with both, of the original languages of the Scrip- 
tures, with almost the whole list of branches of 
learning, and especially with the Bible itself in the 
original. 

3. A lecture or exposition of several verses of Scripture. 

Besides serving largely the same purposes as the 
critical exercise, this will especially test his ac- 
quaintance with the English Bible and his ability 
as an expositor. 

4. A sermon. 

Lying back of the sermon there needs to be a grasp 
of theological truth in system, and the power 
to set it forth, as is to be shown in the thesis ; a 
11 



162 Chap. YI., Sec. YI., Pars. 5, 6, 133, 134 

command of the instruments of critical exegesis, as 
is to be shown in the critical exercise ; and the 
power of expounding the Scriptures in accord with 
the principles of sound theology and criticism, but 
so as to instruct and help popular assemblies, as is 
to be shown in the lecture; but the sermon itself is 
the preacher's great work, by which he works the 
truth of Scripture into the lives of men. Men 
may be profound theologians, correct exegetes and 
clear expositors, and still fail as preachers ; and 
such men should not be licensed to preach. 

133. — Y. These and other similar exercises 
Not these or other, etc. 

at the discretion of the Presbytery, shall be exhibited until it 
shall have obtained satisfaction as to the candidate's piety, 
learning and aptness to teach in the Church. 

The discretion of Presbytery extends to the " other 
similar exercises," and to the extent of the exer- 
cises and their repetition ; but the process of test- 
ing must continue until the Presbytery satisfies its 
mind whether the candidate has piety, learning 
and aptness to teach in the Church, that is, such 
piety and learning and aptness as the Minister 
should have. 

134. — VI. No candidate, except in extraordinary cases, shall 
be licensed unless he shall have completed the usual course of 
academical studies, and shall also have studied divinity at 
least two years under some approved teacher of theology : and 
whenever any Presbytery shall see reason to depart from this 
rule, it shall always make a record of the fact upon its minutes, 
with the reasons therefor. 

The exception is not an exception from attainments, 
but from the ordinary conditions of getting the 
attainments. Ordinarily, one cannot have the re- 



134 Chap. VI., Sec. YI., Par. 6. 163 

quisite learning, secular and sacred, without com- 
pleting the usual course of academical studies and 
studying divinity two years or more under an ap- 
proved guide ; but there are extraordinary cases of 
men that, without having followed the usual aca- 
demical and theological courses, have, in unusual 
ways, acquired the required knowledge and disci- 
pline (namely, the three languages; mental philo- 
sophy, logic and rhetoric; ethics; natural and ex- 
act sciences; theology; and ecclesiastical history, 
the sacraments and church government), and such 
extraordinary cases maybe constitutionally licensed. 
But the facts and reasons must always be recorded. 
But may no candidate be licensed who is deficient 
in one or more branches of the prescribed learn- 
ing ? Not according to the Constitution, except on 
this ground : It belongs to Christ himself through 
his Holy Spirit to appoint men to office in his 
Church (pars. 8-11 and 96), and the regulations 
prescribed in paragraph 132 are prudential in their 
nature, precautions against the admission of un- 
qualified men to the ministry rather than an enum- 
eration of the qualifications that Christ has re- 
vealed specifically; and, consequently, whenever a 
Presbytery perceives that Christ has qualified a 
man for the office of the ministry who is ignorant 
of one or more of these particular branches of 
learning, the Presbytery ought not to refuse to re- 
cognize the manifest will of the King, and issue the 
license. Of course, such an extraordinary case 
should be recorded, the principle that excepts some 
from the requirements of prescribed courses of 
study excepting some also from prescribed branches 
of study, which principle is, that no man is to be 



164 Chap. YI., Sec, VI., Paes. 1, 8. 135, 136 

excluded whom Christ has duly qualified, and no 
man admitted whom Christ has not qualified, 
whether he has or has not complied with the pru- 
dential requirements for getting these qualifications. 
Cf. also par. 118 and remarks thereon. 

135. — VII. If the Presbytery be satisfied with his trials, it 
shall then proceed to license him in the following manner : the 
Moderator shall propose to him the following questions, viz. : 

1. Do you believe the Scriptures of the Old and New Testa- 
ments to be the Word of God, the only infallible rule of faith 
and practice ? 

2. Do you sincerely receive and adopt the Confession of 
Faith and the Catechisms of this Church as containing the 
system of doctrine taught in the Holy Scriptures ? 

3. Do you promise to study the peace, unity and purity of 
the Church? 

These questions are identical with questions 1 
and 2, and (nearly) question 5, put to Kuling 
Elders and Deacons, and contain the fundamental 
obligations of all admitted to office. (Cf. 112 and 
119.) The word edification, inserted in question 5 
named above, is omitted here, it being yet unde- 
termined whether the licentiate shall be able to 
edify the Church. (Cf. pars. 139 and 140.) 

4. Do you promise to submit yourself, in the Lord, to the 
government of this Presbytery, or any other in the bounds of 
which you may be called? 

This is substantially the same as the fourth ques- 
tion in the ordination of Ministers; but that is 
made more comprehensive, as the Minister comes 
into more complex relations with his brother 
Elders (through his membership in the courts), and 
the candidate is simply in subjection to the Pres- 
bytery alone without being a member of it. 

136. — VIII. The candidate having answered these ques- 
tions in the affirmative, and the Moderator having offered up a 



137 Chap. YI., Sec. VI., Pars. 8, 9. 165 

prayer suitable to the occasion, he shall address the candidate 
to the following purpose: "In the name of the Lord Jesus 
Christ, and by that authority which he has given to Lhe Church 
for its edification, we do license you to preach the gospel as a 
probationer for the holy ministry wherever God in his provi- 
dence may call you; and for this purpose may the blessing of 
God rest upon you, and the Spirit of Christ fill your heart. 
Amen." And record shall be made of the licensure in the fol- 
lowing or like form, viz. : 

At , the . . . day of , the 

Presbytery of , having received testimonials 

in favor of , of his having gone 

through a regular course of literature, of his good moral char- 
acter, and of his being in the communion of the Church, pro- 
ceeded to take the usual parts of trial for his Mcensure. And 
he having given satisfaction as to his accomplishments in liter- 
ature, as to his experimental acquaintance w4th religion, and 
as to his proficiency in divinity and other studies, the Presby- 
tery did, and hereby does, express its approbation of all these 
parts of trial. And he having adopted the Confession of Faith 
and the Catechisms of this Church, and satisfactorily answered 
the questions appointed to be put to candidates to be licensed, 
the Presbytery did, and hereby does, license him, the said 

, to preach the gospel of Christ, as a 

Probationer for the holy ministry, within the bounds of this 
Presbytery, or wherever else he shall be orderly called. 

This form represents that the Presbytery proceeded 
to take the usual parts of trial and passed the 
formal act of licensure on the same date ; and for 
this reason it will be necessary, in many cases, to 
change it. This might be done by omitting the 
date at the beginning, and inserting it before the 
word "license." 

137. — IX. When any candidate for licensure shall have occa- 
sion, while his trials are 'going on, to remove from the bounds 
of his own Presbytery into the bounds of another, it shall be 
considered regular for the latter Presbytery, on his producing 
proper testimonials from the former, to take up his trials at 
the point at which they were left, and conduct them to a con- 
clusion in the same manner as if they had been commenced by 
itself. 



166 Chap. YI., Sec. YI., Paks. 10, 11, 12. 138-'40 

But the latter Presbytery may, if it thinks best, 
repeat any or all of his former trials. 

138. — X. In like manner, when any Probationer, after 
licensure, shall by the permission of his Presbytery remove 
beyond its limits, an extract of the record of his licensure, and 
a Presbyterial recommendation, signed by the Clerk, shall be 
his testimonials to the Presbytery under whose care he shall 
come. 

The refusal of this Presbytery to receive him would 
leave him, as would the refusal to receive an un- 
licensed candidate, iii statu quo under his former 
Presbytery. It is noticeable that he is not sup- 
posed to remove without his Presbytery's permis- 
sion. 

139. — XL Presbyteries should require Probationers to 
devote themselves diligently to the trial of their gifts ; and no 
one should be ordained to the work of the gospel mioistry until 
he has given evidence of his ability to edify the Church. 

It is extremely important that the probationary 
character of the licentiate's status should not be 
forgotten, either by himself or the Presbytery. 

140. — XII. When a Probationer shall have been preaching 
for a long time, and his services do not appear to be edifying to 
the Church, the Presbytery may, if it thinks proper, recall his 
license ; and it shall be its duty to do so whenever the Proba- 
tioner shall without necessity devote himself to such pursuits 
as interfere with a full trial of his gifts, according to his 
license. 

The dignity of a licensed Probationer should be 
kept inseparable from the obligation and aim of 
this tentative status. 



141 Chap. VII., Par. 1. 167 

CHAPTEK VII. 

Of the Constitution of the Presbyterian Church. 

Of the three paragraphs the first defines the 
Constitution ; the second shows how one part of 
the Constitution may be amended ; and the third, 
how the other part may be amended. 

141. — I. The Constitution of the Presbyterian Church in 
the United Slates consists of its doctrinal symbols, embraced 
in the Confession of Faith, and the Larger and Shorter Cate- 
chisms, together with the Book of Church Order, which com- 
prises the Form of Government, the Rules of Discipline, and 
the Directory for Worship. 

No other deliverances of church courts or of indi- 
viduals form any part of the Constitution. Nor is 
the Bible any part of the Constitution. As a dis- 
tinct organization, organizationally distinct from 
other church organizations, the parts of this Church 
stand together in this Constitution, accepted as 
binding law and covenant by all the constituent 
parts of this Church; and the Bible is to this 
Church what this Constitution defines it to be. 
The fact that this Constitution subordinates itself 
to the Bible in every sense does not make the 
Bible technically the Constitution of the denomi- 
nation. No one is compelled to become a consti- 
tuent of this society, and no one ought to assume 
to do so, or to continue to do so, who is not willing 
to stand together with the others in this Constitu- 
tion. But such acceptance does not mean the 
holding of this Constitution as infallible, or as in 
any sense equal in authority with the Bible, or as 
not needing improvement. 



168 Chap. VII., Par. 2. 142 

142.— II. The Book of Church Order may be araended on 
the recommendation of one General Assembly, when a ma- 
jority of the Presbyteiies advise and consent thereunto, and a 
succeeding General Assembly shall enact the same. 

The last clause is not a part of the *'when" clause, 
as shown by the change of tense, but is co-ordinate 
with the first principal clause. The first statement, 
then, is that the Book may be amended when the 
requisite number of Presbyteries advise and con- 
sent to a recommendation of amendment by a 
General Assembly. But the amendment is not yet 
enacted, it is not yet in the Constitution ; only the 
amendment has been recommended to be made, 
and the required advice and consent that it be 
made have been given. It remains for a succeed- 
ing General Assembly to make it. But does the 
word "shall" take away discretion from a subse- 
quent Assembly? Certainly not; for it does not 
command some particular Assembly to enact the 
amendment, and, therefore, commands no Assem- 
bly to enact it. The whole paragraph means that, 
before any amendment becomes in force, it shall be 
enacted by a General Assembly after a majority of 
the Presbyteries have advised and consented that 
the amendment be made, and have given this advice 
and consent, not in response to the motion of one 
or more individuals or other courts, but in response 
to a recommendation of a General Assembly. The 
Presbyteries must not only consent, but advise. 
The enacting Assembly may be any Assembly regu- 
larly convening after a majority of the Presbyteries 
existing at the time of the enactment have given 
their advice and consent. The amendment en- 
acted must be precisely that which was recom- 
mended and was advised and consented to. 



142 (a) Chap. VII. , Par. 3. 169 

142 (^). — III. Amendments to the Confession of Faith and 
the Catechisms of this Chm'ch may be made only upon the re- 
commendation of one General Assembly, the concurrence of at 
least three-fourths of the Presbyteries, and the enactment of 
the same by a subsequent Assembly. 

The only real difference from the preceding para- 
graph is that three-fourths of the Presbyteries 
must concur instead of a majority. In acting on 
these amendments, too, Presbyteries should vote 
to concur or not to concur, but, in acting on those, 
to advise and consent or not to advise and consent. 

The provision contained in the preceding paragraph for the 
amendment of the Book of Church Order shall not apply to 
this paragraph; but this paragraph shall be amended or altered 
only in the way in which itself provides for the amendment of 
the Confession of Faith and Catechisms of the Church. 

Without some such sentence as this the whole para- 
graph would fail of its end, since it might be wiped 
out by a majority of the Presbyteries. 

These provisions for amending the Constitution 
settle two things beyond question: this Book of 
Church Order cannot mean to impose any obliga- 
tion upon any person inconsistent with his keeping 
an open mind for improvement of the doctrinal 
standards and of the Book of Church Order by 
changes of omission, addition or modification ; and 
nothing said by any Minister or Ruling Elder of 
the Church in any court in relation to any propo- 
sition to amend the Constitution ought ever to be 
pleaded against him in charging him with an 
offence. This unwritten immunity takes away ex- 
cuse for willingly agitating the Church generally in 
opposition to its Constitution before one endeavors 
in this constitutional way to have the Constitution 
amended. 



The Rules of Disciplii^e. 



Discipline is such an important function of 
church courts that a special treatment of it and 
specific regulations of it are deemed necessary in 
the Constitution of this Church. 

After a chapter of preliminary definitions, and 
a chapter concerning the discipline of non-commu- 
nicating members, these Eules contain, first, three 
chapters on the Principles underlying Judicial 
Procedure : one treating of Offences ; one of the 
Censures that may be used upon Offenders ; and 
one on the Parties in cases of Process. In the 
second place, there follow Regulations concerning 
Process. In four chapters are Eegulations gov- 
erning the Conduct of Process: one containing 
General Provisions; two containing Special Pro- 
visions pertaining to Process before Sessions, and 
to Process before Presbyteries; and one on Evi- 
dence. Then are two chapters on Administration 
of Censures ; one on their Infliction, and one on 
their Removal. And there is appended a chapter 
on Cases without Process. Following these two 
parts, the one on Principles and the other on Pro- 
cess in the courts of Original Jurisdiction, comes 
the third part of the Rules, which defines exactly 
the Jurisdiction of the various courts, and in which 
is much matter that might as well have been put in 
the Form of Government. This part has three 
chapters: one on appellate jurisdiction; one on 

170 



143, 144 Chap. I., Pars. 1, 2. 171 

substitutes for carrying an issue to a higher court ; 
and one on the determination of the jurisdiction to 
which any given person is subject. 



CHAPTEE I. 

Of Discipline — Its Natuee, Subjects, and Ends. 

The first paragraph defines discipline ; the 
second specifies its subjects; and the other two 
treat of the ends of discipline, one especially of 
the ends of the one kind of discipline, and the 
other of the ends of discipline in general. 

143. — I. Discipline is the exercise of that authority and the 
application of that system of laws which the Lord Jesus Christ 
has appointed in his Church. The term has two senses : the 
one referring to the whole government, inspection, training, 
guardianship, and control which the Church maintains over 
its members, its officers, and its courts ; the other a restricted 
and technical sense, signifying judicial prosecution. 

It is noticeable that technical discipline is simply 
a means or form of discipline in the larger sense, 
and that it includes all the parts of judicial prose- 
cution, as well as the infliction and removal of cen- 
sures. 

144. — II. In the one sense, all baptized persons, being 
members of the Church, are subject to its discipline and enti- 
tled to the benefits thereof ; but in the other, it refers only to 
those who have made a profession of their faith in Christ. 

The exception of non-professing members from 
judicial prosecution is justified by the considera- 
tion that the Church, already excluding them from 
the Lord's supper for not accepting and professing 
Christ, has no higher censure to inflict. The sub- 
jection of them to judicial process for other sins 



172 Chap. I., Pars. 3, 4 145, 146 

would only irritate them and exaggerate the liein- 
ousness of other sins as compared with not accept- 
ing Christ. 

145.— III. The ends of discipline, as it involves Judieiai 
prosecution, are the rebuke of offences, the removal of scandal, 
the vindication of the honor of Christ, the promotion of the 
purity and general edification of the Church, and the spiritual 
good of offenders themselves. 

These five ends run into each other. Judicial 
prosecution always aims at the rebuke of offences, 
if offences are found to exist; at the removal 
of the scandal of supposed offences, either by 
ascertaining their non-existence, or by rebuking 
them if they do exist; at the vindication of the 
honor of Christ by his Church's thus clearing 
itself of approving or allowing the offences; and 
at the purity and general edification of the 
Church by separating offenders, and by teaching 
in this particular way. But always it aims, too, 
at the good of offenders themselves, by leading 
them to forsake their sins, so long as there is hope 
of their reformation. But their good is not the 
sole end of discipline, and other ends may demand 
discipline where there is no hope of doing the of- 
fender good. 

146.— IV. The power which Christ has given to the rulers 
of his Church is for edification, and not for destruction ; it is a 
dispensation of mercy, and not of wrath. As in the preaching 
of the Word the wicked are doctrinal ly separated from the 
good, so by discipline, the Church authoritatively separates 
between the holy and the profane. In this it acts the part of 
a tender mother, correcting her children for their good, that 
every one of them may be presented faultless in the day of the 
Lord Jesus. 

This paragraph speaks of discipline in general, 
and not of technical discipline alone. The holy 



146 Chap. L, Par. 4. 173 

are all consecrated persons, whether by reason of 
the consecration of themselves of their own free- 
will, or by reason of their standing in a sacred re- 
lation through their connection with others, as 
children with their parents; and those who have 
once become holy are, by the discipline of the 
church, in both its aspects as defined in paragraph 
143, separated from the profane — that is, from 
those who are not thus holy — unless and until 
such persons, by their own actual rebellion against 
Christ, and by violation of their sacred obligations, 
show that they belong among the profane. The 
baptized child is thus classed as holy, and is so 
treated; and yet, as it grows up and neglects to 
acknowledge Christ, it is not admitted to the most 
sacred intimacy of fellowship at the Lord's table. 
If those persons who have been admitted into the 
number of the holy in the fullest ecclesiastical 
sense show that they really do not belong there, 
discipline puts them in their proper class. All the 
steps toward the admission to full membership, or 
toward exclusion from it, are in the nature of sepa- 
ration between the holy and the profane. The 
Church is not a society of "good" people in con- 
trast with "wicked" people (for its infant members 
are not of either class), but the society of "holy" 
people; and the obscuring or the effacement of 
this distinction is the obscuring or effacement of 
the distinction between the people of God and the 
people of the world, and is fatal, in its tendency, 
to the distinct existence of the Church. The main- 
tenance of the holiness of the Church, which is the 
very essence of its character, is not in order to de- 
stroy her children, but in order to save them ; for 



174 Chap. II., Par. 1. 147 

the purity of the Church as a holy society is in 
order to its efficiency as the instrumental agency 
of salvation. 



CHAPTEE II. 

Of the Discipline of Non- Communicating 
Members. 

After stating the obligations of parents to chil- 
dren in the Church, in the first paragraph, the rest 
of the chapter has to do with the duty of the 
Church, as such: first, to instruct her children; 
second, to recognize or to plead with them on their 
arrival at years of discretion ; and third, to continue 
to seek them. A paragraph is appended to deter- 
mine as to the jurisdiction of what particular church 
given non-communicating members belong. 

147.— I. The oversight of the children of the Chuich is 
committed by God primarily to believing parents, who are re- 
sponsible to the Church for the faithful discharge of this duty. 
The responsibility of parents continues during the minority of 
their children, and extends to all such conduct contrary to the 
purity and sobriety of the gospel as parents may and ought to 
restrain and control. 

This paragraph defines, not the full responsibility 
of parents to God, but their responsibility to the 
Church, for the behavior of their children ; and 
while judicial prosecution may not be had of non- 
communicating children, it may be had of their 
communicating parents for such conduct of their 
children contrary to the purity and sobriety of the 
gospel as parents may and ought to restrain and 
control. 



148, 149 Chap. II., Pars. 2, 3. 175 

148. — II. The Church should make special provision for 
the instruction of its youth in the doctrines of the Bible as set 
forth in the Catechisms. Hence, church Sessions ought to 
establish, under their own authority, Bible classes and Sab- 
bath-schools for this object, or to adopt such other methods as 
shall secure the same end. 

(Cf. 67 : 8.) It is noticeable that the Catechisms 
(and not the Shorter Catechism only) are to be 
taught to the children of the Church ; and the Ses- 
sion of each church should see that this is done. 
And somehow there should be a difference between 
the children of the Church and other children. 

149. — III. When the children of the Church arrive at years 
of discretion, they are bound to discharge all the duties of 
church members. If they give evidence of saving faith in 
Christ, together with a correct walk and conversation, they 
should be informed that it is their privilege and duty to make 
a profession of faith in Christ, and to come to his table. 
If they exhibit a wayward disposition, and associate them- 
selves with the profane, the Church should still cherish them 
in faith, and ought to use all such means as the Word of God 
warrants and the Christian prudence of church ofScers shall 
dictate for reclaiming them, and bringing them to appreciate 
their covenant privileges and to discharge their covenant obli- 
gations. 

(Cf. 29.) It is not contemplated that the indi- 
vidual child will first ask admission to the Lord's 
table, but that the Pastor or other representative 
of the Session will inform the child that the Ses- 
sion advises it of its privilege and duty. At the 
same time, although there should be evidence of 
saving faith, but such behavior as would call for 
censure of a communicating member, the child is 
not to be thus advised. Yet all proper means are 
to be used to bring even the most wayward to ful- 
fill their covenant obligations. The theory lying 
back of this paragraph is, that the children of the 
Church will, normally, as they grow into responsi- 



176 Chap. II., Pars. 4, 5 ; Chap. III. 150, 151 

ble persons, find themselves having faith in Christ 
and living in obedience to him; and that, where 
this result does not appear, the church and the 
parents should be filled with solicitude to bring 
them to this personal submission, working in the 
expectation that God will effectually call them. 

150. —ly. Those adult non-communicating members who 
submit with meekness and gratitude to the government and 
instruction of the Church, are entitled to special attention. 
Their rights under the covenant should be frequently and fully- 
explained, and their duties enforced on their consciences; they 
should be warned of the sin and danger of neglecting their 
covenant obligations, and urged by the mercies of Christ to 
come up to their full discharge, 

(Cf. 30.) The exemption of n on- communicating 
members from judicial prosecution does not exempt 
the Church from exercising watchful discipline over 
them in other forms of discipline ; and their privi- 
lege and obligation as church members should never 
be lost sight of. 

151. — V. All non-communicating members shall be deemed 
under the care of the church to which their parents belong, if 
they live under the parental roof and are minors ; or otherwise, 
under that of the church where they reside, or with which they 
ordinarily worship. 

When their parents cease to be responsible to the 
Church (147) for their conduct, they cease to be 
under the jurisdiction of their parents' church as 
such. 



CHAPTER III. 

Of Offences. 

After defining offence in the first paragraph, 
offences are classified : the second paragraph spe- 



152 Chap. III., Par. 1. 177 

cifying what is common to them all ; the third, the 
distinction of offences into two classes according 
to the persons whom they injure ; and tlie fourth, 
their distinction into two classes according to the 
persons to whom they are known. 

152. — I. All offence, the proper object of judicial process, 
is anything in the principles or practice of a church member 
professing faith in Christ which is contrary to the Word of 
God. 

The meaning is not that there ought to be judicial 
prosecution of every offence in every instance, this 
paragraph not being intended to constrain the 
court to prosecute where judicial prosecution is not 
advisable; but the meaning is that there may be 
judicial prosecution for any principle or practice 
contrary to the Word of God, taking away from 
the accused every plea but that his principle or 
practice is not contrary to the Word of God. What 
is contrary to a custom of the Church, or to some 
deliverance of a church court, or even to a symbol 
of doctrine or government, is not an offence unless 
it is contrary to the Word of God; but anything 
contrary to the Word of God is an offence. Even 
to this, however, there is one practical modifica- 
tion in this Church : 

The Confession of Faith and the Larger. and Shorter Cate- 
chisms of the Westminster Assembly, 

slightly amended, cf. 141 and remarks, 

together with the formularies of government, discipline and 
worship, are 'accepted by the Presbyterian Church in the 
United States as standard expositions of the teachings of Scrip- 
ture in relation to both faith and practice. Nothing, there- 
fore, ought to be considered as an offence, or admitted as a 
matter of accusation, which cannot be proved to be such from 
Scripture, as interpreted in our standards. 
13 



178 Chap. III., Par. 1. 152 

To the general statement that our conrrs may treat 
anything contrary to the Scriptures as an offence, 
there is the exception of that which, though con- 
trary to the Scriptures, is not contrary to the 
standards. This is on the ground that the Church 
is restrained by her covenant with all her members 
in the Constitution. If it be objected that then 
the Church thus cuts herself off from obeying 
Christ by enforcing his law in every part of it, the 
answer is, that the Church retains the liberty of 
amending her standards so as to make them exact 
and complete, if at any time she should discover 
any error or defect in them. 

But if she should be on the point of judicially 
prosecuting for something contrary to the stand- 
ards indeed, but not to the Word of God, she must 
not enforce the standards as law rather than. the 
Scriptures; for only the Scripture is law in this 
Church. (Cf. pars. 9, 10, 17, 19, 60, the first ques- 
tion in 112, 119 and 135, and many other passages 
in the Book of Church Order as well as in the doc- 
trinal standards.) In human government, where 
the legislature is as fallible as the judiciary, the 
interpretation of the law by courts may be treated 
as itself law, within certain limitations ; but not in 
the Church, whose law, the Scriptures, is infallible, 
but whose standard interpretation, the symbols 
of doctrine and order, are fallible. If it be 
said that the Constitution is a covenant, and 
that by its acceptance we are all bound to treat its 
interpretation of the Word as being the Word of 
God, the answer is threefold. The members gen- 
erally have not accepted this Constitution in the 
same comprehensive sense as the officers, and have 



16S Chap. III., Par. 1. 179 

not even been asked whether thej accept onr doc- 
trinal standards as containing the system of doc- 
trine taught in the Scriptures, or whether they 
approve the government and dis(3ipline; and yet 
the definition of an offence is the same for un- 
official as for official members. In the second 
place, the officers have accepted the standards as 
fallible and amendable, over against the Scriptures 
as infallible and incapable of amendment ; and this 
vow of belief can bind no Presbyter to find any one 
guilty of an offence, of a sin against God (153), be- 
cause of something which the Presbyter believes 
not contrary to Scripture. And in the third place, 
the Constitution subordinates itself to the Scrip- 
tures, and it would be disloyalty to the Constitu- 
tion itself to let it displace the 'Scriptures in con- 
trolling one's thinking or action. The Constitution 
is not afraid to be thus brought back continually 
to the very Word of God ; thus will its scriptural- 
ness become more and more manifest. 

The form of indictment is not treated or pre- 
scribed in this paragraph, but the principle is laid 
down in this and in the following paragraph, that 
an offence is something contrary to the Word of 
God, a sin against God; and "the Supreme Judge, 
by which all controversies of religion are to be de- 
termined, and all decrees of councils, opinions of 
ancient writers, doctrines of men, and private 
spirits, are to be examined, and in whose sentence 
we are to rest, can be no other but the Holy Spirit 
speaking in the Scriptures." (Confession of Faith, 
Chap. I., Par. 10.) And it is unconstitutional to 
make the Constitution, which is itself decrees of 



180 Chap. III., Par. 2. 153 

councils, the supreme judge in controversies that 
involve judicial prosecution. 

At the same time if one holds an interpretation 
of the Scriptures different from that of the Church 
as expressed in her standards, and fails- to convince 
the courts of the Church that her interpretation is 
error '(as, of course, he most probably will fail), 
he must not expect the court to judge him ac- 
cording to his interpretation. As long as his ordi- 
nation vows are fulfilled in his own conscience, he 
need not, from his point of view, surrender any- 
thing that he has received from the Church upon 
taking those vows ; but if, from change of views, 
or from any cause, he ceases to fulfill those vows, 
he must, as a covenant-keeper, stand ready to sur- 
render whatever dignity he got in the Church by 
making the vows. No man can, by vows of any 
sort, make it his duty to disbelieve the Word 
of God, or to disobey his commandments ; but no 
man has a right to obtain any honor in an organi- 
zation upon condition of certain promises, and then 
insist on retaining it while breaking those prom- 
ises. When the individual and the Church differ 
on the question whether he is fulfilling his vows, 
each party must decide and act, knowing that Christ 
is the only Lord. Yet both parties, and no less 
the individual than the Church, must remember 
that to maintain the truth of Christ, in way and 
temper contrary to Christ, is to misrepresent, and, 
it may be, to betray his truth. 

153.— II. Offences are either personal or general, private or 
public, but all of them being sins against God, are, therefore, 
grounds of discipline. 

The meaning is not that every offence should be 



154-'6Chap.IIL,Paks.3,4; Chap. IV., Par. 1. 181 

judicially prosecuted, for judicial prosecution is not 
the only method of discipline, nor is the only end 
of judicial prosecution the rebuke of offences ; but 
the meaning is, that the real ground of discipline 
is that the offence is a sin against God, and not its 
mere relation to the rights or knowledge of men. 

154. — III. Personal offences are violations of the Divine 
law, considered in the special relation of wrongs or injuries to 
particular individuals. General offences are heresies, or im- 
moralities, having no such relation, or considered apart from it. 

One may not plead that his offence was against a 
particular individual, and that for this reason the 
Church should not intermeddle in the matter ; , nor 
that his offence is not a wrong to any one, and that 
for this reason the courts should not intervene. 
The Church is enforcing Divine law, and not pro- 
tecting personal rights. 

155. — IV. Private offences are those which are known only 
to a few persons. Public offences are those which are noto- 
rious. 

The offender cannot plead that his offence should 
be overlooked because it is of either sort. 



CHAPTER lY. 

Or Church Censures. 

The first paragraph classifies the censures that 
may be inflicted, and the remaining paragraphs 
define each sort of censure. 

156. — I. The censures which may be inflicted by church 
courts are admonition, suspension, excommunication, and de- 
position. When a lower censure fails to reclaim the delin- 
quent, it may become the duty of the court to proceed to the 
infliction of a higher censure. 



182 Chap. IV., Pars. 2, 3. 157, 158 

When such becomes its duty, the court must deter- 
mine in each case, having regard to the principle 
that no censure is to be administered except upon 
conviction by process, or upon acknowledgment of 
guilt. 

157. — II. Admonition is the formal reproof of an offender 
by a church court, warning him of his guilt and danger, and 
exhorting him to be more circumspect and watchful in the 
future. 

Admonition does not impair the offender's ecclesi- 
astical standing, and as soon as the admonition 
has been inflicted, he is no longer under censure, 
and he cannot be censured again unless after 
another conviction or confession. Should one 
convicted of an offence and sentenced to admoni- 
tion refuse to receive the admonition and do not 
appeal (par. 255), the court may not change the 
sentence and inflict another censure without first 
finding him guilty, in a regular way, of an offence 
in refusing to hear the censure. Admonition may 
be conjoined with other censure. 

158. — III. Suspension, with respect to ohurch members, is 
their temporary exclusion from sealing ordinances; with re- 
spect to church officers, it is their temporary exclusion from 
the exercise of their office. It may be either definite or indefi- 
nite as to its duration. Definite suspension is administered 
when the credit of religion, the honor of Christ, and the good 
of the delinquent demand it, even though he may have given 
satisfaction to the court. Indefinite suspension is the exclu- 
sion of an offender from sealing ordinances, or from his office, 
until he exhibit signs of repentance, or until, by his conduct, 
the necessity of the highest censure be made manifest. 

The sealing ordinances are baptism and the Lord's 
supper ; and exclusion from them is the exclusion 
of him from partaking of the Lord's supper himself 
and from having his children baptized upon his 



159 Chap. IV., Par. 4. 183 

profession of faith. His child might be baptized 
while he is under censure upon the faith of the 
other parent. 

The language requires that three conditions must 
exist before definite suspension is inflicted: that 
the credit of religion, the honor of Christ, and the 
good, of the delinquent demand it.. Definite sus- 
pension terminates at the time set, without formal 
act ; and the suspended person, being, no longer 
under censure, resumes his use of the sealing ordi- 
nances or of his office. Definite suspension may 
be inflicted whether the offender has given satis- 
faction to the court or not ; as when, for instance, 
the censured is not convinced in his own con- 
science of sin, and the court is not willing either 
to indefinitely suspend or to stop with mere ad- 
monition. 

A person under indefinite suspension may be 
excommunicated or deposed, without another trial, 
whenever it shall seem necessary to the court to 
proceed so far. 

In the case of officers, suspension from sealing 
ordinances and suspension from office may be con- 
joined, or suspension from office may be inflicted 
without the other. 

159. — IV. Excommunication is the excision of an offender 
from the communion of the Church. This censure is to be in- 
flicted only on account of gross crime or heresy, when the of- 
fender shows himself incorrigible and contumacious. The de- 
sign of this censure is to operate on the offender as a means of 
reclaiming him, to deliver the Church from the scandal of his 
offence, and to inspire all with fear by the example of his disci- 
pline. 

One might be incorrigible in the sense that he can- 
not be convinced of his error, and at the same 



184 Chap. IV., Pak. 5, Chap. V. 160 

time show no coniumaciousness ; such a one is not 
to be excommunicated. And since this censure is 
to be inflicted only in the case of gross crime or 
heresy, and indefinite suspension from the sacra- 
ments is expected to issue in excommunication or 
repentance, courts should be careful not to inflict 
this suspension except for gross crime or heresy. 

160. — V. Deposition is the degradation of an officer from 
his office, and may or may not be accompanied with the inflic- 
tion of other censure. 

Courts should be careful not to suspend indefi- 
nitely from office unless in cases in which deposi- 
tion should follow if there is not repentance. 



CHAPTEE V. 

Of the Parties in Cases of Peocess. 

Process is a technical term for the whole proce- 
dure from the determination of the court to put on 
trial to the end of the trial in sentence. 

The first paragraph states what courts may try 
causes; the second, within what limitations the 
court itself may appoint a prosecutor ; the third, 
which is the heart of the chapter, who are the 
"parties"; the fourth, what shall be the form of 
indictment ; the fifth, who may not become prose- 
cutor of personal or private offences; the sixth, 
the absence of these limitations in the case of gen- 
eral offences ; the seventh, what special limitation 
the court may put upon itself before instituting 
process ; the eighth, what cautions the court should 
observe against receiving accusations; the ninth, 



161, 162 Chap. V., Paes. 1, 2. 185 

what warnings should be given to voluntary prose- 
cutors; the tenth, what is the status of an officer 
pending process over him ; and the eleventh, what 
are the rights of the accused pending process. The 
parties being the Church and the accused, the 
chapter shows how the Church may come to stand 
as accuser in a prosecutor, the responsibilities of 
the court and the prosecutor, and the status of the 
accused. 

161 — I. Original jurisdiction in relation to Ministers of the 
Gospel pertains exclusively to the Presbytery (62 and 77), and 
in relation to other church members to the Session (62 and 67), 
unless the Session shall be unable to try the person or persons 
accused, in which case the Presbytery shall have the right of 
jurisdiction (77 : 2). 

Yet a Presbytery for a Session, or a Synod for a 
Presbytery, may try a cause upon reference from 
the lower court (247-254). 

162. — II. It is the duty of ail church Sessions and Presby- 
teries to exercise care over those subject to their authority; 
and they shall, with due diligence and great discretion, demand 
from such persons satisfactory explanations concerning reports 
affecting their Christian character. This duty is more impera- 
tive when those who deem themselves aggrieved by injurious 
reports shall ask an investigation. If such investigation, how- 
ever originating, should result in raising a strong presumption 
of the guilt of the party involved, the court shall institute 
process, and shall appoint a prosecutor to prepare the indict- 
ment and to conduct the case. This prosecutor shall be a 
member of the court, except that, in a case before the Session, 
he may be any communicating member of the same congrega- 
tion with the accused. 

The phrase, " with due diligence and great dis- 
cretion," qualifies the imperative "shall demand" 
to this* extent, that the court may, for satisfactory 
reasons, omit such demand in some cases when 
there are injurious reports ; but only for extreme 



186 Chap. V., Par. 2. 162 

reasons would a court be justified in refusing a 
request for an investigation, if made by a party 
claiming to be aggrieved by injurious reports. The 
principle, however, remains, that the court is bound 
to preserve the honor of religion (173) at what- 
ever cost; and it cannot but fail of its most im- 
portant function as a court of the Lord Jesus 
Christ, if it does not use its power of discipline to 
preserve the Church. But it is the court itself, 
and not any individual, that determines, in every in- 
stance, whether there shall be an investigation. 

When, however, the court, by committee or 
otherwise, makes a demand or begins an inquiry, 
the object of such demand or inquiry being to de- 
termine whether there is ground of vindication or 
of instituting process, then "investigation" has 
originated (and investigation may originate and 
conclude at the same meeting, or even at the same 
session, of the court). 

And after an investigation is once originated, 
the court no longer has discretion not to institute 
process, if the investigation results in raising 
a strong presumption of the guilt of the accused. 
It appears, then, that, after an " investigation, 
the court must always institute process, except 
where the court judges that the investigation 
fails to result in raising a strong presumption 
of guilt, and, of course, the court may institute 
process, even when the members of the court 
believe that there is no guilt, if they are persuaded 
that this' is desirable for the vindication of inno- 
cence or for other reasons. The sum of the matter 
is, that the court has unlimited discretion (subject, 
as in all matters, to the review of higher courts), 



163 Chap. T., Par. 3. 187 

only that it has not discretion to raise by investi- 
gation a strong presumption of guilt and then not 
institute process. A strong presumption means a 
belief by the members of the court that evidence 
as then known to them would indicate that guilt 
probably exists, unless evidence to the contrary 
can be produced not then known to them. 

The court institutes process by appointing a 
prosecutor." It is the duty of the prosecutor thus 
appointed to prepare the indictment and to con- 
duct the case ; that is, the court, after the appoint- 
ment of the prosecutor, is simply a judge, and the 
whole responsibility of representing the Church as 
an accuser is on the prosecutor. This appointed 
prosecutor must be a member of the court, or, in 
the case of the Session, a communicating member 
in good standing in its church. 

163. — III. The original and only parties in a case of process 
are the accuser and the accused. The accuser is always the 
Presbyterian Church in the United States, whose honor and 
purity are to be maintained. The prosecutor, whether volun- 
tary or appointed, is always the representative of the Church, 
and as such has all its rights in the case. In appellate courts 
the parties are known as appellant and appellee. 

The original parties are the only parties ; for the 
parties are not changed by the transference of the 
cause from court to court. In the appellate courts 
the party appealing is to be known as the appel- 
lant, and the other, the appellee ; but in the court 
of original jurisdiction, the parties are known as 
accuser and accused. The accuser is always the 
Church ; for whether the court appoints a prose- 
cutor, or accepts as prosecutor some one volunteer- 
ing to act as prosecutor, the prosecutor is, by that 
appointment or acceptance, made the representa- 



188 Chap. V., Pars. 4, 5. 164, 165 

tive of the Cburch. Henceforth the prosecutor 
represents the Church as accuser; the court, as 
judge. Of course, the court may change the per- 
sonnel of the prosecutor pending the process, and 
the prosecutor may be more than one indiyidual. 
Since the prosecutor represents the Church as 
accuser, having the same rights and responsibihties 
whether appointed or voluntary, he cannot sit as a 
judge pending the process. He therefore has no 
vote in the court, pending the process, on any 
question relating thereto. 

164. — lY. Every indictment shall begin : "In the name of 
the Presbyterian Church in the United States," and shall con- 
clude : ' ' against the peace, unity and purity of the Church, and 
the honor and majesty of the Lord Jesus Christ as the King 
and Head thereof." In every case the Church is the injured 
and accusing party mrsus the accused. 

This last sentence must hold, even when the court 
accepts a voluntary prosecutor prosecuting a per- 
sonal offence against himself. His acceptance by 
the court of this Church constitutes him the repre- 
sentative of the Church ; hence the form prescribed 
for the beginning of every indictment. The form 
prescribed for the ending of every indictment 
shows that the Church herself has no rights except 
as united with her King and Head. It matters 
not what specifications, or what references to the 
standards or to the Scriptures, may or may not 
come in the body of the indictment, the indictment 
must assert that the thing charged is a sin against 
Christ. 

165. — V. An injured party shall not become a prosecutor of 
personal offences without having tried the means of reconcilia- 
tion and of reclaiming the offender, required by Christ : ' ' More- 
over, if thy brother trespass against thee, go and tell him his 



166, 167 Chap. Y., Pars. 5, 6, 7. 189 

fault between thee and him alone ; if he shall hear thee, thou 
hast gained thy brother; but if he will not hear thee, then 
take with thee one or more, that in the mouth of two or three 
witnesses every word may be established." (Matt, xviii. 15, 
16.) A church court, however, may judicially investigate per- 
sonal offences as if general, when the interests of religion seem 
to demand it. So, also, those to whom private offences are 
known cannot become prosecutors without having previously 
endeavored to remove the scandal by private means. 

Whether the person proposing to act as voluntary 
prosecutor shall be accepted by the court is a ques- 
tion on which the accused should be heard, and he 
should be allowed to introduce evidence that the 
proposed prosecutor has not complied with the 
conditions here prescribed; for only the accused 
Y^^ould be able to dispute his claim that he had. 
And courts should rigidly inquire whether this 
condition has been complied with before accepting 
a voluntary prosecutor. 

166. — VI. When the offence is general, the cause may be 
conducted either by any person appearing as prosecutor, or by 
a prosecutor appointed by the court. 

This is true also when the offence is personal, the 
previous paragraph not meaning that only the in- 
jured party could become voluntary prosecutor, but 
that he could not without previously complying 
with the conditions. This limitation applies only 
to the injured party. 

"Any person" must be limited to "any member 
of the Church submitting to its authority" (267); 
for certainly no other could represent the Church 
and have all its rights in the case. But the ap- 
pointed prosecutor must, be a member of the par- 
ticular church or of the court (162). 

167. — VII. When the prosecution is instituted by the court, 
the previous steps required by our Lord in the case of personal 



190 Chap. T., Paes. 7, 8, 9. 168, 169 

offences are not necessary. There are many eases, however, 
in which it will promote the interests of religion to send a com- 
mittee to confer in a private manner with the offender, and en- 
deavor to bring him to a sense of his guilt, before instituting 
actual process. 

And the principle would seem to requii-e this to be 
done in all cases where the offence appears to have 
been against the court, or its members as such. 

168. — YIII. Great caution ought to be exercised in receiv- 
ing accusations from any person who is known to indulge a 
malignant spirit towards the accused: who is not of good char- 
acter: who is himself under censure or process : who is deeply 
interested in any respect in the conviction of the accused ; or 
who is known to be litigious, rash, or highly imprudent. 

This makes it clear that the court is not obliged, 
either itself to institute process by appointing a 
prosecutor, or to order the beginning of process by 
accepting a Yoluntarv prosecutor; for, since the 
prosecutor represents the Church, it is a serious 
matter to give one such rights. But the court 
may, on the ground of accusations brought before 
it, originate an inyestigation, and institute process, 
without appointing as prosecutor him who volun- 
teers to be prosecutor. The court is not bound to 
assign its reasons for not accepting one as a volun- 
tary prosecutor. 

109. — IX. Every voluntary prosecutor shall be previously 
warned, that if he fail to show probable cause of the charges, 
ho must himself be censured as a slanderer of the brethren, in 
proportion to the malignity or rashness manifested in the pro- 
secution. 

This warning must be given when he is accepted 
as prosecutor; and the failure of the court to in- 
stitute process against him after the trial is over is 
ipso facto acknowledgment by the court that he 
did show the probable cause here required. To 



170-1 Chat. V., Pap.s. 10. 11: Chat. VI. 191 

sliow probable cause means to show thai he had 
probable evidence of the tmth of the charges when 
he nndertook the prosecution. 

170. — X. When ii member of a oliurc-h eouxr is under pro- 
cess, all his official funetions may !:«? sxispendeti at iis •iiS'i-re- 
tion : but this shall never t«e done in the war of eensnie. 

This is a particular appHcation of the principle 
that one may have the exercise of his official func- 
tions suspended without censure; but the court 
shotild be slow to do this, unless prudence reqtdres 
it, lest it work to the prejudice of the accused or 
make the court appear precipitate. 

171.— XI. In the discussion of all questions arising in his 
own ease, the aoeusel shall exerc-ise the rights of defendant 
only, not of judge. 

(Cf. rem. under 163 as to the prosecutor. » Xo one 
is accused, in the technical sense here meant, until 
the court has determined that there shall be pro- 
cess, otherwise, a designing man cordd by accusa- 
tion sift the court to suit his own plans. 



CHAPTEE TI. 

Of Gexzeal Pkotisioxs Afflicablz to aix Cases 
OF Process. 

Twenty provisions are given. The hi-st reu look 
rather to the protection of the accused. The first 
two guard the court against a wrong temper Id con- 
ducting a trial or commencing a process ; the other 
eight require sufficient citations. Paragraph 3 pre- 
vents undue haste at the beginning : the fourth gives 
the accused, as weU as the other party, the right of 



192 Chap. YI., Par. 1. 172 

official citation of all witnesses wanted; the fifth 
requires the indictment to be definite; the sixth 
gives the accused the benefit of a second citation ; 
the seventh defines more closely the provision of 
the sixth ; the eighth forbids the taking of evidence 
at a distance without reasonable notice to the ac- 
cused; the ninth protects any person from being 
put on trial for offences alleged to have been com- 
mitted at a distance without due investigation and 
safeguards; and the tenth requires that the cita- 
tions be served as well as issued. The other ten 
paragraphs look to the impartiality and fairness of 
the trial after the issue is joined. Paragraph eleventh 
defines the functions of the judicial committee ; the 
twelfth requires that a solemn charge be made to 
the members of the court as judges; the thirteenth 
lays down the rule for the examination of wit- 
nesses ; the fourteenth prescribes how issues arising 
in the course of the trial shall be settled ; the fif- 
teenth prescribes the order of procedure in the 
trial of a cause in a court of original jurisdiction; 
the sixteenth lays down the rule to govern chal- 
lenges; the seventeenth states some requirements 
that a member must observe or lose his qualifica- 
tion for continuing as a judge in the cause; the 
eighteenth defines the record of the cause and its 
uses ; the nineteenth gives directions as to counsel ; 
and the twentieth states and limits the time within 
which process must begin. These general regula- 
tions are not easily mastered and remembered 
always, but the observance of them is of great 
importance. 

172. — I. It is incumbent on every member of a court of 
Jesus Christ engaged in a trial of offenders, to bear in mind 



173 Chap. YL, Paes. 1, 2. 193 

the inspired injunction : "If a man be overtaken in a fault, ye 
which are spiritual restore such an one in the spirit of meek- 
ness, considering tliyself, lest thou also be tempted." 

The trial proper begins with the charge of the 
Moderator to the court (183), while the process be- 
gins with the determination of the court that there 
shall be a judicial prosecution, and judicial proce- 
dure begins with the determination of the court to 
investigate; but this principle, while especially im- 
perative during the trial proper, applies through- 
out the whole judicial procedure, as indeed in all 
dealing with offenders. 

173.— II. Process against an offender shall not be com- 
menced unless some person or persons undertake to make out 
the charge; or unless the court finds it necessary, for the, 
honor of religion, itself to take the step provided for in Chap- 
ter V. , paragraph II. 

Since an offence is anything in principle or prac- 
tice contrary to the Word of God, who of us is not 
an offender ? Were it a duty to prosecute every 
offender, the Church would have no time or strength 
for anything else. Process shall not commence 
unless one of two conditions is fulfilled. The one 
of these conditions is, that some person or persons 
volunteer to prosecute in spite of the warning in 
169 and after complying (if an injured party or one 
privy to a private offence) with 165; and even 
then the court may decline to allow process to 
commence, either from objection to the voluntary 
prosecutor (168), or because the thing charged 
is not an offence, or the evidence proposed is 
seen to be inadequate, or because the ends of disci- 
pline will not be promoted in the circumstances. 
The other of these conditions is that the court 
shall find it necessary, for the honor of religion, to 
13 



194 Chap. YI., Par. 3. 174 

take the step provided for in 162. This phrase, 
" the honor of religion," is not to be pressed, but 
is to be taken as a brief equivalent of the ends of 
discipline mentioned in 145. The whole tone 
of these Rules is evidently this : that judicial pro- 
secution is not to be originated, either by a court 
or by a voluntary prosecutor, unless the honor of 
religion requires this step, all other means to this 
end having been first exhausted; but that this 
means is, of course, to be resorted to when the 
honor of religion does require it, the honor of re- 
ligion to be preserved at every cost. And the 
honor of religion is synonymous with the holiness 
of the Church. (Cf. remarks on 146.) 

174.— III. When a charge is laid before the Session or Pres- 
bytery, it shall be reduced to writing, and nothing shall be 
done at the first meeting of the court, unless by consent of 
parties, except to appoint a prosecutor, and order an indict- 
ment to be drawn, a copy of which, with the witnesses then 
known to support it, shall be served on the accused, and to 
cite all parties and their witnesses to appear and be heard at 
another ineeting, which shall not be sooner than ten days after 
such citation; at which meeting of the court the charges shall 
be read to the accused, if present, and he shall be called upon 
to say whether he be guilty or not. If he confess, the court 
may deal with him according to its discretion ; if he plead and 
take issue, the trial shall proceed. Accused parties may plead 
in writing when they cannot be personally present, and parties 
necessarily absent should have counsel assigned to them. 

A charge may be laid before the court either by 
a person proposing to be a voluntary prosecutor, 
or by a person not so proposing, or by the court 
itself at the conclusion of an investigation. The 
charge may, indeed, be first presented orally ; but 
it is not to be considered as laid before the court 
until the court has possession of a written copy 
approved by the party that lays the charge before 



174 Chap. YI., Par. 3. 195 

the court. The "parties" whose consent is here 
spoken of are the Church and the accused, that is, 
the prosecutor and the accused ; and hence the 
question of this consent * cannot receive answer 
until after the prosecutor has been appointed or 
accepted. With the consent of the parties, the 
whole trial may be concluded at that meeting ; but 
this could only be where both parties were then 
present, and all the witnesses. Without such con- 
sent, only two things may be done. The first of 
these is "to appoint a prosecutor, and order the 
indictment to be drawn " by him (cf. 162) ; and the 
second is "to cite all parties and their witnesses," 
that is, to order the Moderator or the Clerk to 
issue these citations (175). The citation to the 
accused must include a copy of the indictment 
as prepared by the prosecutor. He may prepare 
the indictment, and furnish a copy of it for this 
purpose to whichever officer has been instructed 
to issue the citation to the accused, after the meet- 
ing of the court is over ; but the copy of the cita- 
tion must reach the hands of the accused in due 
time (178). The citations to the witnesses need 
contain only the title of the cause, and the time 
and place of the meeting for trial, together with 
the official command or request to be present for 
giving evidence. The meeting for trial must be at 
least ten days after the day on which the citation 
to the accused is served upon him ; but how many 
days after the citations reach the witnesses is left 
undetermined ; but the principle is that the parties 
and witnesses shall have due time to prepare for 
the trial and to arrange for attendance. The 
charge, as first written, need not be in the form of 



196 Chap. YL, Paes. 3, 4. 175 

an indictment; but the "charges" to be read to 
the accused is synonymous with the indictment. 
The accused may, of course, object to the indict- 
ment, and may move that it be rejected by the 
oourt, as not in proper form (164), or as being too 
indefinite (176), or he may move that it be amended 
so as to eliminate imperfections ; but if the court 
sustains the indictment, the accused must plead 
either "guilty" or "not guilty," or he may plead 
"guilty in part, and not guilty in part" (specifying 
what is admitted and what is denied). If a party 
is necessarily absent, he may take either of two 
courses. He may plead in writing. This plea he 
may accompany with requests that such or such 
be assigned as his counsel, that the trial be post- 
poned, etc. He may send in an oral communica- 
tion (which, however, should be reduced to writing 
and put on record), and this may be accepted by 
the court in lieu of a communication written by 
the accused himself; or he may send no communi- 
cation, or may send a communication declining to 
plead; and in either case, even if he declines to 
plead at all, and not merely in his absence, the 
trial may not proceed at that meeting, or without a 
second citation. The court is obliged to assign, as 
counsel, whomsoever the accused may nominate 
(within the limits of paragraph 190), if such nomi- 
nee consents ; and no one may be tried in his ab- 
sence without what the court considers proper 
counsel. 

175. — ly. The citation shall be issued and signed by the 
Moderator or Clerk, by order and in the name of the court; he 
shall also issue citations to such witnesses as either party shall 
nominate to appear on his behalf. 



176, 177 Chap. YI., Paes. 5, 6. ^ 197 

At any time before the time set for trial, either 
party may nominate witnesses to the Moderator or 
Clerk ; but it would be a sufficient objection to any 
witnesses nominated by the prosecutor after the 
meeting of the court ordering the indictment to be 
served, that the prosecution then knew this wit- 
ness (174). Either party has the right all the 
while to know what witnesses the other party is 
having cited. 

176. — V. In drawing the indictment, the times, places, and 
circumstances should, if possible, be particularly stated, that 
the accused may have an opportunity to make his defence. 

The court may make inquisition before the com- 
mencement of process, but not afterward, and there- 
fore, the indictment may not be used as an instru- 
ment of inquisition ; and it must be so drawn as to 
give an innocent party every opportunity of prov- 
ing his innocence, as well as of preventing his 
conviction. 

177.— VI. When an accused person shall refuse to obey a 
citation, he shall be cited a second time; and this second cita- 
tion shall be accompanied with a notice that if he do not ap- 
pear at the time appointed (unless providentially hindered, 
which fact he must make known to the court), or that if he 
appear and refuse to plead, he shall be dealt with for his con- 
tumacy, as hereinafter provided. 

His absence without sending in an excuse is pre- 
sumptive evidence that he refuses. According to 
the principle here laid down, if he comes upon the 
first citation, but refuses to plead, the court would 
cite a second time, instead of then proceeding to 
deal with him for contumacy. (Cf. pars. 193 and 
199.) The reason for this patient forbearance is, 
that the court of Christ may show his gentleness, 
and thereby save the accused, and that the course 



198 Chap. VI., Pars. 7, 8, 9. 178-180 

enjoined upon the court in cases of contumacy is 
too severe to be entered upon without necessity. 

178. — VII. The time which must elapse between the serving 
of the first citation on the accused person, and the meeting of 
tlie court at which he is to appear, shall be at least ten days. 
But the time allotted for his appearance on the second citation 
shall be left to the discretion of the court, provided that it be 
not less than is quite sufficient for a seasonable and convenient 
compliance with the citation. 

The accused must really have a second opportu- 
nity. 

179, — VIII. When the offence with which an accused per- 
son stands charged took place at a distance, and it is incon- 
venient for the witnesses to appear before the court having jur- 
isdiction, that court may either appoint a commission of its 
body, or request the co-ordinate court contiguous to the place 
where the facts occurred, to take the testimony for it. The 
accused shall always have reasonable notice of the time and 
place of the meeting of this commission. 

If the contiguous court takes the testimony, it acts 
as a commission of the other. It lies in the nature 
of the case, that the commission will be furnished 
with copies of the indictment and of all proceed- 
ings that it needs to be acquainted with in order 
to a due discharge of its commission. The rea- 
sonable notice should be given by the court, if it 
fixes the time and place; otherwise, by the com- 
mission. ^ 

180. — IX. When an offence, alleged to have been committed 
at a distance, is not likely otherwise to become known to the 
court having Jurisdiction, it shall be the duty of the court 
within whose bounds the facts occurred, after satisfying itself 
that there is probable ground of accusation, to send notice to 
the court having Jurisdiction, which shall at once proceed 
ag^nst the accused ; or the whole case may be remitted for 
trial to the co-ordinate court within whose bounds the offence 
is alleged to have been committed. 



181, 182 Chap. YT., Pars. 10, 11. 199 

Here the co-ordinate court, by sending notice to 
the court having jurisdiction, puts that court in the 
same relation to the matter as if it had made the 
investigation itself, and raised a strong presump- 
tion of guilt (162). The transfer of the case to 
the court best able to get the witnesses may be 
done without the consent of parties. The court 
having jurisdiction must first appoint or accept a 
prosecutor before transferring the case. (See 192.) 
Cases should not thus be transferred except for 
grave reasons, especially if the accused objects. 

181.— X. Before proceeding to trial, courts ought to ascer- 
tain that their citations have been duly served. 

It is not enough to ascertain that the citations 
were issued in due time, but also that they reached 
the persons cited in due time. 

182. — XI. In every process, if deemed expedient, there may 
be a committee appointed, which shall be called the Judicial 
Committee, and whose duty it shall be to digest and arranges 
all the papers, and to prescribe, under the direction of the 
court, the whole order of proceedings. The members of this 
committee shall be entitled, notwithstanding their performance 
of this duty, to sit and vote in the case as members of the court. 

Every court before which the case comes may have 
such a committee. This committee has nothing 
to do with the merits of the case whatever. The 
court may give directions beforehand to this com- 
mittee as to the order of proceedings, and must 
approve its recommendations before they become 
in force. It is not by this paragraph made the 
business of this committee to recommend whether 
there shall be a process, but merely to formulate 
in detail the order of proceedings. But any ques- 
tion that may properly be decided previous to the 
commencement of process, or any question pertain- 



200 Chap. YI., Paes. 12, 13, 14. 183-185 

ing to a case in any sense judicial, may be referred 
to a committee for consideration and report ; and 
such a committee may be called a Judicial Com- 
mittee. 

183. — XII. When the trial is about to begin, it shall be the 
duty of the Moderator solemnly to announce from the chair 
that the court is about to pass to the consideration of the 
cause, and to enjoin on the members to recollect and regard 
their high character as Judges of a court of Jesus Christ, and 
the solemn duty in which they are about to engage. 

This charge marks the passage of the members of 
the court out of relation to the case as repre- 
sentatives of the Church accusing, and sets them 
free from every obligation but the one obligation 
to ascertain and declare the will of Jesus Christ in 
the case. 

184. — XIII. In order that the trial may be fair and impar- 
tial, the witnesses shall be examined in the presence of the 
accused, or at least after he shall have received due citation to 
attend. Witnesses may be cross-examined by both parties, 
and any questions asked which are pertinent to the issue. 

The prosecutor, too, must be present. Whether a 
question is pertinent the court must determine 
(but see 210) in case of dispute concerning its per- 
tinency. Members of the court also may ask ques- 
tions. 

185. — XIV. On all questions arising in the progress of a 
trial, the discussion shall first be between the parties; and 
when they have been heard, they may be required to withdraw 
from the court until the members deliberate upon and decide 
the point. 

Members of the court must not become counsel to 
either party, either formally or really; and the 
presence of the parties or any other hindrance 
must not embarrass the full counselling together of 
the members of the court as judges. If the parties 



186 Chap. YI., Pae. 15. 201 

may be required to retire, certainly the court may 
exclude all other persons, if it thinks best; but 
seldom will it be "best to exclude even the parties. 
Nothing can be done in the presence of one party 
while the other is excluded. 

186. — XV. When a court of first resort proceeds to the 
trial of a cause, the following order shall be observed: 1, The 
Moderator shall charge the court; 2, The indictment shall be 
read, and the answer of the accused heard ; 3, The witnesses 
for the prosecutor, and then those for the accused, shall be 
examined; 4, The parties shall be heard ; first the prosecutor 
and then the accused, and the prosecutor shall close ; 5, The 
roll shall be called, that the members may express their opinion 
in the cause; 6, The decision shall be made and judgment 
entered on record. 

Here it may be well to set down the order of the 
whole judicial procedure: I. Before Process. 1, 
Raising the question of judicial procedure. This 
may be done by some member of the court calling 
its attention to prejudicial facts or rumors, or by a 
communication from any person to the same end. 
A request from one affected by reports would raise 
the question. 2, Taking up the question. This 
can be done only upon a motion. Here the ques- 
tion is whether there shall be an investigation, or, 
if some one proposes to be a voluntary prosecutor, 
the question may be whether to consider his pro- 
position. 3, If the court has resolved to enter 
upon an investigation, or upon the consideration 
of some one's proposition to be a voluntary prose- 
cutor, then such investigation or consideration is 
pending until the court decides for or against insti- 
tuting process, or for or against accepting the pro- 
posing prosecutor. If the court decides against 
accepting the proposing prosecutor, it would still 
be in order to move that the court enter upon an 



202 Chap. VI., Par. 15. 186 

investigation. Pending this third head, the court 
may make such inquiries as are needful for its 
guidance. 4, If the court decides' to institute pro- 
cess, it belongs here to appoint the prosecutor. 

II. Process before Trial. Process being initiated 
by the appointment or acceptance of a prosecutor: 
1, The court fixes the time and place of trial; 2, 
Orders the proper citations to be issued; 3, Ascer- 
tains whether the citations have been duly served ; 
4, Recognizes or appoints counsel for the accused, 
if needful ; acts upon his objections to process under 
191; and acts upon objections from the accused 
to the prosecutor under 162 or 165 ; and 5, Orders 
the trial to proceed, if the parties are present, or 
fixes the time and place of the next meeting and 
orders the second citations to be issued. 

III. The Trial includes these parts in succes- 
sion : 1, The charge to the court. At this time a 
roll of those present as sitting members of the 
court should be made, so that at every step a 
proper record of their attendance may be kept ; and 
to this list none are to be added pending the 
trial, and none are to be taken away from it 
except upon order of the court. Challenges may 
be made at this point; and challenges may be 
made at any point subsequently upon grounds 
subsequently arising or coming to light. 2, Read- 
ing the indictment and hearing the pleading of the 
accused. When the indictment has been read, it 
is in order for the accused to object to the indict- 
ment, either on the ground that it does not con- 
form to 164, or on the ground that it does not 
comply with 176; and after discussion between 
the parties, the court must decide the point. It 



186 ' Chap. VI., Par. 15. 203 

would also be in order for any member of the 
court to object to the indictment on either of these 
grounds, or on the ground that the indictment did 
not embody the charges upon which the court had 
ordered process to be conducted. But no one 
may attack the indictment upon the ground that 
the thing charged is not an offence ; for both issues, 
whether the thing charged upon the accused is 
true, and whether, if true, it is an offence (that is 
something '' against the peace, unity and purity of 
the Church, and the honor and majesty of the 
Lord Jesus Christ as the King and Head thereof"), 
are reserved for discussion and determination in 
the trial itself. If the indictment is set aside as 
defective, immediately the process is at the point 
where it was when the court appointed or accepted 
a prosecutor. But the indictment being sustained as 
sufficient, the accused must plead. If the accused 
plead guilty, 3, 4 and 5 would be skipped. 3, The 
witnesses for the prosecutor shall be called and ex- 
amined in the order that he desires. After all the wit- 
nesses for the prosecution have been examined and 
cross-examined, and, if the court permits, recalled 
and re-examined, then the witnesses for the accused 
shall be similarly examined. But no witness for the 
prosecution may be examined after the examina- 
tion of witnesses for the accused, unless by con- 
sent of the accused and the order of the court. 
Under this head come all challenges of witnesses. 
4, Here shall come first the address or addresses 
of the prosecution, then of the accused, and finally 
of the prosecution again. It would be out of order 
for the prosecution, after the accused has spoken, 
to say anything except strictly in answer to what 



204 Chap. VL, Par. 15. 186 

the accused has said. 5, The roll shall be called, 
that the members may express their opinion in the 
cause. It is not intended that this shall become a 
discussion between the members. Accordingly it 
is proper to limit the members to a brief time ; and 
it would not be inconsistent with the intention, to 
require that each one merely read his prepared 
opinion. Otherwise, it is a matter of much conse- 
quence in what order the members speak ; for an 
influential and eloquent member speaking among 
the first will greatly modify the expressions that 
are to follow. The real end of this expression of 
individual opinion is that each may have the help 
of the separate opinion of each of the others. 6, 
The decision shall be made, and judgment entered 
on record. The decision is not made under item 5, 
but there the opinions of all are expressed for 
comparison and mutual guidance. Here, and not 
till this point, should the decision itself be made, 
although it may save time to let the expression of 
opinion and the voting coincide. Necessarily the 
decision must be guilty or not guilty, since that is 
the single issue; but if the indictment contains 
several specifications, the decision may be guilty 
in part. As members are not required to express 
their opinion under 5, so the method of voting 
here, where the court is making its decision, is not 
prescribed ; and the vote may be by ballot, or by 
rising or lifted hand, or by yea and nay, as the 
court orders. After the decision is made, it still 
remains to determine what censure shall be in- 
flicted, if the accused has been found guilty. The 
*•' judgment " is the acquittal, or else the condemna- 
tion with the censure; and the fixing of this cen- 



187-189 Chap. VI., Pars. 16, 17, 18. 205 

sure may be a matter of debate in the court, but in 
this discussion the parties can have no part. 

187. — Xyi. Either party may, for cause, challenge the 
right of any member to sit in the trial of the case, which ques- 
tion shall be decided by the members of the court other than 
the one challenged. 

Only one member can be challenged at a time, for 
otherwise a party could sift the court to suit him- 
self. The right of the challenged member to sit 
must be determined before anything else is done in 
the trial. No challenge of a member's right to sit 
should be entertained after the reading of the in- 
dictment to the accused, unless for cause not known 
before that time to the challenging party. 

188. — XVII. Pending the trial of a cause, any member of 
the court who shall express his opinion of its merits to either 
party, or to any person not a member of the court; or who 
shall absent himself from any sitting without the permission 
of the court, or satisfactory reasons rendered, shall be there- 
by disqualified from taking part in the subsequent proceed- 
ings. 

A judge should hold liis mind open to evidence 
and argument until he has heard all, and he needs 
to be present so as to hear all. The court should 
not excuse absence for light reasons, nor without 
giving the parties opportunity to state their objec- 
tions (185). Of course, this paragraph does not 
forbid expression of opinion as provided for in 
186:5. 

189. — XVIII. The parties shall be allowed copies of the 
whole proceedings at their own expense, if they demand them. 
Minuted of the trial shall be kept by the clerk, which shall ex- 
hibit the charges, the answer, all the testimony, and all such 
acts, orders, and decisions of the court relating to the cause, 
as either party may desire, and also the judgment. The clerk 
shall, without delay, attach together the charges, the answer, 



206 Chap. YI., Pak. 19. 190 

the citations and returns thereto, and the minutes herein re- 
quired to be kept. These papers, when so attached, shall con- 
stitute "the record of the cause." When a cause is removed 
by appeal or complaint, the lower court shall transmit "the 
record" thus prepared to the higher court, with the addition 
of the notice of appeal or complaint, and the reasons thereof, 
if any have been filed. Nothing which is not contained in this 
"record" shall be taken into consideration in the higher court. 
On the final decision of a cause in a higher court, its Judgment 
shall be sent down to the court in which the case originated. 

"Copies of the whole proceedings" is synonymous 
with " copies of the record of the cause." What 
acts, orders, and decisions relate to the cause the 
court must decide, in case the clerk and either of 
the parties differ on this point ; but the clerk, sub- 
ject to the direction of the court, may omit such 
acts, orders, and decisions as neither party desires. 
Returns to citations are evidences that they were 
served in due time and on the proper persons. 
The final decision of a cause is not made until a 
decision is made from which no appeal or com- 
plaint is taken to a higher court. 

190.— XIX. No professional counsel shall be permitted as 
such to appear and plead in cases of process in any court ; but 
an accused person may, if he desires it, be represented before 
the Session by any communicating member of the same par- 
ticular church ; or before any other court, by any member of 
the court. A member of the court so employed shall not be 
allowed to sit in judgment in the cause. 

The court is not bound to allow him to be so rep- 
resented ; nor can any act as counsel before a Ses- 
sion unless a member of the same particular 
church with the accused, or before any other court 
unless a member of it. It follows that no person 
condemned can have the same counsel through all 
the higher courts. And this limitation will tend to 
discourage appeals. 



191 Chap. YI., Par. 20; Chap. VII. 207 

191. — XX. Process, in case of scandal, shall commence 
within the space of one year after the offence was committed, 
miless it has recently become flagrant. When, however, a 
church member shall commit an offence, after removing to a 
place far distant from his former residence, and where his con- 
nection with the Church is unknown, in consequence of which 
circumstances process cannot be instituted within the time 
above specified, the recent discovery of the church member- 
ship of the individual shall be considered as equivalent to the 
offence itself having recently become flagrant. The same 
principle, in like circumstances, shall also apply to ]\Iinisters. 

The principle is that, if the Church neglects to 
commence process against scandal (which is any 
flagrant public offence of practice bringing disgrace 
on the Church) within a year, she is debarred 
from thereafter doing it. This is not to shield the 
offender, but to incite to the prompt prosecution of 
such offences. Offences not so serious or scandal- 
ous the Church may bear with the longer while 
seeking to prevent scandal ; but for no considera- 
tion is the Church to tolerate such offences as are 
scandalous. 



CHAPTEE YII. 

Special Bules PERTAiNiNa to Peocess Before 

Sessions. 

The first paragraph defines the scope of original 
jurisdiction belonging to the Session; the second 
points out the course to be followed in cases of 
contumacy; the third gives a special rule on this 
subject in cases of gross crime or heresy; and 
the fourth authorizes the Session to prevent partici- 
pation in the Lord's supper pending the examina- 
tion of charges. 



208 Chap. YII., Paes. 1, 2, 3. 192-194 

192. — I. Process against all church members, other than 
Ministers of the gospel, shall be entered before the Session of 
the church to which such members belong ; except in cases 
in which the Session is rendered incapable of exercising juris- 
diction, in which case process shall be entered before the Pres- 
bytery. 

(Cf. 161.) After process has been entered, the 
court may transfer the case to another Session, 
according to 180, in cases to which that paragraph 
will apply. If a Session considers itself incapable 
in any case, it must refuse to let process commence 
before it, assigning its reason. 

193. — II. When an accused person, having been twice dul^ 
cited, shall refuse to appear before the Session, or, appearing, 
shall refuse to plead, the court shall enter upon its records the 
facts, together with the nature of the offence charged, and he 
shall be suspended from sealing ordinances for his contumacy. 
This sentence shall be made public, and shall in no case be re. 
moved until he has not only repented of his contumacy, but 
given satisfaction in relation to the charges against him. 

The entry upon the records is the "sentence" 
which is to be published ; and the court should be 
careful in making it up. The court is allowed to 
put merely the nature of the offence in the sen- 
tence, omitting the details ; but it may, in its dis- 
cretion, copy the whole indictment into the sen- 
tence. If the accused repents of his contumacy, 
he then has the right to plead to* the indictment as 
if he had not been contumacious ; that is, if he sat- 
isfies the court concerning his contumacy. Should 
he plead "not guilty," the trial will proceed. But 
he remains suspended until his acquittal, or, if 
convicted, until the censure of the court for the 
offence charged in the indictment is exhausted. 

194.— III. If the charge be one of gross crime or heresy, 



195 CHAr. TIL, Pars. 3, 4. 209 

and the accused persist in his contumacy, the court may pro- 
ceed to inflict the highest censure. 

Otherwise, one could always escape excommuni- 
cation by being contumacious. The principle 
underlying these regulations may be stated thus : 
refusal to honor the court's citations or to plead at 
its bar — that is, refusal to recognize the court — is 
itself a sin against the Church and its Head so 
serious as to call for suspension, whether there is 
any other offence or not; and that persistence in 
this sin raises a presumption of guilt in respect to 
the charge of the indictment, a presumption strong 
enough to require the court to act upon it when 
the offence charged is so grave as to require ex- 
communication for the honor of religion. It is as- 
sumed that there can be no trial in the absence of 
the accused; but the commencement of process is 
always preceded by inquiry that has resulted in 
the commencement of process. 

195. — IV. When it is impracticable immediately to com- 
mence process against an accused church member, the Session 
may, if it think the edification of the church requii-es it, prevent 
fhe accused from approaching the Lord's table until the charges 
against him can be examined. 

This is an extreme measure, to be resorted to 
only when the known evidence is strong, and the 
offence is such that for the accused to communi- 
cate before his guilt or innocence is established 
will bring reproach upon the Church as permitting 
it. It would be inexcusable in a Session to pro- 
long this prudential suspension from the Lord's 
table without immediately instituting process or 
beginning investigation. Ordinarily, this pruden- 
tial measure will be taken privately. 
14 



210 Chap. VIII., Pars. 1, 2. 196 

CHAPTER YIII. 

Special Rules Pertaining to Process Against a 
Minister. 

Paragraph 1 points out the court of first re- 
sort ; paragraph 2 raises a caution in protection of 
Ministers; and paragraph 3 directs how Ministers 
guilty of private offences should be dealt with. 
The fourth paragraph contains the rule in case of 
contumacy. Paragraph 5 distinguishes offences of 
principle into the more and the less grave ; para- 
graph 6 asserts the Presbytery's duty toward Min- 
isters in removing the scandal of lighter infirmi- 
ties; paragraph 7 guards against a Minister's es- 
caping with too light a censure by confession ; and 
paragraph 8 enjoins due caution in removing cen- 
sure of suspension or deposition from Ministers. 
The ninth paragraph deals with the censured Min- 
ister's relation to his church, if a Pastor ; and the 
tenth paragraph gives the special rule for divesti- 
ture. 

196. — I. Process against a Minister shall be entered before 
the Presbytery of which he is a member. 

197. — II. As no Minister ought, on accomit of his office, to 
be screened in his sin, or lightly censured, so scandalous 
charges ought not to be received against him on slight grounds. 

The very fact that Presbyteries ought to feel 
most sensitively the importance of preserving the 
good name of Ministers justifies the fear that, on 
the one hand, they may be tempted to screen of- 
fenders, and, on the other hand, that they may be 
tempted to pay undue attention to charges not 
well grounded. 



198, 199 Chap. VIII., Paks. 3, 4. 211 

198. — III. If any one know a Minister to be guilty of a pri- 
vate offence, he should warn him in private. But if the offence 
be persisted in, or become public, he should bring the case to 
the attention of some other Minister of the Presbytery for his 
advice. 

Any one proposing to be a voluntary prosecutor 
would be disqualified if he bad failed to comply 
with these requirements. (Cf. also 165.) If the 
"any one" here spoken of is himself a Minister, 
the paragraph may not be disregarded by him; 
and he must not proceed beyond private remon- 
strance without first taking the advice of some 
other Minister of the Presbytery. The aim of the 
paragraph is to save the offender without bringing 
scandal on the Church. 

199. — lY. If a Minister accused of an offence, having been 
twice duly cited, shall refuse to appear before the Presbytery, 
he shall be immediately suspended. And if, after another cita- 
tion, he still refuse to attend, he shall be deposed as contuma- 
cious, and suspended or excommunicated from the Church. 
Record shall be made of the Judgment and of the charges 
under which he was arraigned, and the sentence shall be made 
public. 

As, in the second citation, he was given notice 
that, if he did not appear, or, appearing, did not 
plead, he would be dealt with for contumacy ac- 
cording to this paragraph (see par. 177j, we must 
understand here "or refuse to plead" after "refuse 
to appear." After the second citation in the case 
of a private member, the Session suspends him and 
publishes sentence ; but in the case of a Minister, 
the Presbytery suspends (from the ministry), and 
issues a third citation. After this third citation, 
the Minister is suspended or excommunicated from 
sealing ordinances, having been already suspended 
from office ; and then the sentence is made public. 



212 Chap. VIII., Pars. 5, 6. 200, 201 

The Presbytery may publish the sentence without 
publishing even the nature of the charges (except 
so far as the sentence itself makes known the 
charges or their nature). If the accused is sus- 
pended after the third citation, there is no pro- 
vision for proceeding afterward to deposition and 
excommunication without a trial. The difference 
between the Minister and the other sort of church 
member is this : the church member can only be 
suspended for contumacy at first, but may after- 
wards be excommunicated and deposed without 
trial if the contumacy continue (194) ; and the 
Minister may be excommunicated after the third 
citation without trial, but not later if not then. 
The Minister must be deposed after the third cita- 
tion. 

200. — V. Heresy and schism may be of such a nature as to 
warrant deposition; but errors ouglit to be carefully consid- 
ered, whether they strike at the vitals of religion, and are in- 
dustriously spread, or whether they arise from the weakness 
of the human understanding, and are likely to do much injury. 

This paragraph should be observed by the Pres- 
bytery both in instituting or permitting process 
and in fixing the censure after conviction. It is 
constitutional to let men remain in the ministry 
with erroneous views, provided said views do not 
strike at the vitals of religion and are not industri- 
ously spread. If a view does logically strike at the 
vitals of religion, but is not industriously spread, 
and. does not practically destroy the piety or use- 
fulness, of the Minister, it may be tolerated. But 
in the case of the Minister especially, the influence 
of his views upon his teaching must be considered. 

201. — VI. If the Presbytery find on trial that the matter 



202, 203 Chap. VIII., Pars. 6, 7, 8. 213 

complained of amounts to no more than such acts of infirmity 
as may be amended, so that little or nothing remains to hinder 
the Minister's usefulness, it shall take all prudent measures to 
remove the scandal. 

All are subject to infirmity, and any Minister's 
usefulness is liable to be injured or destroyed by 
the malicious or inconsiderate exaggeration of his 
failings, when, on the whole, he is really a well- 
qualified Minister. 

202. — VII. When a Minister, pending a trial, shall make 
confession, if the matter be flagitious, such as drunkenness, 
uncleanness, or crimes of a higher nature, however penitent he 
may appear to the satisfaction of all, the court shall, without 
delay, 'suspend him from the exercise of his office, or depose 
him from the ministry. 

Confession shall not save him from deposition, 
or, at least, from suspension from ofiice ; for disci- 
pline is not only for the reformation of the of- 
fender, but also for the honor of religion. 

203. — VIII. A Minister suspended or deposed for scandal- 
ous conduct shall not be restored, even on the deepest sorrow 
for his sin, until he shall exhibit for a considerable time such 
an eminently exeniplary, humble, and edifying walk and con- 
versation as shall heal the wound made by his scandal. And 
a deposed Minister shall in no case be restored until it shall 
appear that the general sentiment of the Church is strongly in 
his favor, and demands his restoration ; and then only by the 
court inflicting the censure, or with its consent. 

If scandalous conduct was the ground of sus- 
pension or deposition, there shall be no restoration 
until his behavior removes the scandal ; and after 
deposition, whether the deposition was for conduct 
or doctrine, there shall be no restoration until both 
the general sentiment of the Church demands it 
and the original court consents thereto. This 
court is the more likely to know whether the re- 
formation is likely to be permanent. 



214 Chap. YIII., Pars. 9, 10. 204, 205 

204.— IX, When a Minister is deposed his church shall be 
declared vacant; but when he is suspended, it shall be left to 
the discretion of Presbytery whether the sentence shall include 
the dissolution of the pastoral relation. 

205. — X. Whenever a Minister of the gospel shall habitu- 
ally fail to be engaged in the regular discharge of his official 
functions, it shall be the duty of the Presbytery, at a stated 
meeting, to inquire into the cause of such dereliction, and if 
necessary to institute judicial proceedings against him for 
breach of his covenant engagements. If it shall appear that 
his neglect proceeds only from his want of acceptance to the 
Church, Presbytery may, upon the principles upon which it 
withdraws license from a Probationer, for want of evidence of 
the Divine call, divest him of his office without censure, even 
against his will, a majority of two-thirds being necessary for 
this purpose. 

In such a case the clerk shall, under the order of the Pres- 
bytery, forthwith deliver to the individual concerned a written 
notice that, at the next stated meeting, the question of his 
being so dealt with is to be considered. This notice shall dis- 
tinctly state the grounds for this proceeding. The party thus 
notified shall be heard in his own defence; and if the decision 
pass against him he may appeal, as if he had been tried after 
the usual forms. 

Whenever there is the habitual neglect, it is the 
duty of Presbytery to make inquiry, which is tanta- 
mount to an investigation under 162. This investi- 
gation must issue in failure to raise a strong 
presumption of habitual neglect, or in raising a 
strong presumption of such neglect. When it re- 
sults in raising such presumption, then the Pres- 
bytery must either institute judicial process, if the 
neglect does not appear to proceed from want of 
acceptance, or give notice of proceedings to divest 
without censure. The party, when heard in his 
own defence, may be allowed to introduce evidence 
of his attention to his calling and of his accept- 
ance; and in case of appeal or complaint, the 
record of such evidence should be sent up. It 
would not be improper for the Presbytery to ap- 



205 Chap. IX. 215 

point some one to present the evidence for the 
neglect and want of acceptability. The essential 
difference between this procedure and a judicial 
trial, process, lies in the absence of censure. 

This principle may apply, mutatis mutandis, to Ruling 
Elders and Deacons. 

That is, for Minister substitute Euling Elder or 
Deacon, and for Presbytery substitute Session. 

This divests of office ; paragraph 113 and para- 
graphs 126 and 128 dissolve official relations with- 
out divesting of office. One divested of office could 
not resume his office without re-ordination. 



CHAPTEE IX. 

Of Evidence. 



Paragraph 1 shows who are competent witnesses, 
but paragraph 2 exempts husband and wife from 
testifying against each other. Paragraph 3 lays 
down the rule requiring corroborative evidence, 
and paragraph 4 contains a regulation that aims to 
make witnesses independent of each other. Para- 
graph 5 prescribes the method of examining wit- 
nesses ; 6, the form of oath or affirmation ; and 7, 
the method of recording the testimony. Paragraph 
8 shows how the records of one court are to be 
authenticated to another; paragraph 9, the value 
of such authenticated testimony; and paragraph 
10, how testimony may be taken in the absence of 
the court. Paragraph 11 secures the use of the 
members of the court as witnesses, and paragraph 
12 the use of all church officers and members as 



216 Chap. IX., Paes. 1, 2, 3. 206-208 

witnesses. And paragraph 13 regulates the use of 
new evidence after trial, and paragraph 14 after 
appeal. 

. 206. — I. All persons of proper age and intelligence are 
competent witnesses, except such as do not believe in the ex- 
istence of God, or a future state of rewards and punishments. 
The accused party may be allowed, but shall not be compelled, 
to testify; but the accuser shall be required to testify, on the 
demand of the accused. Either party has the right to chal- 
lenge a witness whom he believes to be incompetent, and the 
court shall examine and decide upon his competency. It 
belongs to the court to judge of the degree of credibility to be 
attached to all evidence. 

Accuser here must be interpreted to mean the prose- 
cutor. The only grounds of challenge of a witness 
are too great youth, too little intelligence (i. e., 
ability), lack of belief in God, or lack of belief in 
a future state of rewards and punishments. The 
accused cannot be debarred from testifying. 

207. — II. A husband or wife shall not be compelled to bear 
testimony the one against the other in any court. 

A husband or wife may be cited, but it is optional 
with such an one to testify or not ; and the citation 
should so state. This regulation protects the mar- 
riage relation from disturbance by inquisition even 
of the Church itself. 

208. — III. The testimony of more than one witness shall 
be necessary in order to establish any charge ; yet if, in addi- 
tion to the testimony of one witness, corroborative evidence be 
produced, the offence may be considered to be proved. 

It may be so considered, not must be; for the 
court, judging of the credibility of evidence (206), 
might not believe a witness or a number of wit- 
nesses. The testimony of more than one witness, 
or of one witness and corroborative evidence, is 
necessary to prove each charge, each separate fact 



209-211 Chap. IX., Paes. 4, 5, 6. 217 

alleged, in the indictment. This rule setting the 
denial of the accused in counterpoise with the as- 
sertion of any single witness, and so protecting 
innocence, may also shield guilt, and even known 
guilt, from judicial conviction ; and this limitation 
should be remembered before judicial prosecution 
is begun. 

209.^ — IV. JSTo witness afterward to be examined, except a 
member of the court, shall be present during the examination 
of another witness on the same case if either party objects. 

Members of the court must remain in order to hear 
the evidence; but there may be danger that the 
listening witness will suffer his testimony to be in- 
fluenced by the testimony that he hears. For this 
reason it may be advisable to take the testimony 
with all excluded but the court and the parties and 
the witness testifying, and to keep the testimony 
secret pending the trial. 

210. — V. Witnesses shall be examined, first by the party 
introducing them, then cross-examined by the opposite party, 
after which any member of the court, or either party, may put 
additional interrogatories. But no question shall be put or 
answered except by permission of the Moderator, subject to an 
appeal to the court; and the court shall not permit questions 
frivolous or irrelevant to the charge at issue. 

Here an appeal is allowed directly from the Mod- 
erator of the Session to the Session, otherwise the 
trial might be made inextricably complicated. 

211. — YI. The oath or affirmation to a witness shall be ad- 
ministered by the INIoderator in the following or like terms: 
"You solemnly promise, in the presence of God, that you will 
declare the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth, 
according to the best of your knowledge in the matter in which 
you are called to witness, as you shall answer it to the great 
Judge of quick and dead." If, however, at any time a witness 
should present himself before the court, who, for conscientious 



218 Chap. IX., Paes. 7, 8, 9, 10. 212-215 

reasons, prefers to swear or affirm in any other manner he 
should be allowed to do so. 

But in no case should one be allowed to testify at 
all without agreeing to tell the truth, the whole 
truth and nothing but the truth, in answer to all 
questions that he answers. 

212.— VII. Every question put to a witness shall, if re- 
quired, be reduced to writing. When answered, it shall, to- 
gether with the answer, be recorded, if deemed by the court, 
or by either party, of sufficient importance, and the testimony 
of the witness shall be read to him for his approbation and 
subscription. 

No question is " put to a witness " until it has been 
approved as a proper question to be put. If re- 
quired by either party or the court, it is then to be 
reduced to writing before being answered. Then, 
when the answer is given, the answer with the ques- 
tion must be recorded, if the court or either party 
desires it. When the testimony of a witness is all 
finished, he shall hear, revise and subscribe so 
much as goes on record. 

213. — YIII. The records of a court, or any part of them, 
whether original or transcribed, if regularly authenticated by 
the Moderator and Clerk, or by either of them, shall be deemed 
good and sufficient evidence in every other court. 

(Cf. 56 and 88.) 

214. — IX. In like manner, testimony taken before one court 
and regularly certified, shall be received by every other' court 
as no less valid than if taken by itself. 

It may not have the same weight, but is no less 
valid. 

215.— X. When it is not convenient for the court to have 
the whole, or perhaps any part of the testimony in any par- 
ticular cause, taken in its presence, a commission shall be 
appointed to take the testimony in question, which shall be 



215 Chap. IX., Par. 10. 219 

considered as if taken in the presence of the court ; of which 
comission, and of the time and place of its meeting, due notice 
shall be given to the opposite party, that he may have an 
opportunity of attending. And if the accused shall desire, on 
his part, to take testimony at a distance, for his own exculpa- 
tion, he shall give notice to the court of the time and place at 
which it is proposed to take it, that a commission, as in the 
former case, may be appointed for the purpose. Or the testi- 
mony may be taken on written interrogatories, by filing the same 
with the clerk of the court having Jurisdiction of the cause, and 
giving two weeks' notice thereof to the adverse party, during 
which time he may file cross interrogatories, if he desire it; 
and the testimony shall then be taken by the commission in 
answer to the direct and cross-interrogatories, if such are filed, 
and no notice need be given of the time and place of taking the 
testimony. 

If the court refuses to appoint a commission to 
take evidence for the prosecution, the refusal must 
be based upon the ground that it is convenient to 
take the evidence in the presence of the court; 
but the court may refuse to appoint a commission 
to take evidence for the accused without assigning 
this ground. Otherwise, the accused might delay, 
or make practically impossible, the progress of the 
trial by claiming a necessity for taking distant 
evidence. If the court appoints a commission for 
the prosecution, the court fixes the time and place 
of the meeting of the commission, and gives due 
notice to the accused ; but if the court appoints a 
commission for the accused, it does so in compli- 
ance with his request as to time and place. Or, in 
either case, the court may instruct the commission 
to take the testimony by written interrogatories. 
Neither party can take any evidence in any way 
except before the court, or before a commission of 
the court acting as the court, or by filing written 
interrogatories with the clerk to be used by a com- 
mission. In this case the commission shall put 



220 Chap. IX., Paes. 11, 12, 13, 14. 216-219 

the interrogatories to the witnesses, first the direct 
and then the cross interrogatories to each witness, 
observing all the regulations for taking testimony ex- 
cept that no questions are to be put but those filed ; 
but the oath or affirmmation may be administered, 
the questions put, and the answers received, by mail 
or other written communication. 

216. — XL A member of the court shall not be disqualified 
from sitting as a judge by having given testimony in the case, 

217. — XII. An officer or private member of the church re- 
fusing to testify may be censured for contumacy. 

But not for refusing to testify against one's hus- 
band or wife or one's self. And no one can be cen- 
sured for such contumacy except by the court 
having jurisdiction over him, and after conviction 
by process or after confession. 

218. — XIII. If after a trial before any court new testimony 
be discovered, which is supposed to be highly important to the 
exculpation of the accused, it is proper for him to ask, and for 
the court to grant a new trial. 

Even after technical acquittal, the accused may ask 
for a new trial, in order to make his vindication 
more certain. The court has discretion always to 
grant or refuse a request for a new trial, subject to 
appeal or complaint. 

219. — XIV. If, in the prosecution of an appeal, new testi- 
mony be offered, which, in the judgment of the appellate court, 
has an important bearing on the case, it shall be competent 
for that court to refer the cause to the inferior court for a new 
trial; or, with the consent of parties, to take the testimony 
and proceed with the cause. 

In case a new trial is ordered, the recorded evi- 
dence taken in the first trial is valid evidence, if 
the new trial is ordered simply that new evidence 
may be taken and considered. If the new evidence is 



220 Chap. X., Pae. 1. 221 

available before the reviewing court, it would save 
time for that court to take the new evidence and 
render decision and sentence as if the court of first 
resort; hut this cannot be done if either party 
objects. At the same time this court has discre- 
tion to decide the case without sending it back for 
a new trial or taking the new evidence either ; for 
without such discretion it would be possible to 
delay a final decision indefinitely. 



CHAPTEE X. 

Of the Infliction of Church Censures. 

After a preliminary paragraph on the use of the 
different kinds of censure, and one on the spirit 
that should actuate the court in inflicting them, a 
paragraph on each censure follows: admonition, 
definite suspension, indefinite suspension, excom- 
munication, and deposition. 

220. — I Ecclesiastical censures ought to be suited to the 
nature of the offence ; for private offences, censures should be 
administered in the presence of the court alone, or privately, 
by one or more members on its behalf; but for public offences, 
censures should be administered in open session, or publicly 
announced to the church. When there are peculiar and special 
reasons, the court may visit public offences, not very gross in 
their character, with private admonition, or with definite sus- 
pension in private; but the censure of indefinite suspension 
should ordinarily be announced to the church, whilst those of 
excommunication and deposition should be either adminis- 
tered before the church, or else announced to it, at the discre- 
tion of the court. 

Admonition for private offences must be adminis- 
tered either by a committee in private, or before 



222 Chap. X., Pars. 2, 3, 4, 5. 231-224 

the court in private session; all other censures 
must be administered in the presence of the court, 
but whether in open or private session is within 
the discretion of the court. Any censure, except 
private admonition, administered in private session, 
may be announced to the church (or Church, in the 
case of Ministers), and excommunication and dis- 
position must be. 

221.— II. When any member or officer of the Church shall 
be gail^y of a fault deserving censure, the court shall pro- 
ceed with all tenderness, and shall deal with the offending 
brother in the spirit of meekness, the members considering 
themselves, lest they also be tempted. 

(Cf. 172. 

222. — III. The censure of admonition ought to be adminis- 
tered in private, by one or more members, in behalf of the 
court, when the offence is not aggravated, and is known only 
to a few. When the scandal is public, the admonition sha'l be 
administered by the Moderator in the presence of the court, 
and ordinarily shall also be announced in public. 

If administered in public, that is announcement in 
public. 

223. — IV. Definite supension being an exemplary censure, 
ought ordinarily to be either administered in open session, or 
announced to the church. 

*' Ordinarily" leaves the court discretion. The an- 
nouncement is to be made in such way and by 
such agent as the court may order. 

224. — v. The censure of indefinite suspension ought to be 
inflicted with great solemnity, that it may be the means of im- 
pressing the mind of the delinquent with a proper sense of his 
danger, while he stands excluded from the sacraments of the 
Church of the living God, and that with the divine blessing, it 
may lead him to repentance. When the court has resolved to 
pass this sentence, the Moderator shall address the offending 
brother to the following purpose : 

"Whereas, You, A. B. (here describe the person as a Miu- 



225 Chap. X., Pars. 5, G. 22B 

ister, Ruling Elder, Deacon, or private member of the Church), 
are convicted by sufficient proof [or, are guilty by your own con- 
fession ], of the sin of (here insert the offence), we, the Pres- 
bytery [or church Session] of C. D., in the name and by the 
authority of the Lord Jesus Christ, do now declare you sus- 
pended from the sacraments of the Church [and from the exer- 
cise of your office], until you give satisfactory evidence of re- 
pentance." 

To this shall be added such advice or admonition as shall 
be judged necessary, and the whole shall be concluded with 
prayer to Almighty God that he would follow this act of disci- 
pline with his blessing. 

The language " when the court has resolyed to 
pass this sentence," must be taken as equivalent 
to "when the sentence has-been passed" (cf. 225) ; 
and this and all other censures are to be adminis- 
tered at such time and place as the court may de- 
signate, and in such terms as the court has ordered. 
The "and" in the parenthesis "and from the ex- 
ercise of your office," must be taken as equiva- 
lent to ''or" also, since an officer may be sus- 
pended from office without being suspended from 
sealing ordinances. 

225. — YI. When the sentence of excommunication has been 
regularly passed, the Moderator of the Session shall make a 
public statement before the church of the several steps which 
have been taken with respect to the offending brother, and in- 
form them that it has been found necessary to cut him off from 
the communion of the Church. He shall then show the au- 
thority of the Church to cast out unworthy members, from 
Matt, xviii. 15-18 and 1 Cor. v. 1-5, and shall explain the 
nature, use and consequence of this censure, warning the peo- 
ple, that they are to conduct themselves, in all their intercourse 
with him, as is proper toward one who is under the heaviest 
censure of the Church. lie shall then pronounce sentence to 
the following effect : 

" Wheeeas, a. B., a member of this church, has been, by 

sufficient proof, convicted of the sin of , and after much 

admonition and prayer, obstinately refuses to hear the Church, 
and has manifested no evidence of repentance: Therefore, in 



224 Chap. X., Pae. 7. ^26 

the name and by the authority of the Lord Jesus Christ, we, 
the Session of the church of C D., do pronounce him to be ex- 
cluded from the sacraments, and cut off from the fellowship of 
the Church." 

After which prayer shall be made that the blessing of God 
may follow his ordinance, for the conviction and reformation 
of the excommunicated, and for the establishment of all true 
believers. 

For the excommunication of a Minister, see 226. 
Notwithstanding the language here used assumes 
that no one will be excommunicated who confesses 
his fault, yet, unless repentance accompany con- 
fession, the court may excommunicate ; but no one 
is to be excommunicated who manifests repentance. 

226. — VII. The sentence of deposition shall be pronounced 
by the Moderator in words of the following import : 

" Wheeeas, a. B., a Minister of this Presbytery [or a 
Ruling Elder or Deacon of this Church], has been proved, by 

sufficient evidence, to be guilty of the sin of , we, the 

Presbytery [or church Session] of C. D., do adjudge him 
totally disqualified for the office of the Christian ministry [or 
Eldership or Deaconship], and therefore we do hereby, in the 
name and by the authority of the Lord Jesus Christ, depose 
from the office of a Christian Minister [or Elder, or Deacon], 
the said A. B., and do prohibit him from exercising any of the 
functions thereof." 

If the sentence include suspension or excommunication, the 
Moderator shall proceed to say: "We do moreover, by the 
same authority, suspend the said A. B. from the sacraments of 
the Church, until he shall exhibit satisfactory evidence of sin- 
cere repentance,'' or "exclude the said A. B. from the sacra- 
ments, and cut him off from the fellowship of the Church, j 

The sentence of deposition ought to be inflicted with solem- 
nities similar to those already prescribed in the case of excom- 
munieation. 

Notwithstanding the literal implication of the 
language here used, an officer may be deposed upon 
his own confession, and even when he manifests 
repentance (202), but he may not be excommuni- 
cated if he manifests repentance. 



226 Chap. XL 225 

It may be in place here to add the following ob- 
servations : 

1. The censure is always to be inflicted by the 
court having original jurisdiction. If the Presby- 
tery takes the place of the Session, then the Pres- 
bytery is, for that case, the court having original 
jurisdiction. If it should be that the court, whose 
duty it is to inflict the sentence, does not approve 
the sentence, it is bound to obey the court render- 
ing the final decision; but it may disclaim its own 
approval of the sentence even when inflicting it. 

2. The court may appoint any member to act as 
Moderator of the court in administering censure, if 
the Moderator desires it ; but if one finds himself 
required as Moderator to pronounce a sentence 
that he does not himself approve, he may disclaim 
his approval. 

3. A sentence is inflicted when formally pro- 
nounced, whether the condemned person is present 
or not. 

4. No sentence ought to be inflicted until after 
the time within which notice of an appeal can be 
given (258). 

5. The sentence takes effect from its passage 
(subject to 258), whether it is ever formally in- 
flicted or not, the formal infliction being a means 
of grace in addition to the real sentence itself. 



CHAPTER XI. 

Of the Eemoval of Censures. 

The censure of admonition not affecting one's 
standing, and the censure of definite suspension 
15 



226 Chap. XI., Pars. 1, 2. 227, 228 

terminating without further action at the time set, 
nothing is said in this chapter concerning the re- 
moval of these two censures. Paragraph 1 points 
out how the rulers of the church should deal with 
one suspended from the sacraments; and para- 
graph 2, how the court should proceed in restoring 
a suspended ofiender. Paragraph 3 treats of the 
restoration of an excommunicated offender; and 
paragraph 4, of one deposed. Special regulations 
are given in paragraph 5 concerning Elders and 
Deacons restored after deposition ; in paragraph 6, 
concerning the restoration of offenders who have 
removed beyond the reach of the court ; and in 
paragraph 7, concerning the restoration of a de- 
posed Minister. 

227. — I. After any person has been suspended from the 
sacraments, it is proper that the rulers of the church should 
frequently converse with him, as well as pray with him and 
for him, that it would please God to give him repentance. 

Whether a suspended offender is going to be re- 
stored or excommunicated is a pending question, 
and never should the status of suspension be con- 
sidered permanent. He is not yet cut off. 

228. — II. When the court shall be satisfied as to the reality of 
the repentance of a suspended offender, he shall be admitted to 
profess his repentance, either in the presence of the court alone, 
or publicly, and be restored to the sacraments of the Church, 
and to his office, if such be the judgment of the court, which 
restoration shall be declared to the penitent in words of the 
following import: 

"Whereas, You, A. B., have been debarred from the 
sacraments of the Church [and from the office of the gospel 
Ministry, or Eldership, or Deaconship], but have now mani- 
fested such repentance as satisfies the Church, we, the Session 
(or Presbytery) of C. D., do hereby, in the name and by the 
authority of the Lord Jesus Christ, absolve you from the said 
sentence of suspension, and do restore you to the full enjoy- 



229 Chap. XI., Par. 3. 227 



ment of sealing ordinances [and the exercise of your said office, 
and all the functions thereof]." 

After which there shall be prayer and thanksgiving. 

The court is not obliged to restore upon satis- 
factory repentance, since, in some cases, continu- 
ance of suspension may be necessary to remove all 
scandal; nor is restoration to office obliged to 
accompany restoration to the sacraments. The 
" and " at the beginning of each set of brackets 
must be interpreted as equivalent to "or" also. 
Cf. remarks on 224. 

229. — III. When an excommunicated person shall be so 
affected with his state as to be brought to repentance, and to 
desire to be readmitted to the communion of the Church, the 
Session, having obtained sufficient evidence of his sincere re- 
pentance, shall proceed to restore him. In order to which, the 
presiding Minister shall inform the church of the measures 
which have been taken with the excommunicated person, and 
of the resolution of the Session to restore him. 

On the day appointed for his restoration, the Minister shall 
call upon the excommunicated person, and propose to him in 
the presence of the congregation the following questions : 

"Do you, from a deep sense of your great wickedness, 
freely confess your sin in thus rebelling against God, and in 
refusing to hear his Church; and do you acknowledge that 
you have been in justice and mercy cut off from the communion 
of the Church? A?istce7\ — I do. Do you now voluntarily pro- 
fess your sincere repentance and contrition for your sin and 
obstinacy; and do you humbly ask the forgiveness of God and 
his Church? Answe7\ — I do. Do you sincerely promise, 
through divine grace, to live in all humbleness of mind and 
circumspection; and to endeavor to adorn the doctrine of 
God our Saviour, by having your conversation as becometh the 
gospel? Ans'wer. — I do." 

Here the minister shall give the penitent a suitable exhorta- 
tion, encouraging and comforting him. Then he shall pro- 
nounce the sentence of restoration in the following words : 

"Whereas, You, A. B., have been shut out from the com- 
munion of the Church, but have now manifested such repent- 
ance as satisfies the Church ; in the name of the Lord Jesus 
Christ, and by his authority, we, the Session of this church, do 



228 Chap. XI., Par. 3. 229 

declare jou absolved from the sentence of excommunication 
formerly denounced against you ; and we do restore you to the 
communion of the Church, that you may be a partaker of all 
the benefits of the Lord Jesus to your eternal salvation," 

The whole shall be concluded with prayer and thanksgiving. 

Here again it is to be noted that restoration is 
not necessarily to follow immediately after satis- 
factory evidence of repentance. (Remark under 
228.) The presence of the offender in the congre- 
gation is not indispensable, in such a sense that he 
could not be restored while unable to attend ; but 
in that case it should be certified to the church 
publicly that the offender is not able to be present 
and that he has given the right answers to these 
questions. 

It is noteworthy that a suspended member is 
spoken of as suspended (224) or debarred (228) 
from the sacraments of the Church, and an excom- 
municated person as cut off from the communion 
of the Church (225, 229). The suspended offender 
is still a member of the Church, participating in 
the communion of life aad sympathy of the brother- 
hood as one of them, while excluded from the sac- 
raments for the time by way of reproof and in hope 
of his restoration ; but the excommunicated mem- 
ber is no longer a member of the Church. Ought 
he, then, to be baptized at his restoration ? By no 
means ; since his baptism at first did not make him 
a member, but only recognized his membership 
(paragraph 3, remarks) ; and the sin that has un- 
made him a member, ceasing with repentance, 
ceases to effect this result. One does not shake off 
the obligations of membership by being excom- 
municated, but does definitely lose all its privi- 
leges. The suspended loses them tentatively. 



230-233 Chap. XI., Paes. 4, 5, 6. 229 

230. — IV. The restoration of a deposed officer, after public 
confession has been made in a manner similar to that pre- 
scribed in the case of the removal of censure from an excom- 
municated person, shall be announced to him in the following 
form, viz. : 

" Wheeeas, You, A. B., formerly a Minister of this Pres- 
bytery [or a Ruling Elder or Deacon of this church], have been 
deposed from your office, but have now manifested such re- 
pentance as satisfies the Church; in the name of the Lord 
Jesus Christ, and by his authority, we, the Presbytery of C. D. 
[or the Session of this church], do declare you absolved from 
the said sentence of deposition formerly pronounced against 
you; and we furthermore restore you to your said office and 
to the exercise of all the functions thereof, whenever you may 
be orderly called thereunto." 

After which there shall be prayer and thanksgiving, and the 
members of the court shall extend to him the right hand of 
fellowship. 

If an officer is restored to the communion and 
to office at the same time, then it would be proper 
to pronounce first the sentence of restoration at 
the end of 229, and then this sentence of restora- 
tion at the end of 230. 

An officer does not need to be reordained at his 
restoration, the act of restoration being itself the 
undoing of the deposition. 

231. — y. When an Elder or Deacon has been absolved from 
the censure of deposition, he cannot be allowed to resume the 
exercise of his office in the church without re-election by the 
people. 

But when absolved from suspension from office, 
re-election of a Ruling Elder or Deacon, or of a 
Pastor whose pastoral relation was not dissolved, 
is not necessary. When re-election is necessary, 
then also is reinstallation. 

232. — VI. When a person under censure shall remove to a 
part of the country remote from the court by which he was 
sentenced, and shall desire to profess repentance and obtain 
restoration, it shall be lawful for the court, if it deems it ex- 



230 Chap. XI., Paks. 6, 7. 233 

pedient, to transmit a certified copy of its proceedings to tlie 
Session (or Presbytery) where tlie delinquent resides, which 
shall take up the case and proceed with it as though it had 
originated with itself. 

In other words, a member or officer under cen- 
sure may be dismissed from one court to another, 
his exact standing, and the reasons therefor being 
certified ; but the court dismissing a deposed Min- 
ister must certify its consent to his restoration. 
(Par. 203.) 

233. — VII. In proceeding to restore a suspended or deposed 
Minister, it is the duty of the Presbytery to exercise great 
caution; first admitting him to the sacraments, if he has been 
debarred from the same; afterwards granting him the privilege 
of preaching for a season on probation, so as to test the sin- 
cerity of his repentance and the prospect of his usefulness; 
and finally restoring him to his office. But the case shall al- 
ways be suhjudice until the sentence of restoration has been 
pronounced. 

This, of course, does not apply to suspension 
without censure. 

Some observations are here added touching the 
removal of censures. 

1. The court that acts in the removal of censure 
is not a court representing the Church as a judge, 
nor as an accuser, but rather as a parent. Hence, 
all the members of the court not under censure 
have voice and vote therein. 

2. The court cannot remove a censure with- 
out repentance on the part of the offender. 
But if the Church should come to believe that she 
had erred in the sentence of censure, how can she 
rectify her wrong ? By a new trial in the court of 
first resort, if new evidence has been discovered; 
and by reconsideration in the court that passed 
the final sentence. 



234 Chap. XII., Par. 1. 231 

3. The censure is not removed until the sentence 
of removal has been pronounced, after being or- 
dered by the court. 



CHAPTEE XII. 

Of Cases Without Process. 

These are not acts of technical discipline, as 
there is no judicial prosecution; and yet there is 
one part of process whenever a judgment of cen- 
sure is rendered. Process is a means of determin- 
ing whether to use censure, and may be dispensed 
with when not needed for this end. 

Four cases are here enumerated: confession of 
guilt; confession of an unregenerate heart; confes- 
sion of a lack of a call to office ; and renunciation 
of the communion of the Church. 

234. — I. When any person shall come forward and make his 
offence known to the court, a full statement of the facts shall 
be recorded, and judgment rendered without process. 

It is essential that the person intends to confess 
and permit the court to render judgment without 
process. Statements made by him in the presence 
of the court must not be taken as the basis of 
judgment without process except by his consent; 
for that would be to deprive him of his right. And 
the full statement of facts should be approved by 
him as correct before the court proceeds to render 
judgment. Against the judgment rendered the 
person condemned may complain. Of course, the 
words " any person " must be interpreted as mean- 



232 ' Chap. XII., Pak. 2. 235 

ing any person subject to judicial prosecution be- 
fore the particular court. 

235. — II. When a communicating member shall confess be- 
fore the church Session an unregenerate heart, and there is no 
evidence of other offence, the court may transfer his name to 
the roll of non-communicating members, and he shall be faith- 
fully warned of his guilt in disobeying the gospel, and encour- 
aged to seek the redemption freely offered in Christ; and a 
statement of the case shall be made to the church. But this 
action shall not be taken until the church Session has ascer- 
tained, after mature inquiry and due delay, that this confes- 
sion does not result from Satanic temptation or transient 
darkness of spirit. This rule, however, shall not be applied 
to those who wilfully absent themselves from the Lord's table, 
which is always an offence. 

It is fundamental to the interpretation of this par- 
agraph to remember that " communicating mem- 
ber" does not mean merely a member that really 
communicates or partakes of the Lord's supper, 
but any member whose name is on the roll of 
those that have been admitted to the Lord's sup- 
per, whether he communicates or not, therefore in- 
cludes those who habitually absent themselves 
from the Lord's supper. It is manifest that an un- 
regenerate heart is an offence in this case ; for it is 
something in principle and practice contrary to the 
Word of God, is something contrary to the Word cf 
God as interpreted in the standards, and is some- 
thing in the principles or practice of a, church mem- 
ber professing faith in Christ. For up to this con- 
fession of an unregenerate heart, the member was 
professing faith in Christ, the confession on which ho 
was admitted to the communion of the Church still 
continuing until by this confession withdrawn. But 
if there is no evidence of other offence, the court 
may transfer his name to the roll of non-communi- 



235 Chap. XII., Par. 2. 233 

eating members. This is not admonition, for ad- 
monition is to be added to this, and mere admoni- 
tion would not affect his standing or status as a 
member. It is not suspension, for that does not 
transfer his name from the roll of communicating 
members. It is not excommunication, for it is not 
for "gross crime or heresy, when the offender 
shows himself incorrigible and contumacious." 
But it is essentially suspension, since it does, like 
suspension, exclude from the sacraments. It is 
censure, but it is unique. It is the Church putting 
back one of its children under that censure under 
which she holds all of them that have come to 
years of discretion, at the same time with the ac- 
knowledgment that the Church's sole reason for this 
action is a confessed unregenerate heart. Suspen- 
sion tentatively, and excommunication permanently, 
puts the offender under the same censure, but upon 
other grounds. 

A statement of the case shall be made to the 
church. If one is not willing to have this state- 
ment made, he is not willing to confess ffar enough 
to preserve the Church from scandal at his absent- 
ing himself from the Lord's table. He is still 
willing to remain in a false light to some. 

Since one may be led to make this confession, 
either by some extraordinary temptation of Satan, 
or by disease, when one is yet really regenerate, 
Sessions are to take due time and caution before 
acting lest they countenance a sinful disclaimer of 
that faith which one really has, or their action 
may make to the hurt of one already wounded. 

"This rule" must mean the rule stated in 
the first sentence of the paragraph of which the 



284 Chap. XII., Par. 2. 236 

second sentence is simply a modification. The 
"however" refers to the second sentence, and im- 
plies that, however completely absent may be all 
evidence of special Satanic temptation, or tran- 
sient darkness of spirit, still this transfer is not to 
be made npon confession of an unregenerate heart, 
in any case where the party wilfully absents him- 
self from the Lord's table. This is always an of- 
fence, and hence it is "other offence" than simply 
an unregenerate heart. If the absence from the 
Lord's table appears to be due to scruples growing 
out of uncertainty as to the person's right to com- 
municate, to be reluctant rather than wilful, then 
it is not to be considered an offence, and does not 
stand in the way of this transfer. And the Session 
is not bound to transfer, even when there is no evi- 
dence of other offence, and no "Satanic tempta- 
tion or temporary darkness of spirit." The rule is 
not intended for any but those w^ho, otherwise ex- 
emplary in their behavior, are, from a sense of 
their sin in not accepting Christ, constrained to 
deny themselves the privilege of communicating, 
and will be most likely won in this way. If there 
are other offences, regular suspension or excom- 
munication should be the censure used, and one of 
these may be used even when there is no evidence 
of other offence. Whenever one makes this confes- 
sion, the Session has a confession of an offence, a 
special case under paragraph 1 ; and the transfer, 
suspension, or excommunication must follow, after 
due delay, unless the court remains in doubt 
whether the confession proceeds from mistake. 

This is not a convenient way for the disobedient 
or dissatisfied to free themselves from the obliga- 



236 Chap. XII. Pae. 3. 235 

tions of church membership. This cannot be done. 
Their vows and covenants are between them and 
Christ, and there is no release from them in any 
way or at any time whatever. There is no way to 
get out of the Church ; for even the excommuni- 
cated are still members. They are members ex- 
cluded from the communion of the Church, but 
with the ligament of obligation still uncut. 

236. — III. A Minister of the gospel, against whom there 
are no charges, if fully satisfied in his own conscience that God 
has not called him to the ministry, or if he has satisfactory 
evidence of his inability to serve the Church with acceptance, 
may report these facts at a stated meeting. At the next stated 
meeting, if after full deliberation the Presbytery shall concur 
with him in judgment, it may divest him of his office without 
censure, and shall assign him membership in some particular 
church. This provision shall in like manner apply, mutatis 
mutandis, to the case of Ruling Elders and Deacons ; but in all 
such cases the Session of the church to which the Elder or 
Deacon who seeks demission belongs shall act as the Presby- 
tery acts in similar cases where a Minister is concerned. 

This provision for demission of office makes mani- 
fest that ordination does not put one, or recognize 
one as being, in an unchangeable status or in a 
fixed relation of obligation or dignity. Ordination 
is not an indelible mark. Therefore, if one divested 
of his office should be again put into the same 
office, it would be proper to ordain him again. 

To divest of office, as here provided, is not the 
same as to dissolve official relations, as provided in 
113 and 128. An officer whose official relations to 
a particular church are dissolved is still in the 
office in relation to the Church generally ; but one 
divested of his office has henceforth no official rela- 
tion, either to a particular church or to the Church 
generally. Hence the court may divest without 
consulting the particular church. 



236 Chap. XII., Par. 4. 237 

Three elements should concur in a call to the 
office, the man's inward conviction, the acceptance 
of him by the people, and the approval of the 
court. When one or both of the first two ele- 
ments seem to be lacking, then the man himself 
or the court (205) may raise the question whether 
the man is really called of God ; but if he requests 
the action, the court divests by a majority vote, 
whereas, if the court proceeds against his will, it 
requires a two-thirds vote to divest (205). 

237. — IV. When a member or officer shall renounce the 
communion of this Church by Joining some other evangelical 
Church, if in good standing, the irregularity shall be recorded, 
and his name erased. But if charges are pending against him, 
they shall be communicated to the church which he has Joined. 
If the denomination be heretical, an officer shall have his 
name stricken from the roll, and all authority to exercise his 
office derived from this Church shall be withdrawn from him ; 
but a private member shall not be otherwise noticed than as 
above prescribed. 

This Church is a distinct "communion" in the 
sense that all its members have a certain com- 
munion with one another that they do not have 
with members of other denominations; but it is 
not out of communion with all other denominations 
in a broader sense. When, then, a member of this 
communion joins another communion he passes 
out of this communion, in the special sense in 
which the word is used here. The regular way of 
doing this is by obtaining testimonials for that 
purpose from the proper authorities of this Church 
(Chap. XV.); and if done without first obtaining 
such testimonials, it is an irregularity, and an ir- 
regularity so serious as to receive here the epithet 
of renouncing the communion of this Church. 



238 Chap. XIII., Par. 1. 237 

In all cases, the fact is to be recorded and the 
name erased from our rolls. If charges are pend- 
ing against him, they shall be communicated to the 
church or Church to which the renouncing mem- 
ber has gone. If he is an officer and that denomi- 
nation is heretical, all authority to exercise his 
office shall be withdrawn, whether there are any 
charges to communicate or not. Charges are 
"pending," if they have been already presented to 
the proper court before information of the renuncia- 
tion, and had not been finally disposed of ; and 
charges may be considered as "pending" if already 
known, although no formal notice had been taken 
of them. 



CHAPTER XIII. 

Of the Modes in Which a Cause May be Carried 
FROM A Lower to a Higher Court. 

A cause is not necessarily a case of judicial pro- 
cedure. The chapter begins by defining the scope 
and modes of review by higher courts, and the 
right of members of the inferior court to sit as 
members of the higher court. Then the body of 
the chapter falls into four sections, one on each of 
the four ways in which causes may be carried up. 

238. — I. Every decision which is made by any church court, 
except the highest, is subject to the review of a superior court, 
and may be iDrought before it by general review and control, 
reference, appeal, or complaint. 

There is always some way to bring into a higher 
court whatever has been done or neglected by an 
inferior court, so that everything is done by the 



238 Chap. XIII., Par. 2 ; Sec. I. 239 

whole Church through the court whose action is 
permitted to stand as final ; for every action of a 
court is either the action of the Church in the 
General Assembly, or may be brought there for 
approval or disapproval. 

339. — II. When a matter is transferred in any of these 
ways from an inferior to a superior court, the members of the 
the inferior court shall not lose their right to sit, deliberate, 
and vote in the case in the higher courts, except that either of . 
the original parties may challenge the right of any member of 
the inferior court to sit, which question shall be decided by 
the vote of allthose members of the superior court who are not 
members of the inferior. 

The only ground on which such a challenge can 
base itself is that the persons challenged are them- 
selves a party, or for some other reason are inca- 
pacitated to be considered judicially competent. 
But even in the case of process against an inferior 
court, the members of that court are not parties, 
but only the court in the person or persons of its 
representatives appointed to appear for it in the 
case. 

Section I. — Of General Remew and Control. 

The first four paragraphs, having to do with the 
review of the records, define the obligation of the 
inferior court to send up its records ; what ques- 
tions the higher court is to ask in its examination 
of the records ; what action the higher court shall 
take by way of correction ; and what limitation is 
put to its power of revision. The fifth paragraph 
asserts the power of the reviewing court to go out- 
side of the records. And the two remaining sec- 
tions treat of process against a court, the last par- 
ticularly prescribing the rules of such process after 
the citation. 



240-'41 Chap. XIII., Sec. I., Pars. 1, 2. 239 

240. — I. It is the duty of every court above a churcn Ses- 
sion, at least once a year, to review the records of the proceed- 
ings of the courts next below. 

The Assembly reviews the records of each of the 
Synods; each Synod, the records of each of its 
Presbyteries; and each Presbytery, the records of 
the Session of each of its churches. 

And if any low^er court shall omit to send up its records fo 
this purpose, the higher court may issue an order to produce 
them, either immediately, or at a particular time, as circum 
stances may require. 

Incidentally, this assumes that a superior court 
may order the court next below it to convene at 
any time and place. 

241.— II. In reviewing the i-ecords of an inferior court, it is 
proper to examine: First, Whether the proceedings have been 
constitutional and regular; Secondly, Whether they have been 
wise, equitable, and for the edification of the Church; Thirdly^ 
Whether they have been correctly recorded; Fourthly, Whe- 
ther the lawful injunctions of the superior courts have been 
obeyed. 

While practically the superior court must usually 
make this examination through committees, these 
committees should be so selected that they will be 
superior in wisdom in each case to the court whose 
records they are to review. 

An act may be constitutional in the main, but 
have been taken in disregard of certain regulations 
of the Constitution ; irregular, then, means uncon- 
stitutional in a minor sense, that is, contrary to less 
important requirements of the Constitution. In 
all cases of unconstitutionality the fact is to be re- 
corded in the review, even if the superior court 
should itself be persuaded that the more funda- 
mental principles of the Constitution required the 



240 Chap. XITI., Sec. I., Pae. 8. 342 

action in contravention of its subordinate regula- 
tions. But even actions that are constitutional, 
that is, that are by the Constitution put in the dis- 
cretion of the court, may not be advisable. When, 
therefore, an action is found to be constitutional 
and regular, it remains to inquire whether it is 
wise, and especially whether it is equitable ; for 
foolish regularity and unjust constitutionality are 
prejudicial to the true edification of the Church. 
An action which is unobjectionable may not be 
correctly recorded; and this should always be 
noted, with an intelligible explanation of what the 
correct record would be. And the court may have 
done nothing objectionable, but may have omitted 
to obey lawful injunctions; and such neglect of 
obedience should never be passed over in silence 
by the superior court. It is important, indeed, 
that superior courts abstain from commanding, 
except where they have authority and reason for 
enjoining; but when they lay an injunction they 
should see that it is obeyed ; otherwise, the unity 
and efficient working of the Church are impaired. 

The feeling that the thorough examination and 
criticisim of the records of lower courts is merely 
perfunctory, a thing to be committed to such mem- 
bers of the superior court as may not be wise 
enough to take in hand more serious matters, must 
work great loss ; and, on the other hand, thorough- 
ness and wisdom here, without hypercriticism, of 
course, would be a great help to lower courts and 
a great gain to the harmonious and successful 
working of our system. 

242. — III. In most cases the superior court may be consid- 
ered as fulfilling its duty by simply recording on its own minutes 



243, 244 Chap. XIII., Sec. I., Pars. 4, 5. 241 

the approval, the correction of proceedings, or the censure 
wliich it may think proper to pass on the records under re- 
view ; and also by making an entry of the same in the book 
reviewed. But should any irregular proceedings be found, 
such as demand the interference of the superior court, the in- 
ferior court may be required to review and correct them. 

The action of an inferior court that is constitu- 
tional, however unwise, the inferior court cannot 
be required to review and correct, unless such 
action is brought before the superior court in some 
other way than by general review and control; 
but the superior court may record its disapproval. 
Disobedience to lawful injunctions of higher courts 
is irregular or unconstitutional. 

243. — IV. In cases of process, however, no judgment of an 
inferior court shall be reversed unless it be regularly brought 
up by appeal or complaint. 

However unconstitutional the judgment may be, 
the superior court cannot reverse it (or annul it) 
under general review and control, though it may 
censure such judgment and even institute process 
against the inferior court on the ground of it. (245.) 
If, however, the case is coming before the review- 
ing court by appeal or complaint, no opinion should 
be expressed on the case in its general review. 

244. —V. Courts may sometimes entirely neglect to per- 
form their duty, by which neglect heretical opinions or corrupt 
practices may be allowed to gain ground; or offenders of a 
very gross character may be suffered to escape ; or some cir- 
cumstances in their proceedings of very great irregularity may 
not be distinctly recorded by them ; in any of which cases 
their records will by no means exhibit to the superior court a 
full view of their proceedings. If, therefore, the next superior 
court be well advised that any such neglect or irregularity has 
occurred on the part of the inferior court, it is incumbent on it 
to take cognizance of the same, and to examine, deliberate and 



242 Chap. XIII., Sec. I., Par. 6 245 



judge in the whole matter as completely as if it had been re- 
corded, and thus brought up by the review of the records. 

That is, in reviewing the proceedings of an infe- 
rior court, the superior court, proceeding upon 
sufficient evidence outside of the records, may re- 
cord in its own and the inferior court's records, or 
send down to the inferior court, such corrections, 
censures and orders as if the full evidence had 
been in the records. 

245. — VI. When any court having appellate Jurisdiction 
shall be advised, either by the records of the court next below, 
or by memorial, either with or without protest, or by any 
other satisfactory method, of any important delinquency or 
grossly unconstitutional proceedings of such court, the first 
step shall be to cite the court alleged to have offended to ap- 
pear by representative or in writing, at a specified time and 
place, and to show what it has done or failed to do in the case 
in question. The court thus issuing the citation may reverse 
or redress the proceedings of the court below in other than 
judicial cases ; or it may censure the delinquent court ; or it 
may remit the whole matter to the delinquent court, with an 
injunction to take" it up and dispose of it in a constitutional 
manner; or it may stay all further proceedings in the case, as 
circumstances may require. 

In the exercise of general review and control the 
superior court may go so far as to enter upon the 
records of the inferior court a censure of the re- 
cords (but not of the court), or send to the inferior 
court an order to review and redress irregular pro- 
ceedings; but in the exercise of its jurisdiction 
by process the superior court may censure the in- 
ferior court (and not its records merely), and may 
itself reverse and redress the proceedings (in 
other than judicial cases) instead of ordering the 
inferior court to reconsider and correct them. But 
the superior court is not obliged to redress wrongs 
by its own action ; it may order the court to do so, 



246 Chap. XIII., Sec. I., Par. 7, Sec. II. 243 

or to stop a wrong proceeding. And, of course, 
the result of process against an inferior court may 
be its acquital altogether. Three things should be 
borne in mind concerning the power of a superior 
court to try a next inferior court : first, the infe- 
rior court cannot be tried for its action as a court 
in deciding or conducting a judicial case, since 
judicial cases can come before the higher court 
only by reference, appeal or complaint ; the lower 
court may be censured, but not its members, since 
the individual cannot be tried except in the court 
having original jurisdiction over him ; and no in- 
ferior court may be censured except after convic- 
tion on regular trial, any more than an individual. 

246 — VII. In process against an inferior court, the trial 
shall be conducted according to the rules provided for process 
against individuals, so far as they may be practicable. 

Of the rules in Chap. VI., 173-78 are superseded 
by 245 ; 179 and 180 are not applicable, nor 191 ; 
and instead of 190 it lies in the nature of the case 
that the accused court must be represented by one 
or more persons appointed by itself or, in case of 
its failure to answer citation, by the superior court, 
and said counsel must have membership in one or 
both the courts. The general rules of evidence 
will be the same as in the trial of individuals. 

Section II. — Of References. 

The first paragraph defines reference, and the 
second paragraph states what are proper subjects 
of reference; the third paragraph prescribes the 
objects of references, and the fourth the effect of 
references upon the cases referred ; the fifth para- 
graph discourages the resort to references; the 
16 



244 Chap. XIII., 8ec. II., Paes. 1, 2, 3. 247-'49 

sixth gives liberty of abstaining from action to the 
superior court, and the seventh limits the right of 
referring to any but to the next highest court ; and 
the eighth paragraph requires proper records to 
be sent up. 

247. — I. A reference is a representation of a matter not yet 
decided, made by an inferior to a superior court, which repre- 
sentation ought always to be in writing. 

Cf. 77:2. A matter decided goes to the superior 
court in the regular records sent up for general 
review, and may also be brought there by appeal 
or complaint; but the court itself, instead of 
making a decision, may refer the question. This 
applies also to judicial cases, and the court may 
refer without consent of parties; but the parties 
must be heard in the superior court just as in the 
inferior court on the same question. 

248. — II. Cases which are new, important, difficult or of 
peculiar delicacy, the decision of which may establish princi- 
ples or precedents of extensive influence; on which the senti- 
ments of the inferior court are greatly divided ; or on which 
for any reason it is desirable that a superior court should first 
decide, are proper subjects of reference. 

It would be within the discretion of the superior 
court to decline to entertain a reference on the 
ground that it was not a proper case. 

249. — III, References are either for mere advice, prepara- 
tory to a decision by the inferior court, or for ultimate decision 
by the superior court. 

And the inferior court should always distinctly 
state its desire, whether for advice, merely, or for 
an ultimate decision. If the reference asks for 
advice only, the superior court cannot make an 
ultimate decision. 



250-'54 Chap.XIIL,Sec.II.,Paes.4,5,6,7,8. 245 

250. —IV. In the former ease the reference only suspends 
the decision of the court from which it comes ; in the latter, it 
submits the whole case to the final Judgment of the superior 
court. 

251. — V. Although references may, in some cases, be 
proper, yet it is generally conducive to the good of the Church 
that every court should fulfil its duty by exercising its Judg- 
ment. 

A tiling should be done by the appropriate organ ; 
and only when the special distribution of powers 
among the courts adopted in the Form of Govern- 
ment seems really to put a work upon an unfit 
organ, ought references to be resorted to. 

252. — VI. A reference ought, generally, to procure advice 
from the superior court, yet that court is not bound to give a 
final Judgment, but may remit the whole case, either with or 
without advice, to the court by which it was referred. 

The superior is not bound to give a final judgment, 
even when the reference asks for it. 

253. — VII. References by any court are to be made to the 
court immediately superior. 

But the court to which a reference has come may 
refer the same question to the court next above it ; 
but it may not ask the court above it to do more 
than it was itself asked to do ; a court, for instance, 
asked for advice, cannot ask a superior court for 
an ultimate decision. 

254. — VIII. When a court makes a reference, it ought to 
have all the testimony and other documents duly prepared, 
produced, and in perfect readiness, so that the superior court 
may be able to fully consider and issue the case with as little 
difficulty and delay as possible. 

The inferior court may decide at any stage of its 
own consideration to make a reference ; and all the 
testimony, etc., up to that stage should be put in 



246 Chap. XIII., Sec. III., Par. 1. 255 

perfect readiness for the superior court. Mani- 
festly, it is not contemplated that a judicial case will 
be referred before the evidence has all been taken ; 
and yet this is not forbidder,, since the very dffi- 
culty might hang around questions as to the taking 
and admission of evidence. 

Section III. — Of Appeals. 

Six paragraphs regulate the taking of an appeal ; 
and the last six, the disposal of it. After defining 
an appeal, and the parties to whom it is permissi- 
ble, in the first two paragraphs, the section enum- 
erates the grounds upon which an appeal may be 
taken, in the third paragraph. And the fourth 
paragraph gives special regulations concerning the 
notice of appeal, the fifth prescribes to what court 
it may be taken, and the sixth controls the ap- 
pearance of the parties before the superior court. 
Then the last six paragraphs present, first, the 
order of proceedings ; second, the scope of the de- 
cision ; third, when an appellant is to be regarded 
as abandoning his appeal; fourth, what is to be 
done with an appellant manifesting a wrong spirit; 
fifth, what effect the taking of the appeal has on 
the force of the judgment appealed from ; and 
sixth, what shall be done with a court neglecting 
to send up the record of a case. 

255. — I. An appeal is the removal of a cause already de- 
cided, from an inferior to a superior court, the effect of which 
is to arrest sentence until the matter is finally decided. It is 
allowable only after judgment has been rendered, and to the 
party against whom the decision has been rendered. 

Appeal differs from general review in three par- 
ticulars : first, it and general review cannot bring 



256 Chap. XIII., Sec. III., Par. 2. 247 

the same issues before the saperior court; the 
issue is brought by express action of a party, and 
not as a matter in course by the records , and it 
does not permit the inferior court to be censured 
for its decision. Appeal differs from reference in 
two particulars : it brings to the superior court an 
issue already decided ; and it is a party that brings 
the issue, and not the court itself. The sentence 
appealed from cannot be pronounced until the 
judgement is confirmed in a higher court; that is, 
no one sentenced to be admonished, suspended, 
excommunicated or deposed, is to be admonished, 
suspended, excommunicated or deposed, after giv- 
ing notice of his intention to appeal as required in 
paragraph 258 ; but see paragraph 265. No one 
can appeal before the judgment has been made, 
not even after the decision has been made. (186 : 
6.) In a judicial case there are always two parties, 
the accuser and the accused (163) ; and the deci- 
sion can never go against the accuser, since he is 
not on trial. 'If the decision has'gone against the 
accused, he may appeal. No one else may ap- 
peal; others may complain (267). 

256. — II. Those who have not submitted to a regular trial 
are not entitled to an appeal. 

If there has been no regular trial, but the court 
has decided without process, or if the court has 
dealt with the party as contumacious, he may com- 
plain (267), but he may not appeal. It is true that 
then the sentence, however unjust, is not arrested; 
but the Eules of Discipline assume that, while a 
court may err, it will more probably be right than 
the party that objects to its action ; and especially 



248 Chap. XIII., Sec. III., Par. 3. 257 

is it unlikely that a court will treat as contumaci- 
ous one who really was not so, or proceed without 
process where the objector really desired process. 

257. — III. Any irregularity in the proceedings of the infe- 
rior court ; a refusal of reasonable indulgence to a party on 
trial; declining to receive important testimony; hurrying to a 
decision before the testimony is fully taken : a manifestation 
of prejudice in the cause; and mistake or injustice in the Judg- 
ment, are all proper grounds of appeal. 

The judgment has in it the decision of guilty, and 
this decision may be a mistake ; and the judgment 
has in it the fixing of the censure, and this censure 
may be excessive, and therefore unjust. Such 
mistake or injustice must be the radical ground of 
appeal; but one may appeal from the judgment on 
account of how it was arrived at, and even without 
disputing its correctness or justice. Such subordi- 
nate grounds of appeal, or any infraction or neg- 
lect of the regulations laid down in the Eules of 
Discipline to govern judicial proceedings; a re- 
fusal to grant to the accused reasonable time and 
opportunity apart from the mere letter of such 
regulations (it being assumed that a court which 
has let process commence will grant the prosecu- 
tion reasonable indulgence); rejecting important 
testimony (and the party desiring to introduce it 
can always get his reasons put into the record in 
his notice and reasons of appeal) ; haste in reach- 
ing a decision, that is, the really arriving at a de- 
cision before hearing all the testimony ; and pre- 
judice, which must have been somehow manifested 
or it could not be assigned with propriety. But 
the appellant may cite what grounds he will, it be- 
longs to the superior court to determine the wo- 



258 Chap. XIII., Sec. III. Pars. 4, 5. 249 

priety of his grounds of appeal, and of the evidence 
for them appearing in the record of the cause. 

258. — IV. Every appellant is bound to give notice of his 
intention to appeal, and also to lay the reasons thereof in writ- 
ing before the court appealed from, either before its rising or 
within ten days thereafter. If this notice or these reasons be 
not given the court while in session, they shall be lodged with 
the Moderator or Clerk. 

The "rising" of the court is not necessarily the 
adjournment of all the sessions of that meeting, but 
the rising of the court from its work as a judicial 
body in the case. A court might remain in session 
with other business for more than ten days after 
"rising" from its judicial action. However, it 
would often work injury to enforce this distinction, 
unless the attention of the party were expressly 
called to it at the rising of the court, so generally 
will the party having right to appeal understand 
that he has ten days from the adjournment of the 
court. It would be contrary to the spirit of these 
Rules for a superior court to refuse to hear an ap- 
peal for a mere technicality that was designed for 
good. The notice enables the court to have the 
record of the cause in readiness, and also, if it so 
desires, to change the personnel of the accuser. 
For the court, as judge, is not a party to the cause. 
The court, as appointing or accepting the prose- 
cutor, was the Church acting as prosecutor : and in 
this capacity it has the right to determine the per- 
sonnel of the accuser in whatever court the cause is 
heard. The parties, however, remain the same, 
only the accuser is called appellee in the superior 
court, and the accused is there called appellant 
(163). 



250 Chap. XIII., Sec. III., Pars. 5, 6,7,8. 259-'62 

259. — V. No appeal shall be carried from an inferior to any 
other court than the one immediately superior, without its 
consent. 

The "its" refers to "the one immediately superior"; 

that is, no court can be deprived of its appellate 

jurisdiction without its own consent. 

260. — YI. The appellant shall lodge his appeal, and the 
reasons of it, with the clerk of the higher court before the 
close of the second day of its sessions ; and the appearance of 
the appellant and appellee shall be either in person or by 
writing. 

The appeal and reasons must be the same as he 

gave notice of. The sessions must be the sessions 

of the meeting next after the notice of appeal is 

given. Both appellant and appellee are bound to 

appear without further notice than the original 

notice of appeal. 

261.— y II. In taking up an appeal, after ascertaining that 
the appellant on his part has conducted it regularly, the first 
step shall be to hear "the record of the cause"; the second, 
to hear the parties, first the appellant, then the appellee, and 
the appellant shall close : the third, to call the roll, that the 
members may express their opinion in the cause ; and then the 
vote shall be taken. 

Cf. 186. The vote must be according to the next 

paragraph. 

262. — YIII. The decision may be either to confirm or 
reverse, in whole or in part, the judgment of the inferior court ; 
or to remit the cause for the purpose of amending the record, 
should it appear to be incorrect or defective, or for a new trial. 

Accordingly, the vote may be first to sustain, not 

to sustain, or to sustain in part, the appeal; and 

if the appeal is sustained or sustained in part, then 

that is done or is to be done which the appellant 

asked for in his appeal. But the vote may be 

upon a definite motion to confirm or reverse, to 

remit, or to order a new trial. 



263-^65 Chap.XIIL,Sec.III.,Paes.9,10,11. 251 

263. — IX. If an appellant, after entering his appeal to a 
superior court, fail to prosecute it, it shall be considered as 
abandoned, and^ the Judgment appealed from shall be final. 
And an appellant shall be considered as abandoning his appeal 
if he do not appear before the appellate court by the second 
day of its meeting next ensuing the date of his notice of appeal, 
unless it shall appear that he was prevented by the providence 
of God from seasonably prosecuting it. 

EnteriDg his appeal means giving notice. Here, 
again, no one should be deprived of his right to 
prosecute his appeal upon a technicality ; but, on 
the other hand, one wishing to appeal must be 
diligent to use the opportunity that the Church 
may not be unnecessarily disturbed. 

264. — X. If an appellant is found to manifest a litigious or 
other unchristian spirit in the prosecution of his appeal, he 
shall be censured according to the degree of his offence. 

The right of appeal is not given with any other 
intent than that those who sincerely believe wrong 
has been done may bring the higher courts to 
pass upon the issue ; and to abuse this favor is a 
peculiarly censurable offence. Of course, no cen- 
sure for such offence can be passed except after 
confession or process before the court having 
original jurisdiction over the offender; but the 
superior court before which the offence is com- 
mitted should call the attention of the court of 
first resort to the question of dealing with the 
offender. 

265. — XI. If the infliction of the sentence of suspension, or 
excommunication, or deposition be arrested by appeal, the 
judgment appealed from shall nevertheless be considered as in 
force until the appeal shall be issued. 

That is, one on whom such sentence has been 
passed, and who has arrested the pronouncing of 
it by his appeal, is bound to abstain from the sac- 



252 Chap. XIII., Par. 12 ; Sec. IV., Par. 1. 266-'7 

raments or from tlie exercise of his office until the 
superior court passes upon his appeal ; and not to 
submit himself by thus abstaining would itself be 
an offence worthy of the highest censure, if wit- 
tingly committed. If one could arrest the force of 
a judgment, as well as the pronouncing of sent- 
ence, by appeal, the grossest offender could not be 
reached until after most hurtful delay. 

266. — XII. If any court shall neglect to send up the record 
of the cause, especially if thereby an appellant who has pro- 
ceeded with regularity shall be deprived of the privilege of 
having his appeal seasonably tried, it shall be censured accord- 
ing to the circumstances of the case, and the Judgment appealed 
from shall be suspended until the record be produced, upon 
which the issue can be fairly tried. 

The appeal itself suspends the pronouncing of 
sentence, and this failure of the court would sus- 
pend the force of the judgment, so that the accused 
would have the right, from this failure until the 
record is produced, to resume the privilege of com- 
municating and the exercise of his office. It is a 
matter of course that the delinquent court could 
not be censured without process against the court 
(245). 

Section TV. — Of Complaints. 
After stating the nature and effect of a complaint, 
and the requirement as to notice, the order of pro- 
ceeding is laid down, and the sphere of action per- 
missible to the superior court is given. There is 
added the rule for sending up the records. 

267. — I. A complaint is a representation to a superior court 
against some decision of an inferior court. Any member of the 
Church, submitting to its authority, may complain against 
every species of decision, except where a party, against whom 
a decision has been rendered, takes an appeal against it. But 



267 Chap. XIII., 8ec. IV., Par. 1. 253 

the complaint shall not suspend, while pending, the effect of 
the decision complained of. 

A complaint differs from general review in these 
particulars: it may bring a decision made in a judi- 
cial case (except where an appeal is taken) as well 
as any other decision ; it brings the issue by ex- 
press action of a party, and not by the records as 
a matter in course ; and it does not permit the in- 
ferior court to be censured for its decision. It 
differs from reference in these particulars : it 
brings an issue already decided ; and it is not the 
court' itself that brings the issue. It differs from 
an appeal in these particulars : an appeal may be 
taken only from decisions in judicial processes, but 
a complaint may be taken against every sort of 
decision (for a complaint may be taken against a 
decision against which an appeal may be taken, if 
the appeal is not taken) ; an appeal may be taken 
only by the party condemned on trial, including a 
court, but a complaint may be taken by any per- 
son (though never by a court) who is a member of 
the Church and submissive to its authority; and 
an appeal suspends partially the effect of the deci- 
sion against which it is taken, but a complaint 
does not suspend the effect of this decision at 
all. But the essential difference is this: that an 
appeal removes the cause to the superior court 
without changing the parties, but a complaint 
presents an issue with new parties. True, the 
court complained of cannot be censured, nor the 
complainant ; for the complaint is not a continu- 
ance of process, as an appeal is; and no party 
can be censured without process or confession. 
But the court, as judge, is a party. In an ap- 



254 Chap. XIII., Sec. IV., Paks. 2, 3. 268-'9 

peal, the court, as accuser, is a party, the appel- 
lee; but in a complaint, the court, as judge, is a 
party, the respondent. In an appeal, the accused 
is a party, the accused; but in a complaint, the 
accused is not a party at all. Even if the person 
that was accused should complain, he does not 
appear as the accused. And that a complaint is 
not judicial process is evident from these two con- 
siderations: that no one can be censured by the 
issue of a complaint; and that questions that were 
not connected with a judicial cause may be the 
subjects of complaint. 

268. — II. Notice of complaint shall be given in the same 
form and time as notice of appeal. 

There is the like reason that the court may send 
up the record in readiness, and still more that the 
court may appoint its representative to answer 
for it. 

269. — III. The court against whose decision a complaint is 
taken shall appoint a representative to defend that decision, 
who shall be called the respondent. After the superior court 
has ascertained that the complaint is regular, its first step 
shall bo to read the record of the case ; its second to hear the 
complainant; its third to hear the respondent; its fourth to 
hear the complainant again, and then it shall consider and 
decide the case. 

'^The record" of the case will be the same as "the 

record of the cause" when the complaint is against 

a decision in a judicial case ; but in other cases it 

will be so much of the records sent up for review 

as are needful to set the issue before the superior 

court. The complaint ought to specify precisely 

what is complained of, and, when the complaint is 

not against a judicial decision, what parts of the 

records the complainant desires to have read. 



270 Chap. XIII., Sec. IV., Par. 4. 255 

And such parts should be read as either party de- 
sires, within reasonable limits. The court, after 
hearing the parties, may debate the matter freely, 
which is not allowable in a case of process, either 
in the court of first resort or in the court aDpealed 
to. 

270. — IV. The superior court has discretionary power 
either to annul any portion or the whole of tlie decision com- 
plained of, or to send it back to the inferior court for a new 
hearing. 

The superior court does not confirm the decision 
complained of, the notice of complaint not bringing 
that decision into suspense. Nor may the supe- 
rior court reverse the decision (in the sense in 
which reverse means more than annul). For in- 
stance, if the decision has been a decision finding 
guilty in a judicial case, on appeal the superior 
court may find the party not guilty ; but on a com- 
plaint the superior court can only annul the find- 
ing of guilty, leaving the Church simply silent on 
the issue. Or if the complaint is against a deci- 
sion of not guilty in a judicial case, the superior 
court could not reverse the decision on complaint; 
it could only annul the finding, leaving the Church 
silent on the issue. (A judicial case resulting in 
a decision of not guilty cannot be brought before 
a superior court on appeal.) Again, if the com- 
plaint is against the refusal to appoint a Minister 
to a certain work, a complaint cannot issue in an 
order from the superior court to appoint him to 
that work. But if the decision complained of was 
in a judicial case, whether the decision was guilty 
or not guilty, the superior court may order a new 
trial ; and if the decision was not in a judicial case, 



256 Chap. XIY., Pars. 1, 2. 271-'72 

a reconsideration. Nothing is said about remitting 
for correction of the records, as in an appeal ; for 
this reason : if the amending of the records is found 
to be necessary, tHen the inferior court would 
always be instructed to consider the question 
again ; but, as an appeal transfers the case to the 
superior court, that court may wait for fuller re- 
cords before deciding the issue. 

271. — V. The court against whose decision complaint is 
taken is bound to send up its records in the case, as herein- 
before provided. 

The provisions will be found in 189 and '240. But 
neglect of the court to send up the records does 
not permit the superior court to suspend the judg- 
ment complained of. A complainant is not given 
as much scope as an appellant. 



CHAPTEE XIV. 

Of Dissents and Protests. 

The four paragraphs define, first, a dissent, and 
then a protest, direct what shall and may be done 
with a protest, and determine who may join in 
making them. 

272. — I. A dissent is a declaration on the part of one or 
more members of a minority in a court, expressing a different 
opinion from that of the majority in a particular case. A dis- 
sent unaccompanied with reasons shall be entered on the 
records of a court. 

A mere dissent simply records the negative vote, 
or the names of those who wish to be recorded as 
favoring the negative. And the court has no 
option but to let the records show this. 



273-'75 Chap. XIV., Pars. 2, 3, 4. 257 

273. — II. A protest is a more solemn and formal declara- 
tion by members of a minority, bearing their testimony against 
what they deem a mischievous or erroneous judgment, and is 
generally accompanied with a detail of the reasons on which it 
is founded. 

A protest is a dissent in the form of a solemn tes- 
timony, with or without reasons. 

274, — III. If a protest or dissent be couched in temperate 
language, and be respectful to the court, it shall be recorded ; 
and the court may, if deenaed necessary, put an answer to the 
protest on the records along with it. But here the matter 
shall end, unless the parties protesting obtain permission to 
withdraw their protest absolutely, or for the sake of amend- 
ment. 

The words "or dissent" are here in place to cover 
a protest calling itself a dissent. For only two 
reasons may a court refuse to record a protest: 
that its language is intemperate or that it is disre- 
spectful to the court. If the court should refuse 
to record a dissent or protest, there may be made 
a complaint against the refusal. The court may 
allow protest ants to withdraw their protest, but is 
not bound to allow an amended form to be re- 
corded if intemperate or disrespectful. Those join- 
ing in a protest should take no part in framing the 
answer to the protest, but they may vote upon 
the question of allowing their own protest to be 
recorded. 

275. — IV. None can join in a protest against a decision of 
any court except those who had a right to vote in the case. 

Hence, in a judicial case none can protest against, 
or dissent from, the judgment except those who 
sat as judges through the case. 



258 Chap. XV., Par. 1. 276 

CHAPTER XV. 

Of Jurisdiction. 

Besides what may be found on the subject 
before, here are gathered together the regulations 
for determining to what jurisdiction any member 
at any time belongs. The first paragraph pre- 
scribes the method of transfer of a member from 
one church to another, upon his own motion ; the 
second, the method of transferring a member or 
officer from one jurisdiction to another without his 
consent; the third determines to which jurisdiction 
a member in course of transfer belongs ; the fourth 
orders what is to be done with disappearing mem- 
bers ; the fifth gives a special regulation as to the 
form of certificate of transfer from Presbytery to 
Presbytery ; and the sixth limits the force of a cer- 
tificate of good standing. 

276. — I. When any member shall remove from one church 
to another, he shall produce satisfactory testimonials of his 
church-membership and dismission before he be admitted as a 
regular member of that congregation, unless the church Session 
has other satisfactory means of information. 

"Any member" includes non-communicating mem- 
bers and suspended members. These may be 
transferred from one church to another, but with 
the same status. For the meaning of remove from 
one church to another, see next paragraph. When 
the member asks for admission into the church to 
which he has come, he shall produce satisfactory 
testimonials of two things : his church-membership 
(and the testimonial should certify his status), and 
his dismission. He may be admitted without such 



277 Chap. XV., Par. 2. 259 

testimonial, if the Session has other satisfactory 
evidence of his church-membership, and dismis- 
sion; but the Session shall not receive without 
evidence that the other Session has dismissed him, 
during the first twelve months of his change of 
residence, nor ever without change of residence. 
So much is due to the Session from whose juris- 
diction the transfer would take him. 

While this rule is plain as to members of this 
Church passing from church to church, its princi- 
ples should also be observed in receiving members 
from other Churches: namely, there should be no 
disrespectful haste in acting without the concur- 
rence of the other ecclesiastical authority; and, 
where there is no change of residence, a member 
from another Church in correspondence with this 
Church, or willing to dismiss its members to this 
Church, should not be received without such dis- 
mission. 

The disregard of this rule impairs the efficiency 
of discipline. And with this in view, no member 
under censure ought ever to be received without 
dismission from another church of this Church, or 
from a Church in correspondence with this Church, 
and not without imperative reasons from any 
church. 

277. — II. When a church member or officer shall remove 
his residence beyond the bounds of the court to whose juris- 
diction he belongs into the bounds of another, if he shall 
neglect for twelve months, without satisfactory reasons given 
to both these courts, to transfer his ecclesiastical rela- 
tions, the court whose bounds he has left shall be required 
to transfer them. And should that court neglect this duty, 
the one into whose bounds he has removed shall assume juris- 
diction, giving due notice to the other body. 

17 



260 Chap. XY., Par. 2 277 

Here, again, church member includes non- com- 
municating members, but the paragraph does not 
apply to suspended members or officers (see 232). 
The bounds of a court are, for a Presbytery, the 
geographical limits of its district (72), and of a 
church Session, the geographical limits within 
which persons may meet together for divine wor- 
ship. A member is within the bounds of a Ses- 
sion, if he is near enough to the usual place of 
worship of the church to attend its meetings for 
worship : and hence he may be in the bounds of 
two or more Sessions at the same time. And a 
man's residence is really within the bounds of a 
Presbytery, if, having a charge within its geograpi- 
cal district, he is near enough thereto to attend to 
his duties in that charge. (See remarks on 72.) 
One removes his residence, in the intent of this 
paragraph, when, though his residence remains at 
the same geographical point, it yet becomes by 
changes of environment, or connection, out of the 
bounds of his court. If one removes his residence 
out of the bounds of one court without moving it 
into the bounds of another court, this paragraph 
does not apply ; nor does this paragraph regulate 
transfers between this Church and any other 
Church. The twelve months of the paragraph 
must be calculated from the time of his entrance 
into the bounds of the court which is to be put in 
jurisdiction over him. Hence, the paragraph does 
not apply to those who do not remain as long as 
twelve months within one boundary. The "shall 
be required " is to be interpreted thus : if he shall 
neglect, the court shall be required by this para- 
graph. The requirement shall come into force 



278 Chap. XV., Pae. 3. 261 

and applicability whenever the condition arises. 
And this is a duty concerning which the court has 
no option; to neglect it is to neglect a duty. 
Either court might be censured for such neglect 
under paragraph 245, or an order might be issued 
to it under 244. But there may be satisfactory 
reasons for not transferring. For instance, a mem- 
ber may retain his former ecclesiastical relation 
temporarily, in order to assist and encourage a 
weak church to which he expects soon to return; 
or an officer may have no work under the direction 
of the Presbytery into whose bounds he has come, 
and be expecting work elsewhere. And there may 
be other reasons. Especially would it seem unde- 
sirable to gather into one Presbytery a preponder- 
ance of Ministers without charge under it. But 
the transfer must be made, unless the reasons to 
the contrary are given by the person to both 
courts, and are satisfactory to both courts. 

278. — III. Members of one church dismissed to Join another 
shall be held to be under the Jurisdiction of the Session dis- 
missing them till they form a regular connection with that to 
which they have been dismissed. 

The Session may dismiss to one church, or to one 
of several, or to one of a certian description, within 
or without this Church, according to the request of 
the member and the discretion of the Session. 

Since dismission is an act of the Session, the 
Session may refuse dismission for sufficient reasons, 
of which it must judge, subject to correction by a 
superior court. Nor can any member demand as 
a right, dismission to a court without having his 
residence in the bounds of the court, which must 
be another court of this Church or of a Church in 



262 Chap. XY., Paes. 4, 5. 279-'80 

correspondence with this Church, or, at least, of 
some evangelical church, and being himself not 
under censure or under charges. 

279. — IV. If the residence of a communicating member be 
unknown for three years, he shall be retired upon a separate 
roll until he shall appear and give satisfaction, of which due 
record shall be made. 

A note should be made of the fact at the time 
when his residence becomes unknown to the Ses- 
sion, upon the records of the Session, and then, at 
the end of three years, the residence being still 
unknown, his name should be retired to a separate 
roll. If the residence become known before the 
end of the three years, this fact should be entered 
upon the records. He may ''reappear" in writing, 
or through a personal messenger, or in person, to 
give satisfaction. His residence becoming known 
after the three years does not itself restore his 
name to the roll ; this can only be done by formal 
act of the Session after being made satisfied, by 
explanation, that there was no willing severance of 
connection with the Church, or by repentance, that 
it is safe to restore the offender. For this is a sort 
of tentative suspension without process. The 
Session has no discretion but to retire one to a 
separate roll after the residence has been three 
years unknown, whether note was made of the fact 
when the residence first became unknown or not. 

The very least that a Session can show of inter- 
est in those under its care is to know where each 
of them is, or to know that it does not know. 

280. — V. When a Presbytery shall dismiss a Minister, 
Probationer or candidate, the name of the Presbytery to which 
he is dismissed shall be given in the certificate, and he shall 



281 Chap. XV , Par. 6. 263 

remain under the Jurisdiction of the Presbytery dismissing 
him until received by the other. 

No one can demand as a right dismission to a 
Presbytery in which he is not going to reside, nor 
to a Presbytery not in this Church or in a Church 
in correspondence with this Church, or, at least, 
such as might be taken into such correspondence. 
Nor can one be dismissed to any ecclesiastical 
court or authority not a Presbytery, nor to more 
than one Presbytery at the same time. 

If candidates and Probationers are under the 
jurisdiction of the Presbytery, are they under the 
jurisdiction of the Session also? Yes. For they 
are under the jurisdiction of the Presbytery only 
as to whether they shall be admitted to the minis- 
try. At ordination, the Minister passes wholly 
from under the jurisdiction of the Session; and 
the Session should record the fact upon its minutes. 

281. — VI. No certificate of dismission, from either a Session 
or a Presbytery shall be valid testimony of good standing for 
a longer period than one year, unless its earlier presentation 
be hindered by some providential cause ; and such certificates 
given to persons who have left the bounds of the Session or 
Presbytery granting them, shall certify the standing of such 
persons only to the time of their leaving those bounds. 

If the person to whom the certificate is granted 
has already left the bounds, the certificate should 
state when he left and his standing up to that time ; 
but if the certificate fails to state the time of his 
leaving the bounds, the effect of the certificate is 
the same. The point is, that a person cannot be 
presumed to be in good standing if he has let a 
whole year pass since leaving the bounds of a 
court, or obtaining a certificate of dismission from 



264 Chap. XV. 281 

it, without presenting his certificate of dismission 
to the court to which he comes. The certificate is, 
however, valid evidence of dismission after it ceases 
to be valid presumptive evidence of good standing. 
The court receiving him upon it after a year 
assumes responsibility for his standing. 

The principles underlying these provisions may 
be stated thus : 

1. One is a member or officer of the Church, 
which exercises its jurisdiction over him through 
the appropriate court ; and while the Church does 
not fix his residence, the Church does, with only 
limited choice to the individual, fix the court 
through which it exercises its jurisdiction. Mem- 
bers cannot arbitrarily choose the court to whose 
jurisdiction they will be subject. 

2. Being subject to the jurisdiction of the Church, 
they cannot cast off that jurisdiction at will with- 
out sinning against the Church. And she may 
surrender her jurisdiction only in the way of cen- 
sure by excommunication or deposition, or in the 
way of correcting a mistake made by both her and 
the person, as in demission, or in the way of fra- 
ternal recognition of some other Church by dis- 
missing thereto. But no one may quit this Church 
without thereby violating his covenant with it, ex- 
cept with her consent ; nor is she permitted to give 
her consent, except when transferring to some 
other Church of Christ that can, all things consid- 
ered, do as well for the member. 

3. Neither in dismissing to another court of this 
Church, nor in dismissing to another Church, ought 
any court to dismiss one as in good standing when, 
in the mind of the court, there is a strong presump- 



281 Chap. Xy. ^65 

tion that the person asking dismission is guilty of 
an offence deserving censure. (And an offence may 
just as truly lie in principle as in practice, in 
opinion as in deed.) When the strong presump- 
tion of guilt exists, the court should withhold dis- 
mission and institute process. The certificate 
ought to tell the truth. 



ANALYTICAL INDEX. 



Fages. 

Title, 1 

Dedication, 3 

Preface, 5-10 

Nature and aim of this work, 5-6 

Knowledge of our system important, 7 

Discipline possible and necessary, 7 

The church a spiritual organization, 

Exposition of the Book of Church Order, 11-265 

The standards, 11 

Form of Government, 11-169 

Chap. I. — Of the Doctrine of Church Government, 11-17 

Par. 1. The scriptural form of government, 12 

2. The Church, 12 

3. Members of the visible Church, 14 

4. Officers, 15 

5. Courts; distinction of Church and church, . 16 

6. Orders, 16 

7. To what the doctrine of Presbytery is neces- 

sary, 17 

Chap. II. — Of the Church, 17-42 

Sec. I. — Of its King and Head, 18-22 

8. Jesus Christ as King and Head, 18 

9. His offices in the government of the Churchy ... 20 

10. How he has equipped the Church, 21 

11. Method of his activity in the Church, 22 

Sec. II.— The Visible Church Defined, 22-25 

12. The unity of the Church, 23 

13. Denominations, 23 

14. Particular churches, 24 

Sec. III. — Of the Nature and Extent of Church Power, 25-29 

15. The people and church power, 25 

267 



268 Ii^DEx. 

Pages. 

16. Officers and church power, 26 

17. Functions of the Church as a government, .... 27 

18. Scope of the Church's work, 28 

19. Divine sanction of ecclesiastical power, 29 

Bee. I V. — Of the Particular Church, 29-36 

20. Particular church defined, 30 

21. Officers of a particular church, 31 

22. The Church Session, 31 

23. Deacons and their functions. Trustees, 32 

24. Ordinances of worship, 34 

Prayer; praise; reading, expounding, preach- 
ing; baptism, the Lord's supper, public fasting 
and thanksgiving, catechizing, offerings, disci- 
pline, blessing the people. 

25. Worship and the Session, 35 

Bee. V. — Of the Organization of a Particular Church, . 36-42 

26. Enrolling, 37 

27. The church covenant, 38 

28. Election, etc., of Kuling Elders and Deacons, . . 41 

Chap. III. — Of Church Members, 42-44 

29. Infant members and baptism, 42 

30. Baptized non-communicants, 43 

31. Professors, 43 

Chap. IV. — Of Church Officers, 44-62 

Sec. I. — Of Their General Classification, 44-46 

32. Extraordinary officers, 44 

33. Ordinary officers, 45 

34. Official 'titles, 46 

Sec. 11. — Of the Ministers of the Word, 46-54 

35. Dignity and titles, 46 

36. Qualifications, 48 

37. Classification by functions, 49 

38. The Pastor, 49 

39. The teacher, 52 

40. The Evangelist, 52 

41. The editor, etc., 54 

Sec. in. — Of the Ruling Elder, 54-59 

42. Elders, 55 

43. Difference of Elder and Minister, 55 

Elder as moderator. 



Index. 269 

Pages. 

44. Qualifications, 56 

45. Functions or duties, 57 

Bee. IV.— Of the Deacon, 59-62 

46. Scriptural warrant, 59 

47. Duties, 59 

48. Qualifications, 60 

49. Report to Session, 61 

50. Ruling Elders as Deacons, 61 

51. Deaconesses, 62 

Chap. V. — Of Church Courts, 62-121 

Bee. I. — Of the Courts in General, 62-67 

52. Nature of courts, 63 

53. Classes of courts, 63 

54. Who is moderator, 63 

55. Duties and powers of the moderator, 65 

Meetings extraordinary. 

56. The clerk, 66 

57. Meeting how opened and closed, 66 

58. Expenses of attendance, 67 

Bee. II. — Of the Jurisdietion of Church Courts, 68-75 

59. Jurisdiction of church courts, not civil, 68 

Their authority spiritual, 

60. The power of church courts defined, 69-73 

61. Lower and higher courts, 73 

62. Spheres of the different courts defined, 73-75 

Sec. III. — Of the Church Bession, 75-89 

63. Members of the Session, 76 

Quorum of the Session, 

64. Moderator in the absence of the Pastor, 77 

65. Moderator when there is no Pastor, 78 

66. Moderator when there are several Pastors, , . . , 79 

67. Powers and duties of the Sessron, 79-87 

Power of inquiry, 80; censure, 80; oversight 
of baptism of children, 80 ; receiving members, 
81; dismissing, 82; over Elders and Deacons, 
83 ; of examining records of Deacons, 83 ; over 
Sabbath-schools, 84 ; collections, 84 ; the sing- 
ing, 85; of assembling the people, 85; concert- 
ing measures, 85 ; concerning injunctions, 86 ; 
and representatives, 86. 

Congregation, 85, end, 

68. Meetings, stated and special, 87 

69. Records of proceedings, 88 



^70 Index. 

Pages. 

70. Tabular records, 70 

Baptisms, admissions, non-communicants, 
deaths, dismissions. 

71. Prayer at opening and close of, 89 

Sec. IV. — Of the Presbytery, 89-107 

72. Members, 89 

Territorial district. 

73. Elder's certificate of appointment, 92 

74. Quorum, 92 

75. Admission of ministers, 93 

76. Subscription of Ministers, 95 

77. Powers and duties of Presbytery, 97-103 

Concerning appeals, complaints and refer- 
ences, 97 ; as replacing the Session, 97 ; over 
candidates, 98 ; induction of ministers, 98 ; 
Sessions, 99 ; concerning the pastoral relation, 
99; Evangelists, 100; Ministers generally, 100; 
injunctions, 100; erroneous opinions, 100; to 
visit churches, 101 ; to unite and divide 
churches, 101 ; to form and receive churches, 
102; over vacant churches, 102; to concert 
measures, 102 ; over its churches generally, 
103 ; to appoint commissioners, 103 ; and to 
propose measures, 103. 

78. Records, 103 

79. Meetings, 104 

80. Corresponding members, 106 

Visiting brethren. 
Sec. V. — Of the Synod, ; 107-109 

81. Members, 107 

82. Meetings and quorum, 107 

83. Corresponding members, 107 

Visiting brethren. 

84. Powers and duties, 108-109 

As to appeals, etc., records of Presbyteries, 
obedience of Presbyteries to Constitution and 
injunctions, new Presbyteries, Ministers in gen- 
eral, power over Presbyteries, Sessions and 
churches, to concert measures, and to propose 
measures, 109 

85. Records, 109 

Sec. VI.— Of the General AssemUy, 109-117 

86. Nature and place, ,,,,,,,,,,,.,, *.«.%•.••, 109 



Index. 271 

Pages 
S7. Meetings, 110 

88. Certificates of commissioners, 110 

89. Quorum, 112 

90. Powers and duties, 112-116 

Appeals, etc., 112; testimony against error, 
112; decision of controversies, 112; advice and 
instruction, 113; reviewing records, 114; care 
of inferior courts, 114; redress disorder, 114; 
concerting measures, 114; new Synods, 114; 
agencies of evangelization, Ministers, suppress- 
ing contentions, organic union, 115; general su- 
perintendence, 116; correspondence, 116; and 
in general, 116 

91. Adjournment, 116 

Sec. VII. — Of Ecclesiastical Commissions, 117-121 

92. Commissions defined, 117 

93. Functions, 118 

Taking testimony, ordination, installation, 
visitation. 

94. Commissions to try cases, 119 

What other functions? 

95. Evangelization Commissions, 120 

Executive Committees. 

Chap. VI. — Of Church Orders, 121-166 

Bee. I. — Of the Doctrine of Vocation, 121-123 

96. Ordinary vocation, 122 

97. Election of officers, 122 

98. Agent and conditions of ordination, 123 

Sec. II. — Of the Doctrine of Ordination, 123-125 

Ordination and vocation distinguished. 

99. Ordination is by a court, 124 

100. Ordination defined, 124 

101. Ordination is to a definite work, 124 

Ordination and installation distinguished, . . 125 
Sec. III.— Of the Election of Church Officers, 125-133 

102. Manner of Electing Pastor, Ruling Elders, Dea- 

cons, 126 

103. Moderator at an election, 126 

104. Steps in the election, 127 

Vote necessary to election. 

105. Qualifications of voters, 128 

The Session at an election. 



272 Inde:^. 

Pages. 

106. Drawing and subscribing the call, 130 

107. The form of the call, 131 

108. Subscribing and certifying the call, 132 

109. Commissioners to prosecute the call, 132 

110. When the called belongs to another Presbytery, 132 

Sec. IV. — Of the Ordination of Ruling Elders and Dea- 
cons, and of the Dissolution of their Offi- 
cial Relations, 133-141 

111. Session to appoint a day, 133 

112. Acts of ordination, 133 

Sermon and doctrinal statement, questions to 
the candidate (concerning Scripture, 134; doc- 
trinal standards, 135; government and disci- 
pline, 136; acceptance of office, 137; the peace, 
etc., of the Church, 137), questions to the con- 
gregation, 137; laying on hands, 138; giving 
the right hand, 138. 

113. Dissolution for unacceptability, 139 

114. Dissolution by removal, 140 

115. Re-installation, 141 

Sec. V. — Of the Ordination of Ministers, and the For- 
mation and Dissolution of the Pastoral Rela- 
tion, 141-156 

116. Call must go through Presbytery, ........... 142 

117. Conditions antecedent to ordination, 142 

Call to a Probationer, 142 

118. Trials for ordination, 143-145 

Place of ordination, 145 

119. Proceedings at ordination, 145-150 

Sermon, 145 

Questions, 145-147 

Installation, question 8, 147 

120. Questions to church at installation, 147-149 

121. Laying on hands, 149-150 

Right hand of fellowship, 150 

Charges, 150 

Who conduct ordination and installation, . . . 150 

122. Right hand of reception after installation, .... 151 

123. Ordination of Evangelists, 151 

124. Ordination to be in what Presbytery, 151 

125. Installation of an ordained Minister, 151 

126. Translating a Pastor, 152 

Call to a Pastor. 



Index. 273 

127. Call to one of a different Presbytery, 154 

128. Resignation of pastoral charge, 154 

Dissolution of pastoral relation, 154-156 

Sec. VL — Of the Licensure of Probationers for the 

Gospel Ministry, 156-166 

129. Object of licensure, 15G 

130. What Presbytery shall try candidates for licen- 

sure, 157 

131. Preliminary requirements to licensure, 157 

132. Examinations and trial pieces, 159-162 

133. Aim and extent of the trials, 162 

134. Requirements to licensure, 162 

Extraordinary cases, 162-164 

135. Questions at licensure, 164 

136. Act and form of licensure, 164-165 

137. Transfer of candidates, 165 

138. Transfer of probationers, 166 

139. Presbytery and probationers, 166 

Symbols, see standards. 

140. Recalling license, 166 

Chap. VII. — Of the Constitution of the Presbyte- 
rian Church, 167-169 

141. Constitution defined, 167 

142. Amending Book of Church Order, 168 

142 a. Amending doctrinal symbols, 169 

The Rules of Discipline, 170-265 

Chap. I. — Of Discipline — Its Nature, Subjects, and 

Ends, 171-174 

143. Discipline defined, 171 

144. Subjects of discipline, 171 

145. Ends of discipline, 172 

146. Nature of discipline, 172 

Chap. II. — Of the Discipline of Non-Communicat- 
ing Members, 174-176 

147. Parents and their children, 174 

148. Instruction of the children, 175 

149. Admission of the children to Lord's supper, ... 175 

150. Adult non-communicants, 176 

151. Non-communicants belong to what particular 

church, 176 



274 Index. 

Pages 
Chap. III. — Of Offences, 176-181 

152. Offence defined, 177-180 

153. Offences classified, 180 

Why offences are grounds of discipline, 180 

154. Personal and general offences, 181 

155. Private and public offences, 181 

Chap. IV. — Church Censures, , 181-184 

156. Censures classified, 181 

157. Admonition, 182 

158. Suspension, 182 

159. Excommunication, 183 

160. Deposition, 184 

Chap. V. — Of the Parties in Case of Process, . . . .184-191 

161. Original jurisdiction, place of, 185 

162. Investigation, 185-187 

Instituting process, 185-187 

163. The parties, 187 

Accuser, prosecutor, accused, appellant, ap- 
pellee. 

164. Form of indictment, 188 

165. Means of reclamation before prosecution, 188 

166. Prosecutor, voluntary or appointed, 189 

167. Do. as par. 165, 189 

168. From whom accusations should be received, . . . 190 

169. Warning to voluntary prosecutor, 190 

170. Suspension of official functions of accused, .... 191 

171. Rights of accused in discussion, 191 

Chap. VI. — Of General Provisions Applicable to 

All Cases of Process, 191-207 

172. Right mind of a member of a court, 192 

173. Conditions to instituting process, 193 

174. Drawing indictment, citation of parties and wit- 

nesses, pleading, censure upon confession, . . 194-196 

175. Citations, 196 

176. Indictment, its contents, , 197 

177. Second citation, refusal to plead, contumacy, . . 197 

178. Time between citation and appearance, 198 

179. Appearance, taking testimony at a distance by 

commission, 198 

180. Of offences committed outside territorial juris- 

diction, 198 

181. Serving citations, 199 



Index. 275 

Pages. 

182. Jurlicial committee, 199 

183. Charge to the court, 200 

184. Examination of witnesses, 200 

185. Questions arising in the midst of the trial, .... 200 
180. Order of trial in court of first resort, 201-205 

187. Challenging the members of the court, 205 

188. Disqualified for sitting as members of a court, 205 

189. The record of the cause, copies to be allowed 

parties, judgment of higher court to be sent 
down, 205-206 

190. Counsel, 206 

191. Time within which process must be instituted, . 207 

Scandal. 

Chap. VII. — Special Rules Pertaixi^^g to Peocess 

Before Sessions, 207-209 

192. Process against church members to be entered 

where, 208 

193. Contumacy before Session, 208 

194. Excommunication of the contumacious, 209 

195. Preventing the accused from the Lord's supper, 209 

Chap. VIII. — Special Rules Pertaining to Process 

AGAINST Ministers, 210-215 

196. Process against a Minister to be entered where, 210 

197. Receiving charges against Ministers, 210 

198. Conditions to instituting process against a Min- 

ister for a private offence, 211 

199. Contumacy of a Minister, 211 

200. Heresy and schism, 212 

201. Scandal — acts of infirmity, 212 

202. Censure upon confession of flagitious offences, . 213 

203. Restoration of a deposed Minister, 213 

204. The pastoral relation of a Minister deposed or 

suspended, 214 

205. Breach of covenant engagements by Minister — 

Divestiture of Minister, Elder or Deacon 

without censure — ^Appeal, 214 

Chap. xX.— Of Evidence, 215-221 

206. Witnesses, competency of, 216 

Accused exempt from testifying. 

207. Exempted from testifying, 216 

208. Evidence, what sufficient, 216 

209. Separation of witnesses, 217 



276 Index. 

Pages 

210. Examination - of witnesses — Irrelevant ques- 

tions, 217 

211. Oath or affirmation of witnesses, 217-218 

212. Writing the testimony, 218 

213. Authentication of records as evidence, 218 

214. Authentication of testimony as evidence, 218 

215. Commission to take testimony — Taking testi- 

mony by written interrogatories, 218-219 

216. Testifying does not disqualify, 220 

217. Contumacy in refusing to testify, 220 

218. New testimony— New trial, 220 

219. Testimony— New trial, 220 

Chap. X. — Of the Infliction of Church Cen- 
sures, 221-225 

220. Censures, how administered, 221 

221. Censures, in what spirit to be administered, . . . 222 

222. Admonition, private or public, 222 

223. Definite suspension, 222 

224. Indefinite suspension, 222-223 

225. Excommunication, 223 

22G. Deposition and excommunication, 224 

Infliction of censures, 225 

When a sentence takes effect, 225 

Chap. XI. — Of the Eemoval of Censures, 225-231 

227. Treatment of one suspended, 226 

228. Restoration from suspension, 226-227 

229. Restoration from excommunication, 227-228 

Nature of suspension and excommunication, . 228 

230. Restoration from deposition, 229 

231. Status of Elder or Deacon restored, 229 

232. Transfer of persons under censure, 230 

233. Restoration of a Minister, 229 

Eemoval of censures, 230-231 

CiiAP. XII. — Of Cases Without Process, 231-237 

234. Censure upon confession without process, 231 

235. Transfer to roll of non-communicating mem- 

ber, 232 

Absenting one's self from the Lord's sup- 
per, . . 232-234 

236. Divestiture without censure, 235 

237. Renouncing jurisdiction, 236 



Index. 277 

Pages. 
Chap. XIII. — Of the Modes in which a Cause May 
BE Carried from a Lower to a 
Higher Court, 237-256 

238. Modes of carrying a cause to a higher court, . . 237 

239. Rights of members of the inferior court, 238 

Bee. I. — Of General Review and Control, 238-243 

240. Annual review of records, 239 

241. Scope of review of records, 239-240 

242. Action of superior court upon reviewing rec- 

ords, 240-241 

243. Cases of process not subject to general review, . 241 

244. Review outside records, 242 

245. Process against an inferior court — Memorials, 242 

246. Rules of process against an inferior court, .... 243 
Bee. IL—Of References, 243-246 

247. Reference defined, 244 

248. Cases proper for reference, 244 

249. Object of reference, 244 

250. Effect of reference, 245 

251. Caution against reference, 245 

252. Discretion of superior court upon a reference, 245 

253. References to what court, 245 

254. Records in reference, 245 

Sec. III.— Of Appeals, 246-252 

255. Appeal defined ; when and to whom allowable. 245-246 

Arrest of sentence by appeal. 

256. To whom appeal is allowable, 247 

257. Grounds of appeal, 248 

258. Notice and reasons of appeal, 249 

259. Appeal to what court, 250 

260. Appearance of appellant, 250 

261. Order of proceedings in an appeal, 250 

262. Decision upon appeal, 250 

263. Abandonment of appeal, 251 

264. Appellant liable to censure, 251 

265. Effect of an appeal, 251 

Judgment left in force by appeal. 

266. Censure for neglect to send up records in an 

appeal ; arrest of judg-ment, 252 

Sec. If.— Of Complamts, 252-256 

267. Complaint defined; to whom allowable; 

effect, 252-254 



278 liq^DEx. 

268. Notice of complaint, 254 

269. Eespondent in complaint; order of proceed- 

ings, 254-255 

270. Decision upon complaint, 255-256 

271. Records in complaint, 256 

Chap. XIV. — Of Dissents and Protests, 256-257 

272. Dissent defined; to be recorded, 256 

273. Protest defined, 257 

274. Record of dissent or protest; answer thereto, . 257 

275. Who may dissent or protest, 257 

Chap. XV. — Of Jurisdiction, 258-265 

276. Transfer of church members; dismission, . . .258-259 

277. Transfer of officers and members without their 

consent, 259-261 

278. Jurisdiction over members in transition, 231 

279. Separate roll for absentees, 262 

280. Jurisdiction over Ministers and Probationers 

in transition; form of dismission, 262-263 

281. Certificate of dismission as testimony of good 

standing, 263 

Principles governing transfer of jurisdic- 
tion, 264-265 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



[Figures refer to paragraphs as numbered consecutively; 
when to pages, p. is prefixed.] 

Par. 

Abandonment of appeal, . • 263 

Absentees, separate roll of, 279 

Absenting one's self from Lord's supper, 235 

Acceptance of office of Elder or Deacon, question concern- 
ing, 112:4 

Activity of Christ in the Church, 11 

Accusations, from whom to be received, 168 

Accused, 163 

appearance of, 178 

exempt from testifying, 206 

preventing, from Lord's supper, 195 

rights of, in discussion, 171 

suspension of official functions of, 170 

Accuser, 163 

Adjournment of Assembly, 91 

Administering censures, 220-221 

Admission of children to Lord's supper, 149 

of Ministers to Presbytery, 75 

Admissions, Sessional record of, 70 

Admonition, 157 

private, 222 

public, 222 

Adult non-communicants, 150 

Advice by Assembly, 90 : 4 

Affirmation by witnesses, 211 

Agencies of evangelization. Assembly's, 90:10 

Aim of this exposition, pp. 5-6 

of trials for licensure, 133 

Amending doctrinal standards, 142a 

Book of Church Order, 142 

Annual review, 240 

Answer to dissent or protest, 274 

279 



280 It^dex. 

Par. 

Appeal from divestiture without censure, 205 

Appeals, pp. 246-252 

abandonment of, 263 

allowable to whom, 246 

when, 255 

arrest of judgment by neglect to send up records in, 266 

of sentence by, 255 

censure for neglect to send up records in, 266 

decision upon, 262 

defined, 255 

effect of, 265 

grounds of, 257 

judgments left in force by, 265 

notice of, 258 

notice of reasons of, 258 

order of proceedings on, 261 

reasons of, notice of, 258 

to Assembly, 90 : 1 

to Presbytery, 77:1 

to Synod, 84:1 

to what court, 259 

Appearance of accused, 178 

of appellant, 260 

time between citation and, 178 

Appellant, 163 

appearance of, 260 

liable to censure, 264 

Appellee, 163 

Appointment, Elder's certificate of, to Presbytery, 73 

of commissioners by Presbytery, 77 :17 

day of ordination by Session, Ill 

Appointed prosecutor, 166 

Arrest of judgment by neglect to send up records in 

appeals, 266 

of sentence by appeal, 255 

A-Ssembling the people by Session, 67 :1] 

Assembly, General, pp. 109-117 

adjournment of, 91 

commission of commissioner to, 88 

commissioners to, - . 88 

care of inferior courts, 90 : 6 

delegates to, 88 

inferior courts, care of, by, 90:6 



Iiq^DEx. 281 

Par 

Assembly, General — 

meetings of, 87 

members of, 87 

moderator of, 55 

place in the system of courts, 86 

powers of, 90 

quorum, of, 89 

title of, 86 

Attendance on tlie courts, expense of, 58 

Authentication of records and testimony, 213-214 

Authority of church courts spiritual, . 59 

Baptism, 29 

infant membership and, 29 

of children, 67 :3 

Baptisms, record of, 70 

Baptized non-communicants, 30 

Benediction, 34, 57 

Blessing the people, 24 

Book of Church Order, amending, 142 

Breach of covenant engagements by a Minister, 205 

Call and Presbytery, 116 

certifying the, 108 

commissioners to prosecute the, 109 

drawing the, 106 

form of the, 107 

into a different Presbytery, : . . 127 

j)rosecuting the, before a different Presbytery, .... 110 

subscribing the, 106, 108 

to a Pastor, 126 

to a Probationer, 110, 117 

Candidates, . 77:3 

transfer of, 137 

what Presbytery should try, 130 

Case, see Cause. 

Cases, extraordinary, 134 

without process, pp. 231-237 

Catechisms, 141 

amending, 142a 

Catechizing, 24 

Cause, how carried to higher court, .... pp. 237-256, esp. 238 

record of, 189 

Censure, appellant liable to, 264 

by Presbytery, pp. 210-215 



282 Index 

Par. 

Censure — ' 

by Session, 67 :2 

divestiture without, 205, 236 

Censure for neglect to send up records, 266 

how administered, 220 

infliction of, pp. 221-225, esp. 225 

in what spirit administered, 221 

removal of, pp. 225-231, esp. 230-231 

transfer of persons under, 232 

upon confession, 174 

upon confession by a Minister, 202 

upon confession without process, 234 

Censures, pp. 181-184 

classified, 156 

Certificate of appointment. Elder's, 73 

of commissioners to Assembly, 88 

of dismission as testimony of good standing, 281 

Challenging members of a court, 187 

witnesses, 206 

Charge to a court, 172, 183 

Charges at ordination or installation, 121 

Children, admission of, to Lord's supper, 149 

baptism of, 67:3 

instruction of, 148 

parents and their, 147 

Christ, see Jesus Christ. 

Church and "church," 5 

Church covenant, 27 

functions of the, as a government, 17 

members, pp. 42-44 

infant, 29 

process against, 192 

transfer of, 276 

particular, see Particular church. 

power, pp. 25-29 

officers and, 16 

people and, 15 

questions to, at ordination of Elder or Deacon, ... 112:5 
at installation of Pastor, 120 

Church Session, see Session. 

the, 2, pp. 19-42 

the, a spiritual organization, p. 9 

visible, see Visible Church, 



Index. 283 

Par. 

Cliurcli's work, scope of, 18 

Churches, dividing, 77 : 12 

forming, 77:13 

organizing, 26, 27, 93 

particular, see Particular churches. 

receiving churches, 77 : 13, 90 : 14 

uniting, 77 : 12 

vacant, 77 : 14 

visitation of, 77:11; 93 

Citation of parties and witnesses, 174 

time between and appearance, 178 

Citations, 175 

second, 177 

serving of, 181 

Classification of censures, 156 

of Ministers, 37 

of offences, 153 

of officers, pp. 44-46 

Clerk, 56 

Collections, 67 :9 

Commissioners to Assembly, 77 : 17 

to prosecute a call, 109 

Commissions, pp. 117-121 

defined, 92 

evangelization, 95 

functions of, 92-94 

taking testimony at a distance, 179 

to install, 93 

to ordain, 93 

to organize churches, 93 

to take testimony, 215 

to try cases, 94 

to visit disordered parts of the Church, 93 

Committee, the judicial, 182 

Committees {see also Commissions) , 95 

Executive, 95 

Competency of witnesses, 206 

Complainant, 267, 269 

Complaint, pp. 252-256 

to Assembly, 90 : 1 

respondent in, 269 

decision upon, 270 

defined, : 267 



284 Index. 

Par. 
Complaint — 

effect of, 267 

notice of, 208 

order of proceedings in, 269 

to Presbytery, 77:1 

records in, 271 

to Synod, 84:1 

Concerting measures by Assembly, 90 : 8 

by Presbytery, 77 : 15 

by Session, 67 : 12 

by Synod, 85 :7 

Conditions to instituting process against a Minister, 173, 198 

to ordination, 117 

Confession of Faith, 141 

amending, 142a 

Confession on trial, 174, 202 

Confession without trial, 234 

Congregation, 67 : 12 

Congregation, question to, at ordination of Elder or Dea- 
con, 112:5 

Constitution, pp. 167-169 

defined, 141 

Contentions, suppressing, 90 : 12 

Control, general review and, pp. 238-243 

Controversies, decision of, 90 : 3 

Contumacy, 177 

censure for, 217 

before Session, 193 

excommunication for, 194 

in refusing to testify, 217 

of a Minister, 199 

suspension for, 193 

Copies of records allowed parties, 189 

Correspondence, 90 : 16 

Corresponding members of Presbytery, 80 

of Synod, 83 

Counsel, 190 

Court, see also Higher, Inferior, Lower, Superior. 

challenging members of, 187 

charge to, 183 

disqualification for sitting as member of, 188 

of first resort, order of trial in, 186 

right mind of members of, 172 



Index. 285 

Par. 

Courts, 5. pp. G2-121 

classes of, 53 

Courts, higher and lower, 61 

inferior and superior, 61 

jurisdiction of, pp. 68-75 

not civil, 59 

lower and higher, 61 

nature of, 52 

power of, defined, 60 

spheres of different courts, 62 

superior and inferior, 61 

Covenant, the church, see Church covenant. 

Deaconesses, 51 

Deacons, pp. 59-62 

and Session, 67:6-7 

dissolution of official relations, 113, 114 

divestiture of, without censure, 205, 236 

duties of, 23, 47 

Elders as, 50 

election of, 28, 97, 102-105 

functions of, 23, 47 

installation of, 115, p. 139 end. 

ordination of, 100, 101, 111-112 

qualifications of, 48 

report from, to Session, 49, 67 : 7 

scriptural warrant for, 46 

Deaths, record of, 70 

Decision, see also Judgment. 

of controversies, 90:3 

upon appeal, 262 

upon complaint, 270 

Dedication, The, p. 3 

Definite suspension, 223 

Denominations, 3 

Deposition, 160 

and excommunication, 226 

Different Presbytery, call to one in, 127 

Discipline, 24, pp. 171-174 

defined, 143 

ends of, 145 

nature of, 146 

necessary, , p. 7 

of non-communicating members, pp. 174-176 

possible, .,,,,,,, p. 3 



286 Iw-DEx. 

Par. 

Discipline, Rules of, the, pp. 170-265 

subjects of, 144 

why offences are grounds of, 153 

Dismissing members, 67 : 5 

Dismission, pp. 258-259 

Dismission, certificate of, as evidence of standing, 281 

form of, 280 

Dismissions, record of, 70 

Disqualify, testifying does not, 216 

Dissent defined, 272 

answer to, 274 

to be recorded, 272 

Dissent, who may, 275 

Dissents, pp. 256-257 

Dissolution of official relations by removal, 114 

for unacceptability, 113 

of the pastoral relation, pp. 154-156 

District, principle of territorial, 72 

Divestiture without censure, 205, 236 

Divide churches, power of Presbytery to, 77:12 

Divine sanction of ecclesiastical power, 19 

Doctrinal standards, question concerning, 112:2 

statement in ordination, 112 

sjanbols, amending, 142a 

Doctrine of church government, pp. 11-17 

of ordination, pp. 123-125 

of Presbytery, to what necessary, 7 

of vocation, pp. 121-123 

Duties, see Powers,. 

Ecclesiastical power, divine sanction of, 19 

Editor, 41 

Elder, 42, pp. 54-59 

and Minister, difference of, 43 

as Deacon, 50 

Elder as Moderator, 43 

dissolution of official relations of, 113, 114 

divestiture of, without censure, 205 

duties of 45 

election of, 28, 102 

installation of, 115, p. 139 end. 

ordination of, pp. 133-138 

power of Session over, 67 : 6 

qualifications of, 44 

status of, restored, 231 



IwDEx. 287 

Par. 

Elder's certificate of appointment to Presbytery, 73 

Election of Elders and Deacons, 28 

of officers, 07, pp. 125-133 

manner of, 102 

moderator at, 103 

Session at, 105 

steps in, 104 

vote necessary to, 104 

Enrolling, 26 

Errors, Assembly may testify against, 90:2 

Presbytery's power concerning, 77:10 

Evangelists, 40 

power of Presbytery to set apart, 77 : 7 

ordination of, 123 

Evangelization, agencies of, 90 : 10 

Evangelization commissions, 95 

Evidence, pp. 215-221 

what sufficient, 208 

Examination of witnesses, 184, 210 

Examinations for licensure, 132 

Excommunication, 159, 225 

deposition and, 226 

for contumacy, 194 

restoration from, ." 226 

Executive Committees, 95 

Expenses of attendance on courts, 58 

Exposition, The, pp. 11-205 

Expounding, 24 

Equipped the Church, how Christ has, 10 

Extent of church power, pp. 25-29 

Extraordinary cases, 134 

meetings of courts, 55 

officers, 32 

Fasting, 24 

Form churches, Presbytery to, 77 : 13 

Form of Government, pp. 11-169 

General Assembly, see Assembly. 

General offences, 154 

General review, pp. 238-243 

cases of process not subject to, 243 

Gospel ministry, see Ministers. 

Government and Discipline, questions concerning, ... 112:3 

doctrine of church, pp. 11-17 

Form of, pp. 11-169 



S88 ln^v^T^x. 

Par. 
Government — 

functions of the Churcli as a, 17 

of the Church, Christ's offices in, 9 

scriptural form of, 1 

Hand of fellowship in ordination, right, 121, p. 138 

reception after installation, 122 

Hands, laying on, p. 138, pp. 149-150 

Head of the Church, 8, pp. 18-22 

Heresy, 200 

Higher courts, 61 

action of, in reviewing records, 242 

judgment to be sent down, 189 

modes of carrying causes to, 238, pp. 237-256 

Indictment, contents of, 174 

drawing, 174 

form of, 164 

Induction into office, see Ordination and Installation. 

Indefinite suspension, 226 

Infant members and baptism, 29 

Inferior courts, see Lower courts. 

Infliction of censures, 226, pp. 221-226 

Injunctions, 67 : 13 ; 77 :9 ; 84 

Interrogatories, written, 215 

Installation, p. 147, question 8 

by commission, 93 

of an ordained Minister, 125 

of Elders and Deacons, 115, p. 139 end. 

question to Pastor at, p. 147 

questions to church at, 120 

who shall conduct, 77 :4 ; 121 

Instituting process, 162 

conditions to 173, 198 

time of, 191 

Instruction by Assembly, 90 : 4 

Investigation, 162 

Irrelevant questions, 210 

Jesus Christ as King and Head, 8 

Judgment, arrest of, by absence of records, 266 

effect of appeal on, 265 

of higher court to be sent down, 189 

Judicial committee, 182 

Jurisdiction, pp. 258-265 

of church courts, pp. 68-75 

not civil, 59 



Index. 289 

Par. 
Jurisdiction — 

original, place of, 161 

over members in transition, 278 

over Ministers and Probationers in transition, 280 

renouncing, 237 

transfer of, pp. 264-265 

King of the Cliurch, 8, pp. 18-22 

Knowledge of our system important, p. 7 

Licensure, pp. 156-166 

act and form of, 134 

object of, 129 

questions at, 135 

requisites to, 132-134 

requisites to, preliminary, 131 

revoking, 140 

trials for, in what Presbytery, 130 

trial pieces in, p. 161 

Lord's supper, , 24 

admission of children to, 149 

absenting one's self from, 235 

preventing accused from, 195 

Lower courts, 61 

process against, 245 

rights of members of, 239 

rules of process against, 246 

Measures, proposing (see also Concerting), .... 77:18; 84:8 

Meetings, Assembly, 90 : 11 

extraordinary, 55 

how opened and closed, , . , 57 

Presbytery's, 79 

Sessional, 68 

Synod's, 82 

Members, church, pp. 42-44 

Members, corresponding, 80, 83 

of a church, 20 

of Assembly, 87 

of Presbytery, 72 

of Session, 63 

of Synod, 81 

of the Visible Church, 3 

receiving, 67 : 4 

Memorials, 245 

Ministers, pp= 46-54 



290 Ij^dex. 

Par 
Ministers — 

admission of, to Presbytery, 75 

and Assembly, 90 : 11 

Presbytery, 77 :4, 8 

Synod, 84:5 

breach of covenant engagements by, 205 

classification of, 37 

contumacy of, 199 

dignity of, 35 

divestiture of, without process, 205 

in transition, 280 

ordination of, pp. 141-151 

process against, pp. 210-215 

conditions to instituting, 198 

where entered, 196 

qualifications of, 36 

receiving charges against, 197 

restoration of, 233 

subscription of, 76 

titles of, 35 

Moderator at an election, 103 

duties of, 55 

Elder as, 43 

of Session in absence of Pastor, 65 

when no Pastor, 65 

when several Pastors, 66 

powers of, 55 

who is, 54 

New testimony, 218-219 

trial, 218-219 

Non-communicants, 30 

adult, 30, 150 

belong to what church, 151 

discipline of, pp. 174-176 

tabular record of, 70 

transfer to roll of, 235 

Notice of appeal, 258 

Notice of complaint, 268 

Oath of witnesses, 211 

Offences, pp. 176-181 

classified, 153 

defined, 152 

general, 154 

outside territorial jurisdiction, 180 



Index. 291 

Offences — 

personal, I54 

Pi-ivate, 155 

public, 155 

why grounds of discipline, 153 

Officers, 4, pp. 44-02 

and a particular church, 21 

and church power, 16 

classification of, pp. 44-46 

election of, 97, pp. 125-133 

extraordinary, -. 32 

ordinary, 33 

transfer of, 277 

Order of proceedings in appeal, 261 

in complaint, 269 

in trial, 186 

Orders, 6, pp. 121-166 

Ordinances of worship, 24 

Ordination pp. 123-125 

acts of, 112, 119, 121 

agent of, 98 

and installation, 101 

and vocation, p. 123 

by commission, 93 

conditions to, 98 

defined, 100 

is by a court 99 

is to a definite work, . 101 

of Elders and Deacons, pp. 133-138 

acts of. 112 

doctrinal statement at, 112 

questions at, 112 

sermon at, 112 

of Evangelists, 123 

of Ministers, pp. 141-151 

acts of, 119-121 

conditions to, 117 

place of, 118 

Presbytery of, 124 

proceedings at, 119 

questions at, 119 

sermon at, 119 

who to conduct, 121 

Organic union, ..,,.,.. 90 : 13 and 14 



292 Index. 

Par 

Organization of a particular church, pp. 36-42 

Original jurisdiction, 161 

Parents and their children, 147 

Particular church, *. 14, pp. 29-36 

defined, 20 

officers of, 21 

organization of, pp. 36-42 

Parties in process, see Process. 

Pastor {see also Call, Installation, etc.) , 38 

election of, 102 

translation of, 126 

Pastoral charge, resignation of, 128 

relation, formation and dissolution, pp. 141-156 

of deposed or suspended, 203 

Plead, refusal to, 177 

Pleading, 174 

Power of church courts, 60 

divine sanction of, 19 

nature and extent of, pp. 25-29 

officers and, 16 

people and, 15 

Powers of Assembly, 90 

advice, 90:4 

agencies, 90:10 

appeals, 90:1 

complaints, 90:1 

Constitution, 90 : 6 

controversies, 90 : 3 

correspondence, 90 : 16 

decision of controversies, 90 : 6 

deliverances, 90 : 2 

disorders, 90 : 7 

error and immorality, 90 : 2 

instruction, 90 : 4 

measures, 90 : 8 and 17' 

Ministers, 90:11 

order, 90:7 

Presbyteries, 90:6 and 7 

references, 90 : 1 

schismatic contentions, 90 : 12 

superintendence, general, 90 : 15 

Sessions, 90 : 6 and 7 

Synods, 90:5,6,7 and 9 

PiDwers of Presbytery, ,,,,..,., 77 



Index. 293 

Tak. 

Powers of Presbj^teiy — 

appeals, 77:1 

candidates, 77:3 

eliurelies, 77 : 11-14 and 16 

commissioners to Assembly, 77 :17 

complaints, 77:1 

errors, 77 : 10 

Evangelists, 77 : 7 

injunctions, 77 : 9 

measures, 77 : 15 

Ministers, 77:4 and 8 

pastoral relation, 77 : 6 

references, 77:1 

Sessions, 77 : 5 

Session's jurisdiction, 77 : 2 

Powers of Session, 67 

assembling the people, 67 : 11 

baptism of children, 67 : 3 

Bible classes, 67 : 8 

censure, 67 : 2 

collections, 67 : 9 

Deacons, 67:6 and 7 

dismissing members, 67 : 5 

Elders, 67 :6 

injunctions, 67 : 13 

inquiry, 67:1 

measures, 67 : 12 

receiving members, 67 : 4 

representatives to Presbytery, 67 :14 

representatives to Synod, 67 : 14 

Sabbath-schools, 67 : 8 

singing, 67:10 

Powers of Synod, 84 

appeals, 84:1 

churches, 84:6 

complaints, 84 : 1 

Constitution, 84 :3 

injunctions, 84 : 3 

measures, 84 : 7 and 8 

Ministers, 84:5 

Presbyteries, 84 :2, 4 and 6 

references, 84:1 

Sessions, 84:6 

Praise 24 



294 Index. 

Pab. 

Prayer, 24, 57, 71 

Preaching, 24 

Preface, pp. 5-10 

Presbytery, pp. 89-107 

admission of Ministers to, 75 

boundaries of, 72 

corresponding members of, 80 

doctrine of, its necessity, 7 

meetings of, 79 

members of, 72 

powers of, see Powers of Presbytery. 

quorum of, 74 

records of, 78 

territory of, 72 

visiting brethren of, 80 

Private offences, 155, 198 

Probationer, call to, 117 

in transition, 280 

licensure of, pp. 156-166 

Presbytery and, 139 

transfer of, 137 

Process, pp. 191-215 

against church members, 192 

lower courts, . 245 

rules of, 246 

Ministers, pp. 210-215 

for private offences, 198 

before Session, pp. 207-209 

Presbytery, pp. 210-215 

cases of, not subject to general review, 243 

cases without, pp. 231-237 

censure without, 234 

instituting, see Instituting process. 

parties in, pp. 184-191 

transfer to roll of non-communicants without, 235 

Professors of religion, 31 

Prosecutor, 163 

appointed, 166 

voluntary, 166 

warning to, 169 

Protest, pp. 256-257 

answer to, 274 

defined, 273 

record of, 274 



Index. 29 



Par. 

Protest, who may, 275 

Qualifications of Deacons, 48 

Elders, 44 

Ministers, 36 

voters, 105 

Questions arising in a trial, 185 

at installation to the church, pp. 147-149 

Questions at installation to the Minister, pp. 145-147 

at licensure, 135 

at ordination of Minister, pp. 145-147 

Elder or Deacon, Ha 

irrelevant, 21G 

Quorum of Assembly, 89 

church, p. 127 

Presbytery, 74 

Session, 63 

Synod, 82 

Reading, 24 

Receiving churches, 77:13 

members, 67:4 

Reclamation without prosecution, 165, 167 

Records in appeal, 266 

in complaint, 271 

in reference, 254 

of a cause, 189 

of Deacons, 67:7 

of Presbytery, 78, 84 

of Session, . 69, 77 : 5 

of Synods, 85, 90:5 

Records, review of, see Review of records. 

Records, review outside, 244 

tabular, 70 

References, pp. 243-246 

cases proper for, 248 

caution against, 251 

court to which, 253 

defined, 247 

discretion of the higher court, 252 

effect, 250 

object of, 249 

records in, 254 

Re-installation, 115 

Removal of censures, pp. 225-231 

from a Mnister, pp. 230-231 



296 Index. 

Pae. 

Eepresentatives to Presbytery and Synod, 67 : 14 

Eesignation of pastoral charge, 128 

Respondent in complaint, 269 

Restoration from deposition, 230 

excommunication, 229 

suspension, 228 

of a Minister, , 233 

deposed, 203 

Review, general, pp. 238-243 

process not subject to, 243 

Review of records, 240 

action in, 242 

scope of, 241 

outside of records, 244 

Roll of absentees, 279 

non-communicants, 235 

Ruling Elder, see Elder. 

Sabbath-schools, 67 : 8 

Scandal, 201 

Schism, 200 

Sentence, when it takes effect, p. 225 

Separate roll, 279 

Sermon at installation or ordination, 112, p. 145 

Serm-on, opening, 54 

Serving citations, 181 

Session, 22, pp. 75-89 

and Presbytery, 77 : 5 

and Synod, 84:6 

and worship, 25, 67 : 11 

at an election, p. 129 

in ordination of Elder or Deacon, Ill 

meetings of, 68 

members of, 63 

powers of {see Powers of Session) , 67 

quorum of, 63 

Singing, 57, 67 : 10 

Standards, 11 

doctrinal, p. 135 

Statement by the Moderator at ordination, 112, 119 

Subscription by Ministers, 76 

Superintendence, general, 90 : 15 

Suspended Minister, pastoral relation of, 204 

treatment of one, 227 

Suspension, 158, p. 228 



IlSTDEX. 297 

Suspension — 

indefinite, 224 

of official functions of accused, 170 

restoration from, 228 

Synod, pp. 107-109 

corresponding members of, 83 

meetings of, 82 

members of, 81 

new, 90 :9 

powers of, see Powers of Synod. 

quorum of, 82 

visiting brethren of, 83 

Tabular records, 70 

Teacher, the, 39 

Territorial district, 72 

Testify, contumacy for refusing to, 217 

Testifying against error by Assembly, 90 : 2 

does not disqualify, 216 

exempted from, 206, 207 

Testimouj", commission to take, 179, 215 

new, 218, 219 

taking, at a distance, 179 

by written interrogatories, 215 

writing the, 212 

Thanksgiving, public, 24 

Title, p. 1 

Titles, dignity and, 35 

official, 34 

Transfer of church members, 276 

of jurisdiction, pp. 264-265 

of persons under censure, 232 

to roll of non-communicants, 235 

without consent, 277 

Transition, jurisdiction over — 

members in, 278 

Ministers in, 280 

Probationers in, 280 

Uniting churches, 77 : 12 

Unity of the Church, 12 

Vacant churches, 77 : 14 

Visible Church, pp. 22-25 

members of, 3 

Visitation, 77 : 11 ; 93 

Visiting brethren , 80, 83 



^98 Index. 

Par. 

Vocation, pp. 121-123 

ordinary, 96 

ordination and, distinguislied, p. 123 

Vote necessary to election, 104 

Witnesses, competency of, 206 

examination of, 184, 210 

separation of, 209 

Worship, ordinances of, 24 



C 161899 



